HP 4952A
Protocol Analyzer
()ponUin>^
Manual
HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer
operating Manual
Manual Part Number 04952-90082
Microfiche Part Number 04952-98818 Printed in U.S A. November 1989
Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of
one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace
products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP. Buyer shall
prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to the Buyer. However,
Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to HP from another country.
HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its
programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. HP does not warrant that the operation of
the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free.
Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defect resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer.
Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the
environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. No other warranty is
expressed or implied. HP specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
puipose.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are Buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. HP shall not be liable for any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tor, or any other legal theory.
©Copyright 1989 Hewlett-Packard Company.
Colorado Telecommunications Division
5070 Centennial Boulevard
Colorado Springs, CO, 80919-2497
2 - Warranty
Contents
Chapter 1: Introducing the HP 4952A
Initial Inspection 1-2
Line Voltage Selection 1-2
Grounding Requirements 1-2
Power Cord 1-2
Shipment 1-2
Transportation Disc 1-2
Using The Manuals 1-3
Getting Started Guide 1-3
Operating Manual 1-3
Power Up and Power Down 1-4
Turning the HP 4952A On 1-4
Turning the HP 4952A Off 1-4
Connecting the Pod 1-4
Reset 1-5
Major Features 1-5
Monitoring 1-5
Simulating 1-5
Remote Testing 1-5
Asynchronous Terminal Emulation 1-5
Microfloppy Disc Drive 1-5
Bit Error Rate Testing (BERT) 1-6
Printer and Video Output 1-6
The Front Panel 1-6
Display 1-6
Disc Drive 1-6
Keyboard 1-6
Contents - 3
The Rear Panel 1-8
The Pod 1-10
The Top Level Menu 1-12
Using the HP 4952A 1-13
Instrument Hookup 1-13
Pod Hookup 1-13
Setup 1-14
Execute 1-14
Evaluate 1-14
Chapter 2; Auto Configure
Introduction 2-2
Using Auto Configure 2-2
Auto Configure Results 2-3
Auto Configure Algorithm 2-3
Auto Configure As a Starting Point 2-5
Bit Oriented Protocols (BOPs) 2-5
Extended Address and Control in HDLC 2-5
Character Oriented Protocols 2-6
Auto Configure Error Messages 2-6
Waiting For Data 2-6
Waiting For Idles 2-6
Waiting For Frames 2-7
Waiting For Messages 2-7
No Pod Attached 2-7
Invalid Sync Characters 2-7
Invalid Asynchronous Speed / Invalid Synchronous Speed 2-7
Invalid Async Framing 2-7
Can't Configure Within the Time Limit 2-7
Contents - 4
Chapter 3: The Setup Menu
Setup Introduction 3-2
Setup Controls Other Menus 3-2
Using the Setup Menu 3-2
When To Use the Setup Menu 3-3
Saving Setups 3-3
Bit Oriented Protocols 3-4
Bit Oriented Setup Definitions 3-4
Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) Setup 3-5
BOP Menu Selections 3-7
Configure To Bit Oriented Lines 3-8
BSC Setup Definitions 3-9
BSC Setup Selections 3-10
BSC Setup 3-10
Character-oriented PRotocols (COPs) 3-11
When to Use the Char Menu 3-11
Char Setup Definitions 3-12
Char Setup Selections 3-13
Char Setup 3-14
Hexadecimal Entry and Parity 3-14
Sync Characters 3-15
Drop Sync Characters 3-16
Drop Sync and Error Checking 3-16
Capturing Unknown Data 3-17
Finding the Correct Framing 3-17
Eliminating Superfluous Data 3-18
Unusual Protocol Settings 3-19
IPARS Setup 3-19
Modified Error Check 3-21
X.75 3-21
Extended Asynchronous Baud Rates 3-22
Compatibility with other HP Protocol Analyzers 3-23
Contents - 5
Chapter 4: Introduction To Monitoring
Introduction 4-2
Two Types Of Monitoring 4-2
Monitoring the Line 4-3
Hookup 4-3
Setup 4-4
Display Mode 4-4
Monitor the Buffer 4-5
Setup 4-5
Collecting Data From the Line 4-5
The Monitor Menu 4-6
Monitor Menu Softkey Commands 4-7
Start 4-7
Stop 4-7
IncCtr 4-7
If 4-7
When Trig 4-7
Highlight 4-8
Beep 4-8
Reset 4-8
GotoBlk 4-8
Message 4-8
Gosub Block 4-8
Return 4-8
Insert Line 4-8
Insert Block 4-9
Delete Line 4-9
Delete Block 4-9
Delete Prg 4-9
Print Prog 4-9
Move Crsr 4-9
Move Cursor 4-9
Compatibility With Other HP Protocol Analyzers 4-10
Contents - 6
Monitor Programs 4-11
Softkey Programming 4-11
Setup 4-11
Moving Through the Menu 4-11
Blocks 4-12
Inserting and Deleting Lines and Blocks 4-12
Inserting and Deleting Characters 4-12
Executing Monitor Programs ~ The Run Menu 4-12
Triggering 4-13
Defining Triggers 4-13
Triggers Prove a Reference 4-13
Types of Triggers 4-14
Marking Triggers 4-15
Measuring Time 4-16
Measuring Time Between Triggers 4-16
How to Access Timers 4-16
Reset a Timer to Zero 4-17
Stop a Timer Without Resetting 4-17
How Timers Work 4-18
Cursor Timing 4-18
The Effect of the Data Filter on Timing 4-18
Counting Events 4-19
Accessing the HQBQ Softkey 4-19
Countable Events 4-19
Resetting Counters 4-20
Decrementing Counters 4-20
Example 1: Counting Parity Errors 4-20
Example 2: Counting Positive Lead Changes 4-20
Conditional Branching 4-21
Accessing the DQ| Softkey 4-21
When is Lead Status Checked? 4-21
Example: 'If Lead' 4-22
'If Counter' 4-22
Example: 'If Counter' 4-22
How 'If and 'When' are Different 4-23
Combining 'If Statements 4-23
Combining 'If and 'When' 4-24
Contents - 7
Unconditional Branching 4-25
'If and 'When' Always Force a Branch 4-25
Program Pauses 4-26
Using a Timer to Pause 4-26
Using a Counter to Pause 4-27
Starting and Stopping 4-28
'Start' and 'Stop' Need a Reference 4-28
Filtering Data with 'Start' and 'Stop' 4-28
'Start' and 'Stop' Disc 4-29
'Start' and 'Stop' Display 4-30
'Stop Tests' 4-31
Commenting 4-32
Uses for 'Message' 4-32
How to Enter Messages 4-32
How to Display Messages During Execution 4-33
Example: Using a Prompt 4-33
Subprograms 4-34
Example 1: Subprograms 4-34
Example 2: Using a Delay Repeatedly 4-35
Monitor Error Messages 4-36
Max Length 4-36
Max Strings 4-36
Menu Full 4-36
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu 4-36
No File; Run Aborted 4-36
File Already Exists 4-36
DLC Error 4-36
Monitor Status Messages 4-37
Text 4-37
Not Text 4-37
Hex 4-37
Not Hex 4-37
Binary 4-37
End Frame 4-37
Start Flag 4-37
Contents - 8
Chapters: Triggering
Introduction 5-2
When Statements Define Triggers 5-2
Triggers Provide a Reference 5-2
Triggers Stop Execution 5-3
Trigger Types 5-4
Multiple Triggers 5-5
ORing Triggers 5-5
Sequencing Triggers 5-6
Overlapping and Duplicate Triggers 5-6
Continuation Of Triggering 5-7
Branching From a Trigger 5-8
Triggering On Characters 5-9
How To Select Characters 5-9
Hex or Binary Equivalent Of a Character 5-10
Edit Character Strings 5-10
Setup After Typing a String 5-10
Character Not On the Keyboard 5-10
Binary and Hex Characters 5-10
Masking Out Characters 5-11
Excluding Characters 5-11
Flags and Frame Check Characters 5-11
Parity 5-11
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 5-11
Triggering On Errors 5-12
Example: Counting Errors 5-12
Triggering On Leads 5-13
Example: Looking For Illegal RTS/CTS Transitions 5-13
Triggering On Timers 5-14
Example: Beeping After Two Minutes 5-14
Triggering OnSoftkeys 5-15
Example: Using a Prompt 5-15
Contents - 9
Chapter 6: Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Introduction 6-2
'Send' and 'When' Strings 6-2
Accessing the HJl>il and Iffflfc^ Softkeys 6-2
Level 2 Softkeys 6-3
Level 3 Softkeys 6-3
General Procedure For Level 2 and 3 Assist 6-3
The IHH Softkey 6-4
The Address Field 6-4
Frame Type 6-5
The IHO Softkey 6-7
Selecting HAUB^^ Before MW-XUmrM 6-7
Three Entry Points - GFI, LCN, Packet Type 6-7
The GFI Field 6-8
The LCGN Field 6-8
The LCN Field 6-8
The Packet-Type Field 6-9
Entering a Level 2 'When' String 6-10
Entering a Level 3 'When' String 6-12
Entering a Level 2 'Send' String 6-15
Entering a Level 3 'Send' String 6-17
Chapter 7: Simulating
Introduction 7-2
Connect the HP 4952A For Simulating 7-2
Device Selection 7-3
Setup for Simulating 7-3
Lead Handshaking 7-3
The Simulate Menu 7-4
Contents- 10
Simulate Softkeys 7-5
Start 7-5
Stop 7-5
IncCtr 7-5
If 7-5
When 7-5
Send 7-5
Highlight 7-6
Beep 7-6
Reset 7-6
GotoBlk 7-6
Set Lead 7-6
Wait 7-6
Message 7-6
Gosub Block. 7-6
Return 7-7
Insert Line 7-7
Insert Block 7-7
Delete Line 7-7
Delete Block 7-7
Delete Prg 7-7
Print Prog 7-7
Move Crsr 7-7
Compatibilty With Other HP Protocol Analyzers 7-8
Simulate Functions 7-9
Sending Characters 7-9
Setting Leads 7-9
Delaying Output 7-9
Contents - 1 1
Sending Characters 7-10
Handshaking Requirements 7-10
How to Select ^SM Characters 7-10
Control Characters 7-11
When a Character is Not on the Keyboard 7-11
Binary and Hex Characters 7-12
How to Edit Character Strings 7-12
Sending Idles 7-12
Block Check Characters 7-12
Flags and Frame Check Characters 7-13
Parity Bits 7-13
Zero Bit Insertion 7-14
Changing the Setup After Typing the String 7-14
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 7-14
Using Timers with jjjggQQ 7-15
Controlling Interface Leads 7-16
When Are Leads On or Off? 7-16
Which Leads Can Be Controlled? 7-16
HP 4952A Lead Status During Simulation 7-16
HP 4952A Lead Status When Not Simulating 7-17
Example: Simulating a DTE 7-17
Delaying Output 7-18
BEn Controls Output Only 7-18
Delaying Characters or Leads 7-18
Simulate Error Messages 7-19
Max Length 7-19
Max Strings 7-19
Menu Full 7-19
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu 7-19
No File; Run Aborted 7-19
File Already Exists 7-19
DLC Error 7-19
Simulate Status Messages 7-20
Text 7-20
Not Text 7-20
Hex 7-20
Not Hex 7-20
Binary 7-20
End Frame 7-20
Start Flag 7-20
Contents- 12
Chapter 8: The Run Menu
Introduction 8-2
Run Menu Softkeys 8-2
Monitor Line 8-2
Monitor Buffer 8-2
Simulate 8-3
Data Filter 8-3
Data Filter Definitions 8-4
BERT 8-5
Displaying Data 8-6
Full Duplex and Half Duplex Data 8-6
Blinking Characters 8-6
Run-Time Messages 8-7
Hex/Text 8-7
Stop Display/Start Display 8-7
Buf = n 8-7
Prg = n 8-7
Summary/Data Display 8-7
Exploding Diamond (< >) 8-8
No Pod Attached 8-8
Buffer Overflow 8-8
Receiver Overrun 8-8
Invalid Monitor/Simulate Menu 8-8
Chapter 9: The Examine Data Menu
Introduction 9-2
Viewing the Buffer 9-2
How To Load the Buffer 9-2
Examine Data Menu Features 9-3
Viewing Timers and Counters After a Run 9-3
Viewing the Entire Buffer. 9-3
Bit Shifting 9-3
Decoding Characters 9-3
Cursor Timing 9-3
Decoding High Level Protocols 9-4
Cursor Memory 9-4
Extended Memory Board (Option 002) 9-4
Contents- 13
Examine Data Menu Softkeys 9-5
Hex and Text 9-5
Roll Up and Roll Down 9-5
Next Page and Prev Page 9-5
Timers and Counters 9-5
Specify Block 9-5
NextHilit 9-6
Next Segment and Prev Segment 9-6
Bit Shift 9-6
Start Time and End Time 9-7
Change Display 9-7
Print Summary and Data 9-7
Displaying Data 9-8
How Setup Affects the Display 9-9
Blinking Characters {.. 9-9
More On Cursor Timing 9-13
Lead Changes 9-13
COP Send Strings 9-13
Received COPs 9-13
Bit Oriented Protocols 9-14
Timing Resolution 9-14
Cursor Timing Limits 9-15
The Effect Of the Data Filter Upon Timing 9-15
Examine Data Error Messages 9-17
No data in buffer - Use EXIT key to exit 9-17
No displayable data in buffer for the selected display format 9-17
Disc removed during a read operation 9-17
Disc read error: buffer data invalid 9-17
End of valid data 9-17
Start of valid data 9-17
No more highlights 9-17
End of disc file 9-17
End of Data Segment 9-18
Start of Data Segment 9-18
Contents- 14
Chapter 10: Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Definitions 10-2
PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence) 10-2
Bit Error Rate 10-2
Blocks 10-2
Block Error Rate 10-2
Block Sizes 10-2
BERT Menu Softkeys 10-3
Pattern 10-3
Block Size 10-3
Duration 10-3
Bits/Sec 10-3
Framing 10-3
Parity 10-3
BERT Menu Selections 10-4
Compatibility With the HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer 10-5
Running a BERT Test 10-5
Data Screen 10-5
Completion Of a Test 10-5
% Error-Free Seconds 10-5
Exit Key 10-5
Setup Summary 10-5
Data Screen Definitions 10-6
Elapsed Seconds 10-6
Errored Seconds 10-6
% Error-Free Seconds 10-6
Block Count 10-6
Block Errors 10-6
Bit Count 10-6
Bit Errors 10-6
Inject Error 10-7
Inject 10 Errors 10-7
Compatibility with other BERT Testers 10-7
Synchronization 10-7
Handshaking 10-7
DCEBERT 10-8
Loading the Application 10-8
DCEBERT Setup 10-9
Contents - 15
BERT Error Messages 10-13
Bad Data - Cannot Sync 10-13
Data Error - Sync Lost 10-13
No Data Present 10-13
Clock Slipped During Run 10-13
Sync Lost One or More Times 10-13
Examples 10-14
Example 1: End-to-End Testing 10-14
Example 2: Loopback Testing 10-15
Other Tests 10-16
Quick Brown Fox Tets 10-16
Startup Tests 10-16
Chapter 11; The Remote Menu
Introduction 11-2
Remote Setup 11-2
Remote Operations...... 11-3
Resetting to Top Level 11-3
Lockout Slave's Keyboard 11-3
Ending Remote Operations 11-3
Remote Restrictions 11-3
Remote Data Transfer 11-4
Controller Softkeys 11-9
ID Slave 11-9
Slave Status 11-9
Execute Run 11-9
Reset Slave 11-9
Upload Timers and Counter 11-9
Lock Keyboard 11-9
Enable Keyboard 11-9
Run Application 11-10
Download Application 11-10
Upload Application 11-10
Download Menu 11-10
Delete Application 11-10
Download Data 11-10
Upload Data 11-10
Remote BERT 11-10
Remote Menu - Controller Configuration 11-11
Remote Menu ~ Slave Configuration 11-11
Contents- 16
Modem Operations 11-12
Modem Strings 11-12
Modem Handshaking 11-12
Operations Without Modems 11-12
Remote X.25 Packet Switched Network 11-13
Tape To Disc File Transfer 11-13
Remote Status Messages 11-14
AppHcation Cannot be Run on 4952 11-14
Apphcation Already Loaded 11-14
Invalid Application for 4952 11-14
Menus Incompatible with 4952 11-14
Must Reset Slave First 11-14
Must Reset Slave to Top Level 11-14
No Data in Buffer 11-14
No Application Resident 11-14
Reset Slave and Retry Operation 11-14
Chapter 12: Mass Storage
Introduction 12-2
The Disc Drive 12-2
The Opional Extended Memory Plus Memory Board (Opt 002) 12-2
The Mass Store Menu 12-3
MSD = RAM 12-3
Directory 12-3
Format 12-4
Load 12-4
Store 12-4
Delete 12-5
Recover 12-5
Pack Disc 12-5
Rename 12-6
Print Directory 12-6
Loading From Disc 12-7
Menus May Be Changed After Loading 12-7
Loading Files Larger Than the Buffer 12-7
Autostart Files 12-8
Contents - 17
storing To Disc 12-9
What You Can Store To Disc 12-9
Storing Data Directly From the Line 12-10
The Extended Memory Board (Option 002) 12-11
The Extended Capture Buffer (ECB) 12-11
The RAM Disc 12-11
Using the RAM Disc 12-12
Select the RAM Disc 12-12
Using the RAM Disc 12-12
The Extended Capture Buffer (ECB) 12-13
Summary Of Facts About the ECB 12-13
Loading the ECB 12-13
Storing To Disc From the ECB 12-14
Printing from the ECB 12-14
Memory Blocks and Disc Sectors 12-15
The Disc Drive 12-16
Type of Discs 12-16
Care and Handling of Discs 12-16
Cleaning the Disc Drive 12-17
Inserting a Disc 12-18
Removing a Disc 12-18
Write-Protecting a Disc 12-19
Copy Disc Utility 12-20
Copying Discs 12-21
Archiving All Contents Of RAM Disc To Flexible Disc 12-22
Restoring the Archive File On Flexible Disc To RAM Disc 12-23
Directory 12-23
Delete 12-23
Format 12-24
Pack Disc 12-24
Print Dir 12-24
Contents - 18
Chapter 13: ASCII Printer Output
Introduction 13-2
Hookup 13-2
Setup 13-3
Character Code 13-3
Parity 13-3
Bits/sec 13-3
Handshake 13-3
Line Terminators 13-3
Carriage Return Delay 13-3
Enquire/Acknowledge (ENQ/ACK) Hand Shaking 13-4
XOn/XOff Hand Shaking 13-4
Control Lead Hand Shaking 13-4
Getting Things Printed 13-5
Printed Output 13-6
Printing the Entire ECB 13-7
How the Printer Displays Characters 13-8
Hexadecimal Characters 13-8
ASCII Control Characters 13-9
Special Characters 13-9
Lead Levels 13-9
Print Error Messages 13-10
Handshake Error 13-10
Printer Error 13-10
Remote Timeout 13-10
Chapter 14: Async Terminal Emulator
Introduction 14-2
Equipment Supplied 14-2
Applications 14-2
Specifications 14-3
Loading the Terminal Emulator Application 14-4
Terminal Setup 14-4
Setup Menu 14-4
Setup = Simulate 14-6
Simulate 14-6
Execute 14-7
Contents- 19
Terminal Operation 14-8
VT-100 Terminal Emulation 14-9
Lead Control 14-10
Hardware Handshake 14-11
Software Handshake 14-11
ENQ/ACK Handshake 14-11
Manual Flow Control 14-11
Chapter 15: Interface Pods
Introduction 15-2
RS-232C/V.24 Interfaces 15-2
RS-449 Interfaces 15-3
V.35 Interfaces 15-3
Interface Pod Installation 15-4
HP 18179A Interface (RS-232C/V.24) 15-5
LEDs 15-6
Disconnect Switches 15-6
Connectors For RS-232C/V.24 Y-Cable 15-6
Full Breakout Box 15-6
Jumper Pins 15-6
+ /-12 V Source Pins 15-7
Mark/Space Indicator 15-7
Instrument Cable Connector 15-7
The HP 18180A Interface (RS-232C/V.24 and RS-449) 15-8
Connectors 15-8
Jumper Pins 15-8
LCD Indicators 15-8
Source Pins 15-9
Disconnect (breakout) Switches 15-9
Mark/Space Monitor 15-9
The HP 18260A Interface (RS-232C/V.24 and X.21) 15-10
RS-232C Portion 15-10
X.21 Portion 15-11
The HP 18174A Interface (RS-449) 15-12
The HP 18177A Interface (V.35) 15-14
Contents - 20
The HP 18160A (RS-232C and V.35) 15-15
Monitor, DCE Simulate, DTE Simulate Modes 15-15
LEDs 15-15
Jumper Pins 15-16
Source Pins 15-16
Disconnect (breakout) Switches 15-16
Mark/Space Indicator 15-16
The HP 18270A ISDN Interface Module 15-20
HP 18270A ISDN Interface Module Hardware Only 15-20
HP 18268A ISDN Software Only 15-20
Chapter 16: Examples
Example 1: Measuring a Single RTS-CTS Delay 16-2
Example 2: Monitoring a DCE 16-3
Example 3: Monitoring a DTE 16-3
Example 4: FOX Message 16-4
Example 5: Counting Parity Errors 16-5
Example 6: Measuring More Than One RTS-CTS Delay 16-8
Example 7: Simulating RTS-CTS Delay 16-10
Example 8: Loopback 16-12
Example 9: END-TO-END: Transmit First 16-14
Example 10: END-TO-END: Receive First 16-16
Appendix A: Error Messages
Error Messages A-2
Appendix B: Specifications and Accessories
Specifications B-2
Operating Characteristics B-3
Accessories B-6
Options B-8
Interface Accessories B-9
Contents - 21
Appendix C: OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables
Level 2: The Data Link Interface C-2
Character Oriented Protocol C-2
Bit Oriented Protocol C-2
Types of BOP Frames C-3
Unnumbered Format Commands C-4
Unnumbered Format Responses C-4
Sample Monitor Menu Triggers C-5
Levels C-6
Packet Construction (Modulo 8) C-6
Data Packets C-7
Appendix D: Service Information
Power Requirements D-2
Adjustments D-5
Performance Verification D-5
Packaging D-10
Appendix E: External Video Output
Introduction to RS-170 E-2
Appendix F: Blank
Appendix G: Data Code Tables
Contents - 22
Illustrations
Chapter 1: Introducing the HP 4952A
Figure 1-1. The Front Panel 1-7
Figure 1-2. The Rear Panel 1-9
Figure 1-3. The HP 18179A Interface Pod 1-11
Chapter 2: Auto Configure
Figure 2-1. Auto Configure Algorithm 2-4
Chapters: The Setup Menu
Chapter 4: Monitoring
Figure 4-1. Hookup for Monitoring the Line 4-3
Chapters: Triggers
Chapter 6: Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Chapter?: Simulating
Figure 7-1. Hookup for Simulating 7-2
Chapter 8: The Run Menu
Chapter 9: The Examine Data Menu
Figure 9-1. Two Line Format 9-9
Figure 9-2. DTE Only 9-10
Figure 9-3. DCE Only 9-11
Figure 9-4. Data and State Format 9-11
Figure 9-5. Frame Only 9-12
Figure 9-6. Packet Format 9-12
Illustrations - 23
Chapter 10. Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Figure 10-1. Asynchronous Screen Selections 10-10
Figure 10-2. Synchronous Screen Selections 10-11
Figure 10-3. Isochronous Screen Selections 10-12
Figure 10-4. End-to-End Testing 10-14
Figure 10-5. Loopback Testing 10-15
Chapter 11: The Remote Menu
Figure 11-1. Data Transfer 11-5
Figure 11-2. Controller Setup Menu 11-8
Chapter 12: Mass Storage
Figure 12-1. Inserting the Disc 12-18
Figure 12-2. Write Protecting Your Disc 12-19
Figure 12-3. Utility Disc Main Level Display 12-20
Figure 12-4. Copy Disc Utility Keys 12-21
Chapter 13: ASCII Printer Output
Figure 13-1. Connecting the Printer 13-2
Figure 13-2. Printed Output in Data & State Format 13-6
Figure 13-3. Printed Output in 2 Line Format 13-7
Chapter 14: Async Terminal Emulator
Chapter 15: Interface Pods
Figure 15-1. Interface Pod Connection 15-4
Figure 15-2. The HP 18179A Interface 15-5
Figure 15-3. The HP 18180A Interface 15-9
Figure 15-4. The HP.18174A Interface 15-12
Figure 15-5. The HP 18177A Interface 15-14
Figure 15-6. The HP 18160A Interface 15-17
Figure 15-7. RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Monitor Mode 15-17
Figure 15-8. RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DTE 15-18
Figure 15-9. RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DCE 15-18
Figure 15-10. V.35 Pod Configuration - Monitor Mode 15-19
Figure 15-11. V.35 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DCE 15-19
Illustrations - 24
Chapter 16: Examples
Appendix A: Error Messages
Appendix B: Specifications and Accessories
Appendix C: OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables
Appendix D: Service Information
Figure D-1. Itl.MA-liJrl Test Pattern D-8
Figure D-2. l*!.!-.!*^*! Test Pattern D-9
Appendix E: External Video Output
Appendix F: JIS Option
Illustrations - 25
Manufacturer's Declaration
The following certification (shown in German, followed by an English translation) applies only to products shipped
into Germany after June 1, 1985.
Hersteilerbescheinigung
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daB das Gerat/System
HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer
in Ubereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der Postverfugung 1046/84 funkentstort ist.
Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates/Systems angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur
Uberpriifung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeraumt.
Zusatzinformation fiir MeB- und Testgerate
Werden MeB- und Testgerate mit ungeschirmten Kabeln und/oder in offenen MeBaufbauten verwendet, so ist vom
Betreiber sicherzustellen, daB die Funk-entstorbestimmungen unter Betriebsbedingungen an seiner
Grundstiicksgrenze eingehalten werden.
Manufacturer's Declaration
This is to certify that the equipment
HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer
is in accordance with the Radio Interference Requirements of Directive FTZ 1046/1984. The German Bundespost
was notified that this equipment was put into circulation. The right to check this model type for compliance with
these requirements was granted.
Additional Information for Test- and Measurement Equipment
^ If Test and Measurement Equipment is operated with unscreened cables and/or used for
measurements on open set-ups, the user has to assure that under operating conditions the
Radio Interference Limits are still met at the border of his premises.
Manufacturer's Declaration - 26
Safety
Prior to operation of the equipment you must examine the instrument and review this document to ensure you are
completely familiar with all the safety markings and the operating instructions.
Warnings
The following WARNINGS define operating procedures, practices, etc., which, if not correctly followed, could result in
personal injury or loss of life.
WdrninQ ^'^ product is a Safety Class 1 instrument with a protective earth terminal.
^^^pp jpQ For protection from electric shock hazard, power cord ground must not be defeated.
Safety
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phase of operation, service, and repair of this
instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings in this manual violates safety
standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of this instrument. Hewlett-Packard Company assumes no
liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements.
Safety - 27
Grounding
lb minimize shock hazard, the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground. The
instrument is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable compatible with an approved three-contact electrical
outlet. The power jack and mating plug of the power cord must meet International Electrotechnical Commission
(IBC) safety standards.
Environment
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical instrument
in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Service and Adjustment
Dangerous voltages exist within this instrument. Service and adjustment of this instrument is to be performed only
by trained service personnel Operating personnel are not authorized to remove the instrument covers or to perform
any internal service or adjustment procedure.
Do not replace components with the power cable connected. Dangerous voltages may be present even when the
power cable is disconnected.
Do not perform internal servicing or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid and
resuscitation, is present.
CRT Handling
Rough handling or jarring of the instrument can break the CRT (cathode ray tube). The resulting implosion will
scatter glass fragments at high velocity. Removal or installation of the CRT is to be performed only by qualified
maintenance personnel using approved safety mask and gloves.
Unauthorized Service
The installation of substitute parts or the installation of any instrument modification not authorized by Hewlett-
Packard is specifically forbidden. The performance of such unauthorized service can negate the instrument warranty
or any maintenance agreements.
Return the instrument to a Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office for authorized service and repair.
28 - Safety
Printing History
New editions are complete revisions of the manual. Update packages (formerly known as "Manual Changes") are
issued between editions. They contain additional and replacement pages to be merged into the manual by the
customer. The dates on the title page change only when a new edition or a new update is published. No information
is incorporated into a reprinting unless it appears as a prior update. The edition does not change when an update is
incorporated.
Many product updates and fixes do not require manual changes and, conversely, manual corrections maybe done
without accompanying product changes. Therefore, do not expect a one-to-one correlation between product updates
and manual updates.
Edition 1 September 1988
Edition 2 August 1989
Editions October 1989
Edition 4 November 1989
Printing History - 29
Syntax Conventions
The following symbols, abbreviations, and other conventions are used in this publication.
Symbol Definition
ESgiBI Asoftkey.
[ Reset ] A keyboard command entiy.
^ fy > A control character entry from the keyboard where both the [ CTRL ] key and
alphanumeric key are pressed at the same time. To enter CONTROL U press [ CTRL )
and [F).
SWft
FILENAME
filename
A keyboard entry where both the [ Shift ) and a ||ggQjQ|Q| are pressed at the same time
to select an auxiliary softkey function.
Within menus or screens, a parameter that must be entered in the exact format shown.
Within menus or screens, a user-defined parameter.
Warning An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not correctly followed, could result in personal
injury or loss of life.
Caution An operating procedure, practice, etc. which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or
destruction of, equipment or software.
Note
Explanatory comments or supplementary instructions.
Syntax Conventions - 30
1
Introducing the HP 4952A
■ Initial Inspection
■ Using the Manuals
■ Power Up and Power Down
■ Major Features
■ The Front Panel
■ The Rear Panel
■ The Pod
■ The Top Level Menu
■ Using the HP 4952A
Introducing the HP 4952A 1 - 1
Initial Inspection
Pay close attention when opening the shipping container. Make sure you have received the
entire shipment with all appropriate options and manuals.
Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the container has any apparent damage, it
should be kept until the contents have been checked mechanically and electrically.
If the contents are not complete or if there is mechanical damage or defects notify the nearest
Hewlett-Packard service representative. Keep all shipping materials for the carrier's
inspection. The Hewlett-Packard office will arrange for immediate repair or replacement
without waiting for claim settlement.
Line Voltage Selection
There is no Une voltage selection: the HP 4952A may be connected to any ac power source
from 90 to 264 volts; and 48 to 66 Hz (See Appendix B).
Grounding Requirements
The HP 4952A is equipped with a three-conductor power cable that grounds the analyzer
when connected to an appropriate power outlet. To preserve this protection, do not operate
the analyzer while connected to a line power outlet with no ground protection.
Power Cord
An appropriate power cord is packaged with each analyzer depending upon its destination (see
Appendix D). If your protocol analyzer has the wrong power cord for your area, contact your
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Support Office.
Shipment
If your analyzer is being returned for service, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Field
Repair Center or Sales and Support office for complete shipping instructions. Be sure to
install the transportation disc before shipping.
Transportation Disc
Always transport the HP 4952A with the yellow plastic transportation disc installed.
1 - 2 Introducing the HP 4952A
Using the Manuals
The HP 4952A manual set consists of two manuals, the Getting Started guide cind the
Operating Manual.
Getting Started Guide
The Getting Started guide contains the basic information needed to begin using the HP 4952A.
It lets you get comfortable with pushing the buttons and how the menu structure has been
implemented.
The Getting Started guide contains:
■ Descriptions of front and rear panel controls, pod, and Top Level Menu.
■ Short step-by-step descriptions of all the instrument functions.
■ Explanation of monitoring with an optional self-demonstration.
■ Explanation of simulating with an optional self-demonstration.
■ Exercise on how to view buffer data with different display formats.
■ Exercise on how to load and store menus and data to disc.
■ How to perform Bit Error Rate Tests.
■ Examples of monitor and simulate programs stressing the fundamentals.
Operating Manual
The Operating Manual is the most complete and detailed reference material available. This
manual contains all the information necessary to operate, program, understand, and follow the
menu structure. Use this manual as a reference guide.
Introducing the HP 4952A 1 - 3
Power Up and Power Down
Turning the HP 4952A On
The HP 4952A may be connected to any AC power source from 90 to 264 volts; and 48 to 66
Hz. Connect the AC power cord to the HP 4952A power cord connector and then to the AC
Hne connector.
Set the power switch on the rear panel to the (1) position. If your instrument displays the Top
Level Menu, 4952 displayed in large, bold numbers, after power-on, you can be confident that
the internal circuits are working properly.
Turning the HP 4952A Off
CdUtion To save current setups and data, be sure to press EXIT and go to the Top
Level Menu before turning off the instrument. Otherwise, the analyzer may
reset to default parameters when you turn it back on.
Set the power switch on the rear panel to the (0) position when the analyzer is in the Top
Level Menu.
Connecting the Pod
CdUtion Make sure that instrument power is off when installing or removing the pod.
To install the pod, connect the interface pod cable to the interface pod connector on the rear
panel. Tighten the connector screws so the cable will not pull off during operation. Connect
the other end of the pod cable to the front of the interface pod.
1 - 4 Introducing the HP 4952A
Reset
To clear the buffer and to default setup parameters:
■ Press |3gg3| in the Top Level Menu, and then IrJJJJJJiULIIEl
■ Press |^^3i ui the Top Level Menu and press |^^33sI3fl3i to remove any
application programs that are loaded into the HP 4952A.
Major Features
The HP 4952A is a rugged portable protocol analyzer and BERT tester. Some of the major
features are:
Monitoring
The HP 4952A can recognize and monitor all major protocols and on all common interfaces at
speeds up to 64 kbits/sec. Auto Configure can find the protocol, speed, data code, and parity
of most datacommunication links. The HP 4952A will look for simultaneous triggering events,
count the events or measure the time between them.
Simulating
You can substitute the instrument for a DTE or DCE. This allows you to exercise the
datacommunication link and drive other devices on the line to isolate any malfunctions.
Remote Testing
The HP 4952A is capable of remote operation as either a controlling device or as a slave. The
unattended operation enables you to monitor or simulate without being at the remote site.
Asynchronous Terminal Emulation
Terminal emulation allows you the flexibility of an extra device and eliminates the need to
carry both the analyzer and a terminal in the field.
Microfloppy Disc Drive
The disc drive lets you store large amounts of data and setups on a 3 1/2 inch disc.
Introducing the HP 4952A 1 - 5
Bit Error Rate Testing (BERT)
BERT evaluates the integrity of the entire datacomm link.
Printer and Video Output
You can connect a printer for hard copy of data and menus. You can connect a video
monitor for a larger display.
The Front Panel
The front panel and keyboard section makes the HP 4952A an easy-to-use protocol analyzer
Display
The five inch screen displays 16 Unes of 32 characters. Softkey labels occupy the bottom two
lines and correspond to the six unlabelled hardkeys on the keyboard.
Disc Drive
The floppy disc drive is located on the front for dhect access and convenience.
Keyboard
The keyboard is designed similar to a conventional typewriter keybosird. The SHIFT keys are
used for capitalization, the CNTL key allows you to enter control characters directly from the
keyboard.
Beside the softkeys are the MORE and EXIT (HALT) keys. These keys are used for moving
around in the operating system menu structure. When MORE is displayed in the lower right
corner of the screen, press MORE for an extended selection of softkeys. Press EXIT to back
up a level in the menu structure.
In the top right corner of the keyboard are the arrow keys. Use these keys to place the cursor
in the data string or for making selections on the screen.
1 - 6 Introducing the HP 4952A
Soft Key Labels
Figure 1-1. The Front Panel
Introducing the HP 4952A 1 - 7
The Rear Panel
Line Switch
Remote/Printer
Interface Pod
Ext Video
Fuse Holder
Fan
Press the side of the Une switch labelled '1' to turn the
instrument on. Press the side labelled '0' to turn the
instrument off. You can connect the instrument to any ac
line voltage from 90 to 264 volts; and 48 to 66 Hz.
Use this connector to hook up a remote analyzer or an
ASCII printer. The HP 4952A acts physically as a DTE
through this port.
Use this connector to hook up the interface pod.
Use this connector to hook up an external video monitor.
The video output follows RS-170 conventions.
Remove the power cord before replacing the fuse. Open the
line switch module from the top with a small screwdriver to
replace the fuse.
The fan provides cooling for the instrument. Operation is
thermostatically controlled by the temperature of the
instrument so it does not need to run all of the time. The
fan may not run right away upon power up. Make sure
nothing obstructs the fan area.
1 - 8 introducing the HP 4952A
Fan Remote/Printer Interface Pod External Video Line Voltage Fuse Holder
Connector Connector Connector Switch
Figure 1-2. The Rear Panel
Introducing the HP 4952A 1 - 9
The Pod
The HP 4952A can be used with several different interfaces, each requiring a different pod.
The HP 18179A interface pod, which is used on RS-232C/V.24 interfaces is illustrated here.
LEDs
Disconnect Switches
The LEDs on the left side of the pod show 3-state activity
on the interface pins. The high impedance state is indicated
when both the green and the red LED are off.
Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 20, and 24 can be individually
disconnected from the data Unk by switches. This allows
you to isolate non-driven lines that cause cross-talk and
noise.
RS-232C/V.24
Connectors
These connectors are for connecting the pod to the line. To
include the breakout box portion of the pod in series,
connect the Y-cable to the top connector. To by-pass the
breakout box, connect the Y-cable to the bottom
connector.
Breakout Box
Mark/Space Indicator
+ /-12 V Source Pins
Instrument Connector
Instrument Cable
Y-Cable
Setting these switches provides cross-patching, line forcing,
and monitoring capabilities for all RS-232C/V.24 lines.
Use the miniature switches to isolate lines and the jumper
pins for patching.
Jumper any pin to this indicator to find the logical state.
Supply + 12 and -12 volts. You may set any signal line on
or off by jumpering that line to the source pins.
This connects the pod to the HP 4952A via the interface
pod cable.
Use this cable to connect the instrument to the pod.
Use this cable to connect the instrument to the line in
various configurations for monitoring or simulating.
1-10 Introducing the HP 4952A
Instrument Connector
LEDS
Disconnect Switches
Breakout Box
Mark/Space
Instrument Cable
+ /-12V Source Pins
Jumper Pins
RS-232C/V.24
Connectors
Y-Cable
Figure 1-3. The HP 18179 Interface Pod
Learning the Controls 1-11
The Top Level Menu
From the Top Level Menu you can access all instrument functions. Press EXIT once or twice
to get the Top Level Menu. Press MORE to see all the top level softkeys. The menus
accessed by softkeys from the Top Level Menu are:
ISBSUga
MEMSsaa
USEB
Press this softkey to automatically configure the HP
4952A to line parameters.
Use this menu to manually configure to Une parameters.
Use this menu to write programs for monitoring.
Use this menu to write programs for simulating.
Use this menu to execute all tests for monitoring,
simulating, or BERT. It also allows access to the data filter
setup menu.
Look at data in the buffer in this menu.
Reset all menus to their default conditions, clear buffer, or
remove applications from memory in this menu.
Configure the analyzer for bit error rate tests and display
results in this menu.
Use this menu to configure the analyzer for remote testing
and for printing to an ASCII printer.
Use this menu to load and store menus and data to or from
disc.
Perform self-test procedures in this menu and verify proper
operation of the HP 4952A and interface pod..
1-12 Introducing the HP 4952A
Using the HP 4952A
The HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer has been designed for ease-of-use with separate and distinct
menus. The menus are separate and functionally independent of each other, however,
selections in one menu dictate selections available in another. Because of the diverse
capabiUties and the interrelationships between menus, an overview of using the instrument is
necessary.
There are some very basic things that need done regardless of what your intended use of the
instrument is. They are:
1. Hook up the instriunent to the necessary pod (unless monitoring the buffer).
2. Hook up the instrument for your desired use, e.g., monitor the line, monitor the
buffer, simulate, BERT, etc.
3. Set up the HP 4952A to match the parameters of the line.
4. Access the menu you intend to use. Write a monitor or simulate program or load a
program or data from memory.
5. Enter the Run menu and execute the program or activity.
6. Use the Examine Data menu to evaluate the captured data.
Instrument Hookup
Connect the appropriate Y-cable in a configuration compatible with the needs of your desired
use (see the appropriate chapter for hookup details).
Pod Hookup
Connect the pod to the instrument using the cable supplied with the HP 4952A. The pod is
not necessary if you already have the data in memory and you intend to monitor the buffer.
Introducing the HP 4952A 1-13
Setup
Use the Setup menu or Auto Configure menu to match the parameters of the hne being tested
(see Chapters 2 or 3).
Execute
Select the menu necessary to run the appropriate test or program. This may be the Monitor,
Simulate, BERT, Remote, etc. You need to load a program, write a program, or run from the
line.
Evaluate
Enter the Examine Data menu and evaluate the data that was previously captured.
1-14 Introducing the HP 4952A
Auto Configure
Introduction
Auto Configure As a Starting Point
Auto Configure Results
Bit Oriented Protocols (BOPs)
Character Oriented Protocols (COPs)
Auto Configure Messages
Auto Configure 2-1
Introduction
Auto Configure automatically configures the HP 4952A to a line. The protocol analyzer will
evaluate the data stream on the line, make the setup based on the parameters it finds and
place the instrument in the monitor mode.
The Auto Configure softkey is conveniently located in the Top Level Menu, next to the
softkey. You can easily make the setups required to monitor and capture data using Auto
Configure. If the line parameters need to be changed or if you need to make any changes to
the current setup you must use the Setup Menu.
Using Auto Configure
Connect the analyzer to the line for monitoring (See Chapter 4). Press the 133233320
softkey on the Top Level Menu.
Pressing jj^Qjjjj^QQ causes the HP 4952A to evaluate the line parameters, identify the
presence and speed of clocks, look for common sync characters, identify parity and character
length, and put these measurement results into the setup menu.
Note A blinking asterisk is displayed whenever Auto Configure is working. This
indicates that the instrument is still checking line data.
If a good parameter match is found, the HP 4952A briefly shows the setup menu with the new
parameters, goes to the monitor mode, and begins displaying data. If a good match is not
found the previous setups are restored.
You may at any time press the EWBTM softkey to review the set-up results. To change the
display format, or any other setup parameter, halt the run by pressing EXIT, and then go to
the Setup Menu and modify the setup. Go back to the run menu and resume execution.
Note When monitoring begins. Auto Configure alters the setup menu and the
buffer data. If you need the present setup and buffer data save them on disc.
2-2 Auto Configure
Auto Configure Results
The HP 4952A Auto Configure function can have several results. It will evaluate data streams
and correctly determine COPs such as BSC, BOPs such as SDLC (NRZ or NRZI), HDLC
(X.25) and then determines appropriate data codes, ASCII, EBCDIC, Baudot.
Note Auto Configure cannot find IPARS or any inverted data case.
Data rates can be determined from 50 bps to 38.4 kbps for asynchronous and 1200 bps to 64
kbps synchronous.
Auto Configure Algorithm
The HP 4952A goes through a thorough examination of the data stream when iJll^MrfJiWai is
pressed. It is important for you to understand the process so you will understand the messages
that may appear (see Figure 2-1).
Note The Auto Configure algorithm first looks for clock activity on the line.
Crosstalk on the clock lines may result in the instrument thinking it has found
a false clock.
The analyzer first looks for a clock to determine sync or async data. When a clock is present
on the line:
1. The HP 4952A first determines the data rate.
2. The analyzer will then look for idle types. When the data idles in NRZI 7E the
analyzer automatically sets up in SDLC EBCDIC.
3. When the data idles in non-NRZI 7E the analyer sets up for synchronous BOPs.
4. When the data idles in FF the analyzer sets the data code and parity and then checks
for BSC. If the data is not BSC the instrument sets up for synchronous COPs.
5. When Auto Configure does not complete within 15 seconds, the HP 4952A will repeat
the process and try to auto configure again.
Auto Configure 2-3
When there is no clock on the line:
1. The analyzer again determines the data rate.
2. The analyzer looks at idles. If the idles are NRZI the setup is immediately set at
SDLC EBCDIC.
3. If the data idles in FF the analyzer determines how many bits per character. The
setup is made in ASYNC COPs depending on the bits/character.
4. When Auto Configure stops at any step for 45 seconds, it will begin the auto configure
process again.
GET DATA RATE
GET DATA RATE
ASCII 8 PLUS PARITY
FIG 2-1
Figure 2-1. Auto Configure Algorithm
2 - 4 Auto Configure
Auto Configure As a Starting Point
Auto Configure works with most protocols and data codes, however, it may not find all the
parameters if the protocol is nonstandard, there is insufficient information, or the data present
is not random.
Auto Configure provides a starting point for setup because it always finds some of the line
parameters. The setup parameters that Auto Configure finds are displayed as they are found,
but you must reenter these parameters into the Setup menu if Auto Configure completes only
a partial setup.
Bit Oriented Protocols (BOPs)
Auto Configure will setup synchronous, NRZ, and NRZI BOPs. BOPs are assumed to idle
the line in flags (7E).
BOPs will be setup as follows:
X.25 ASCIIS, no parity
HDLC ASCIIS, no parity
SDLC EBCDIC, no parity
(including clocked NRZI)
All BOPs will default to frame display format.
Extended Address and Control In HDLC
To observe extended address and control on HDLC lines, go to the setup menu and change
the protocol to HDLC. Turn on extended address and/or extended control, and change the
display format to Frame.
Auto Configure 2 - 5
Character Oriented Protocols (COPs)
Auto Configure always selects Char setup for character oriented protocols, unless it finds a
match with BSC setup. The sync and control characters in COPs must be standard (i.e.,
ASCII sync = ^e^6 and EBCDIC sync = 3232). COPs must idle the line in FF.
COPs will be setup as follows:
Synchronous
BSC ASCIIS, no parity, sync l6l6, error check LRC or CRC16
BSC ASCII7, odd parity, sync I6l6, error check LRC or CRC16
BSC EBCDIC, no parity, sync 3232, error check LRC or CRC16
CHAR EBCDIC, odd/even parity, sync 3232
CHAR EBCDIC, no parity, sync 3232
CHAR ASCIIS, odd/even parity, sync l6l6
CHAR ASCIIS, no parity, sync I6l6
CHAR ASCII7, odd/even parity, sync l6l6 or 9595
CHAR ASCII7, no parity, sync 1 6 1 6
Asynchronous
CHAR ASCIIS, odd/even/no parity
CHAR ASCII?, odd/even/no parity
CHAR Baudot, odd/even/no parity
All COPs will default to 2 line display format.
Auto Configure Messages
Waiting For Data
Either there is no line data, or the analyzer is still collecting sufficient data to make a
determination. Both data and idle conditions must be present.
Waiting For Idles
The analyzer is waiting for idles between data. Both data and idles must be present.
Character oriented protocols must have a minimum of ten idle characters between messages,
and bit oriented protocols must have ten flags between frames.
2-6 Auto Configure
Waiting for Frames
The analyzer has detected a bit-oriented protocol and is trying capture frames.
Waiting for Messages
The analyzer has detected a character-oriented protocol and is trying to capture data.
No Pod Attactied
The pod is not attached. Check the interface pod connections.
Invalid Sync Characters
Could not find any of the standard sync characters (ASCII = I6l6; EBCDIC = 3232).
Invalid Asynchronous Speed / Invalid Synchronous Speed
The bit rate is not within 5% of a standard selection.
Invalid Async Framing
The analyzer cannot determine the async data code.
Can't Configure Within Time Limit
For synchronous protocols the time limit is 15 seconds; for asynchronous or NRZI protocols
the time Hmit is 45 seconds. After the time limit, Auto Configure resets and starts over.
Auto Configure 2-7
2-8 Auto Configure
The Setup Menu
Setup Introduction
Bit-Oriented Protocols
Character-oriented Protocols
Capturing Unknown Data
The Setup Menu 3-1
Setup Introduction
The Setup menu is the first step in using the HP 4952A. You must set several parameters so
the instrument can understand and decode the data on the Une. Before you can monitor a
Une, you must tell the HP 4952A what protocol, data code, data rate, and other parameters are
being used. If you don't, the analyzer may have trouble decoding data or synchronizing to the
line.
Setup Controls Other Menus
Setup, whether performed manually or Auto Configure, affects the settings in the other
menus. For example, error checking is performed during monitoring according to the current
setup. The appropriate error checking characters are automatically appended to Send strings.
Data is displayed in the Examine Data or Run Menus according to the current setup.
Using the Setup Menu
Press KBWSl in the Top Level Menu to access the setup menu. Move the cursor to the
protocol field and select the desired protocol. Those available are:
HDLC
SDLC
X.25
BSC
Char
X21 HDLC
X21 SDLC
X21 X.25
X21 BSC
X21 Char
You can manually change the setup at any time and from any menu by pressing EXIT, and
then BSBWHl - This puts you in the setup menu where you can reselect.
When you select a particular protocol, the menu fields change to let you make selections which
are specific only to that protocol.
The setup menu may be used when Auto Configure cannot find all the parameters. You must
also use the setup menu for simulating or monitoring the buffer.
3-2 The Setup Menu
When To Use the Setup Menu
Auto Configure automatically configures the HP 4952A to most lines. You may, of course, use
the setup menu to manually configure. Generally, however, use the setup menu for:
■ Monitoring. You cannot use Auto Configure to monitor the buffer.
■ Simulating. Use the setup menu to determine 'send' string format.
■ Changing display formats. Auto Configure always uses the display format currently
selected in the setup menu. Use the setup menu to change display formats.
■ Supplementing Auto Configure. Use the setup menu to modify any parameters after
initial setup with Auto Configure.
Saving Setups
■ NONVOLATILE MEMORY. Menus are always saved in the HP 4952's nonvolatile
buffer memory if you turn off the instrument while in the Top Level Menu.
■ DISC STORAGE. You can store menus, or both menus and data to disc
The Setup Menu 3-3
Bit Oriented Protocols
Bit-Oriented Setup Definitions
Code
Display
Bits/Sec
Error Check
Mode
DTE Clock
Ext Addr (HDLC)
Ext Ctrl (HDLC)
The bit-oriented menus allow ASCII 8, EBCDIC or, using
Hex 8, any 8-bit code.
All six display formats are available for the bit oriented
menus. Frame format decodes all control field bits. Packet
format decodes packet information.
Except for NRZI, all the selections are supported. NRZI
will not work at 16000, 12000, 2000, or 50 bps.
CRC-CCITT preset 1 or preset 0.
All bit-oriented protocols are synchronous: the data is
transmitted with a clock. In NRZI, (HDLC and SDLC) the
clock is encoded within the data. When NRZI mode is
selected, the HP 4952A will derive its receive clocks from
the data on each channel. When external NRZI is selected,
the HP 4952A will use the clock signals on RC and ETC.
DTE data can be synchronized to either a DCE or DTE
clock. If this selection is incorrect, only DCE data will be
displayed.
HDLC allows an extended address field. When an
additional address octet (byte) is to follow, the first or least
significant bit of the address octet is set to 0. The last
address octet in a series has the LSB set to 1. Use Frame
display format to see the extended address.
HDLC allows a 16-bit control field to handle larger N(S)
and N(R) counts. Use Frame display format to see the
extended control field.
3-4 The Setup Menu
Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) Setup
To select bit oriented setup protocols, press BSBtlBl in the Top Level Menu and then the
protocol of choice:
Note Do not select the X.21 protocols unless the HP 18260A
Interface pod is connected.
In bit-oriented setups, the HP 4952A performs automatic zero bit insertion/extraction.
The Setup Menu 3-5
Some typical BOP setups are shown below:
HDLC Setup
Protocol
HDLC
Code
ASCIIS
Bits/sec
64K
Parity
None
Mode
Sync
Disp mode
Err chk
DTE clock
Bit sense
Ext Addr
Ext Ctrl
Frame
CCITT
DCE
Norm
Off
Off
SDLC Setup
Protocol
SDLC
Disp mode
Code
EBCDIC
Bits/ sec
64K
Err chk
Parity
None
DTE clock
Mode
Sync
Bit sense
Frame
CCITT
DCE
Norm
X.25 Setup
Protocol
X.25
Disp mode
Code
ASCII
8
Bits/sec
64K
Err chk
Parity
Mode
None
Sync
DTE clock
Bit sense
(not
sel
ectable)
Packt
CCITT
DCE
Norm
3-6 The Setup Menu
BOP Menu Selections
* used only in HDLC
* * used only in HDLC and SDLC
*** 56 baud when simulating non-NRZI, non-asynchronous if the HP 4952A is generating
a clock
Protocol
[ HDLC ]
[ SDLC ]
[ X.25 ]
[ X21 HDLC ]
[ X21 SDLC ]
[ X21 X.25 ]
Display
[ 2Line
[ DTE Only
[ DCE Only
[ Data & State
[ Frame
[ Packet
Code
[ ASCII 8 ]
[ Hex 8 ]
[ EBCDIC ]
Err chk
[ CRC CCITT ]
[ CCITT Set ]
Bits/sec
[ 19200 ]
9600 ]
7200 ]
4800 ]
3600 ]
3200 ]
2400 ]
2000 ]
1800 ]
1200 ]
600 ]
300 ]
200 ] [ 64K ] [ 16K ]
150 ] [ 56K ] [ 14. 4K ]
134.5 ] [ 48K ] [ 12K ]
110 ] [ 38. 4K ]
75 ]
50 ] ***
Parity
None
DTE clock
[ DCE ]
[ DTE ]
Mod'j
[ Sync ]
[ Sync NRZI ]**
[ Ext NRZI ]**
Bit sense
Ext Addr *
[ Norm ]
[ Inverted ]
[ Off ]
[ On ]
Ext Ctrl *
[ Off ]
[ On ]
The Setup Menu 3-7
Configure To Bit Oriented Lines
When monitoring a BOP line, The Une indicators should be flashing with clock activity except
in the case of monitoring an NRZI line, (when simulating NRZI, a clock is put on the
interface).
Use Auto Configure
Use Auto Configure for initial setup. You will have to change setups in the following cases.
■ HDLC with Extended Address or Control. Change the protocol to HDLC with the
following setup:
Ext Addr and/or Ext Ctrl: On Display: Frame
■ X.25 Packets if the address is not O1O3. If the protocol is X.25, change the setup to the
following. After capturing data, use the Examine Data Menu to observe packet
decoding.
Protocol: X.25 Display: Packt
Select a Display Format
In the bit-oriented menus, you can use any of the six display formats. For frame (level 2)
decoding, use the Frame display. For packet (level 3) decoding, use the Packet display.
3-8 The Setup Menu
BSC Setup Definitions
Parity
Mode
Sync on
Err Chk
Bits/sec
Disp Mode
Suppress
The HP 4952A automatically sets correct parity for the
chosen code: odd parity for ASCII 7, none for EBCDIC and
Transcode. In simulate mode, BSC is sent with the correct
parity. However, if "send" characters are specified in hex or
binary, the parity is allowed to be different from the setup
selection.
BSC is synchronous, half-duplex only. The CHAR protocol
should be used for full-duplex BSC.
The HP 4952A automatically chooses the correct sync
characters for each data code. The sync characters are: 3232
(EBCDIC), l6l6 (ASCII), or 3a3a (Transcode). The HP
4952A requires at least two sync characters for proper
framing.
Select LRC or CRC-16 for ASCII or EBCDIC, and select
LRC or CRC-12 for Transcode.
The bit rates for BSC are from 50 bps to 64 kbps.
Frame and Packt display formats are not available in BSC.
The BSC Menu lets you suppress almost any combination of
text and control characters from the display. However,
suppressed characters are not deleted from the buffer.
The Setup Menu 3-9
BSC Setup Selections
Protocol
[ BSC ]
Code
[ ASCII 7 ]
Disp mode
[
2Line ]
[ Transcode ]
[
DTE Only ]
[ EBCDIC ]
[
DCE Only ]
[ ASCII 8 ]
[
Data & State ]
Bits/sec
[ same as bit oriented protocols ]
Parity
Odd (ASCII 7)
Err chk
[
LRC ]
None (Transcode)
[
CRC 12 ]
None (EBCDIC, ASCII 8)
[
CRC 16 ]
Mode
Sync
DTE clock
[
[
DCE ]
DTE ]
Sync on
16 16 (ASCII 7)
3A 3A (Transcode)
32 32 (EBCDIC)
BSC Setup
Press ESniBl in the Top Level Menu, and then
Protocol
Code
Bits/sec
Parity
Mode
Sync on
BSC
ASCII 7
64K
Odd
Sync
I6l6
Suppress [ None
[ Idle
C Null
[ Control
[ Text
] [Idle & Ctl ]
] [Idle & Txt ]
] [Null & Ctl ]
] [Null & Txt ]
] [Id & Nu & Ctl ]
[ Idles & Null ] [Id & Nu & Txt ]
Disp mode
Err chk
DTE clock
Suppress
Bit Sense
2 Line
LRC
DCE
None
Norm
3-10 The Setup Menu
Character-oriented Protocols (COPs)
The Char menu is a general purpose setup menu, which can be used to capture most
protocols, synchronous or asynchronous. There is a large number of codes available with this
menu. You can select all the parameters to go with your data code. Of course, you can also
create setups which make no sense: e.g., an 8-bit data code with a CRC-12 error check or
synchronous baudot.
Note The HP 4952A does not perform zero bit insertion or
extraction for bit oriented protocols when in Char setup.
When To Use the Char Menu
For any character oriented protocol, synchronous or asynchronous, full-duplex or half-duplex.
You will be able to see all line activity, including line idles, for nonstandard protocols, such
as asynchronous BSC and full-duplex BSC.
The Setup Menu 3-11
Char Setup Definitions
Bit Order/Sense
Start on/Stop on
Transparent Text
Mode
Sync on
Drop sync after
DTE Clock
In most protocols the least significant bit (LSB) is sent first,
and data is not inverted. However, some protocols (e.g.,
IPARS) may be different, so the char menu provides bit
order and bit sense selections. Hex setup menu entries are
always entered in normal bit order and sense. For example,
the standard IPARS, inverted, MSB first syncs would be
entered as 3f3e even though they are Oo2o.
Error checking starts on the character immediately after the
'start on' character, but includes the 'stop on' character.
The fourth 'stop on' character is an intermediate text
character (ITB). The first three 'stop on' characters
normally cause sync to be dropped but the ITB character
causes the channel to remain in sync. For IPARS and other
6-bit codes, setting the most significant bit in a 'stop
on'characler to 1 (e,g., changing Op to 8d) will cause
characters which were ITBs not to be ITBs, and vise versa.
This character delimits the boundaries of a field in which all
control characters are to be treated as data. This is the
same as the DLE character in BSC protocol.
Select synchronous, monosynchronous, or asynchronous
(1, 1.5, 2 stop bits). The HP 4952A needs only one stop bit
for asynchronous monitoring, even if more are present.
Selects the sync characters for proper framing. The HP
4952A requires at least two sync characters (or one for
monosync setup) to capture data when monitoring or
simulating character oriented protocols. In monosync, it is
very important that the sync pattern not be found in the
data stream.
Tells the analyzer to "drop" sync (stop bringing in data) and
start looking for sync characters again.
Specifies the DTE clock source. It can be DTE or DCE.
3-12 The Setup Menu
Char Setup Selections
Protocol [ Char ]
Code
Bits/sec
Parity
[ ASCII 8
t Hex 8
[ ASCII 7
[ Hex 7
[ Hex 6
[ EBCDIC
[ Transcode ]
[ Hex 5 ]
[ IPARS Idle ]
[ IPARS Idle 1 ]
[ Baudot ]
[ EBCD ]
[ same as bit oriented protocols] **
[ None
[ Even
[ Odd
[ Ignore
Disp mode
[ 2 Line ]
[ DTE Only ]
[ DCE Only ]
[ Data & State]
Err chk
[ None ]
[ LRC ]
[ CRC 6 ]
[ CRC 12 ]
[ CRC 16 ]
Start On
[ type hex/text]
Stop On
[hex/text]
Ignore [ type hex/text ]
Transparent
text char
Mode
* Sync on
* Drop sync
after
[ None ] * DTE clock
[ type a hex or text char ]
[ Sync ]
[ Asyn 1 ]
[ Asyn 1.5 ]
[ Asyn 2 ]
[ Monosync ]
Suppress
[ type in hex char ]
[ Idles ]
[type in number] chrs
[ type in hex chrs ]
[ DCE ]
[ DTE ]
[None
[ Idle & Ctl ]
[Idle
[ Idle & Txt ]
[Null
[ Null & Ctl ]
[Control
[Null & Txt ]
[Text
[ Id & Nu & Ctl ]
[Idles & Null] [Id & Nu & Txt ]
Bit sense
[ Normal ]
[ Inverted ]
Bit order
[ LSB first ]
[ MSB first ]
* synchronous or monosynchronous mode only
** ASYNC does not support 16K, 48K. 56K 64K are available on the Utility disc.
The Setup Menu 3-13
Char Setup
Press I'f'lJII*! in the Top Level Menu, and then
Protocol
Char
Code
ASCII 7
Bits/sec
64K
Parity
Odd
Transparent
text char
dl
Mode
Sync
Sync on
I6l6
Drop sync
10 chrs
after
FfFfFfFfFfFfFf
Disp mode
2L i ne
Err chk
LRC
Start on
ShSx
Stop on
EbExEbUs
DTE clock
DCE
Suppress
None
Bit Sense
Norm
Bit Order
lsb
The instrument defaults to Char Synchronous. To place HP 4952A in the asynchronous mode
you must move the cursor to the Mode field (using arrow keys). See Char Setup Selections for
more details.
Hexadecimal Entry and Parity
There are several fields in the Char Menu which let you make hex entries: sync on, drop sync,
transparent text, and start on/stop on. When you make a hexadecimal entry in one of these
fields, the resulting parity bit is determined by hexadecimal entry, not the parity setup
selection.
For example, when even parity is used with ASCII 7, the sync characters should be 9595 ,
rather than 1616 • Of course, your line may s^ill use l6l6 > even though this would result in a
parity for sync characters that is different from other characters.
3-14 The Setup Menu
Rules For Hexadecimal Entry and Parity
For hexadecimal entries, the resulting parity bit conforms to the following rules:
■ For data codes of 7 bits or less (e.g., ASCII 7, Baudot) the parity bit is not
automatically changed to conform with the parity setup selection.
■ For 8-bit data codes (e.g., ASCII 8, EBCDIC) the parity bit always conforms to
parity setup selection.
■ For 8-bit data codes with parity, the selected sync characters must be the same as the
last 16 bits to enter the analyzer before non-sync data. For example, in EBCDIC the
normal sync pattern is 3232. With even parity, the binary pattern would be 100110010
100110010, or 18 bits. Only the last 16 bits are used as the sync pattern. Because least
significant bits are sent first, the two bits in brackets are excluded from the sync
pattern; 1001100[10] 100110010. Thus, you must enter Ac 99 for the analyzer to
accept data. Of course. Auto Configure will find the correct sync characters if the
line idles in Fp.
Sync Characters
The Sync on selection determines what sync characters the analyzer looks for. Unless the
sync pattern is correct, the HP 4952A will not capture data. The HP 4952A requires at least
two sync characters (or one sync character in monosync setup) to capture data when
monitoring and simulating.
When you do not know the sync characters, use Auto Configure. You can also select Sync on
Idles. This allows you to load line data even without the correct sync characters.
Note The HP 4952A assumes that all character oriented protocols idle in Fp. If
your line uses some other condition, you must "sync on" that condition.
The Setup Menu 3-15
Drop Sync Characters (Synchronous mode only)
The Drop sync entry determines where the analyzer drops sync and begins looking again for the
sync chziracters. If the analyzer did not drop sync, it would bring in all activity on the line,
including idles, such as when Drop sync on NONE is selected..
Select seven characters on which to drop sync. The first character is the "within text"
character. The analyzer only looks for this character if you have chosen "error checking".
Thus, if you Start on STX and Stop on ETX, the analyzer looks for the "within text" character
between STX and ETX.
To store all data, including idles, enter Drop sync chrs after None. Then the analyzer never
drops sync, and brings in all line data, including idles.
Drop Sync and Error Checking
The Drop sync selection interacts with the Error check selection in the following ways.
■ The first Drop sync character specifies "within text". The analyzer looks for this
character between the Start on and Stop on error checking limits. When error
checking is "none", all text is outside, and the analyzer does not look for the first
character.
■ The first, or "within text", character takes precedence over the six "outside text"
characters. If the same character occurs both inside and outside the start on and stop
on limits, the analyzer drops sync outside text.
■ With error checking, the analyzer always drops sync after the BCC character(s) if it
cannot find a "within text" character. For example, if you select CRC-16 error
checking, with Start on STX and Stop on ETX, the analyzer drops sync after the two
characters following ETX.
For example, Drop sync 1 chrs after Bb Fp Fp Fp 5d A4 B3 causes the analyzer to drop sync
one character after the first Bb character within the specified error checking limits. If the
analyzer does not find the specified "within text" character, it drops sync either one character
after the BCC character(s) or one character after one of the six "outside text" characters,
whichever appears first. A Drop sync after Bb Fp Fp Fp 5d A4 B3 causes the analyzer to drop
sync immediately after the first Bb character within the specified error checking limits or
characters after one of the other characters.
3-16 The Setup Menu
Capturing Unknown Data
For nonstandard protocols in which Auto Configure may not work, do the following:
1. Try an 8-bit code first, no parity and no error checking.
2. To monitor line data for study when you do not know the sync character, select Sync
on idles (Fp).
Note The HP 4952A assumes that all character oriented protocols idle in FF. If
your line uses some other idle character, you must sync on that character.
3. To store all data for study, including idles, enter Drop sync chrs after None. The
analyzer never drops sync and brings in all data, including idles.
Note Normally idles are not stored to make efficient use of the buffer.
4, After making the above selections in the Char Menu, go to the Run Menu and
select |2^Q3QBI^1 for a few moments to fill the buffer with data for study.
5. Go to the Examine Data Menu to view the data in buffer.
The buffer data will probably be meaningless because of incorrect character framing since the
analyzer does not know where each character begins or ends. Now you need to find the
correct sync pattern.
Finding the Correct Framing
Bit Shifting (BSC and Char only)
Even if you do succeed in bringing in data by synchronizing on idles, the displayed
information will probably be meaningless because of incorrect framing. To make the data
meaningful, go to the Examine Data Menu and select EBSBBfll to capture the data.
The Setup Menu 3-17
Note
Bit shifting docs not work when data is brought in Most Significant Bit
(MSB) first or if any suppress functions are selected.
The HP 4952A does not shift through the parity bit. Unless you use a code
with no parity, you must use trial and error to find the correct framing.
If part of the data still docs not become meaningful while bit shifting, change the data code to
one without parity. When the data becomes meaningful, you can determine the correct sync
characters. Change the sync on selection to these characters.
Eliminating Superfluous Data
When you have found the correct framing you can eliminate idles so the buffer will not fill with
idles. To eliminate idles in 8 or 9-bit data codes, enter Drop sync chars after
FpFfFfFfFfFfFf. To eliminate idles in codes with frame sizes less than 8 bits, you must enter
the correct number of I's in any drop sync byte after the first byte (e.g., 7f for a 7-bit code, or
3 F for a 6-bit code). In other words, you must enter the correct character and frame size for
the idle character (see Table 4-1).
Table 4-1. Character Frame Sizes vs Data Code
Data Code
No Parity
Even or Odd Parity
Ignore Parity
Hex 5
5 bits
6 bits
6 bits
Baudot
(no parity bi
t)
(including parity bit)
* (parity bit =
0)
Hex 6
6 bits
7 bits
7 bits
EBCD
(no parity bi
it)
(including parity bit)
* (parity bit =
0)
I PARS
Transcode
Hex 7
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
ASCII 7
(no parity bi
it)
(including parity bit)
* (parity bit =
0)
Hex 8
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
ASCII 8
(no parity bi
it)
(including parity bit)
* (parity bit =
odd)
EBCDIC
(* these settings are forced in Simulate)
3-18 The Setup Menu
Unusual Protocol Settings
This is the build-your-own menu for Character oriented protocols. Select Q2gQ| in the Setup
menu. Use this table as reference for your given in the left column below, enter the settings
given to the right of the protocol.
Table 4-2. Unusual Protocol Settings
Protocol Code Parity Err Chk Sync Char
Burroughs BASIC ASCII 7 odd VRC Iglg
Burroughs Poll-Sel ASCII 7 odd, SYNC LRC
even.ASYNC
iRif
Transparent
Text Char
Mode
d|
Sync, Async 1
None
Sync (or Async),
Async 1
HASP
EBCDIC None CRC-16 3232
Sync
IPARS
None CRC-6
3f3e
None
Sync
Bit sense-Invert
Bit order-MSB first
ASCII 7
odd LRC
1616
d|
Sync
ASCII 7
odd.SYNC LRC
even, ASYNC
1616
d|
Sync.Async 1
ASCII 7 odd.SYNC LRC
1616
Sync
IPARS Setup
The IPARS appUcation is located on the HP 4952A UtiUty Disc (filename IPARS_MEC).
Load the IPARS application. Only the Top Level Menu will change. Syncl (SI or 3f Hex)
characters are not captured. Triggering on the start of the message should only be made on
the Sync2 (S2 or 3e Hex) character.
Note The resident HP 4952A IPARS function can be setup without the IPARS
application loaded,but erroneous results will occur when monitoring or
simulating.
The Setup Menu 3-19
The Character protocol IPARS has specific settings shown below.
Protocol Char
Code
IPARSO or IPARSl. The or 1 refers to the idle state
transmitted for normal bit sense, IPARSO will leave the line
idling in I's when transmitting if "Bit sense = Inverted".
IPARSl will idle the Une in O's if "Bit sense = Inverted".
Bits/sec
Your bit rate
Parity
None
Transparent
text char
None
Mode
Sync
Sync on
3f3e
Drop sync
Usually afte
Err chk
Start on 3e3e.
Stop on 0d1d2d3d.
Suppress
Bit sense
Bit order
Usually after OoOo1o373f3f3f for IPARSO or 3fOo1o373f3f3f
for IPARSl. This field is used to specify conditions that will
cause Drop sync and begin searching for sync.
CRC6
Each message begins with a sequence 3f3e. The HP 4952A
wants two individual start characters, not a sequence. Both
characters should be 3e which is the last character of the
only valid start sequence for IPARS.
This field is used to specify end-of-message characters.
When one of these characters is detected, it will stop
accumulating CRC and will expect the total CRC count.
These four characters are individual stop characters, not a
sequence DTE clock.
User-defined
Most commonly set to Inverted.
MSB
3-20 The Setup Menu
The typical IPARS setup is:
Protocol
Char
Code
IPARSO
Bits/sec
4800
Parity
None
Transparent
text char
None
Mode
Sync
Sync on
3f3e
Drop sync
chrs
after
OoOo1o373f3f3f
Disp mode
2Line or
Err chk
CRC6
Start on
3e3e
Stop on
0d1d2dBd
DTE clock
dce
Suppress
None
Bit Sense
MSB
Bit Order
Inverted
Modified Error Check (MEC)
The Modified Error Check (MEC) application is useful when the protocol being monitored
has multiple "Start on BCC" characters before data begins, and it is not an IPARS protocol.
The Modified Error Checking application which is located on the HP 4952A Utility Disc
(filename IPARS_MEC) must be loaded before being used. The Top Level Menu will
change to show that Modified Error Checking (MEC) has been loaded.
The Modified Error Check appUcation is invoked during a run when the data code is not
IPARSO or IPARSl, and both the "Start on BCC" characters are the same. The modified
error calculation makes sure that CRC or LRC calculations begin only after the last "Start on
BCC" character encountered. When this application is not loaded, the HP 4952A begins
calculating the error check after the first "Start on BCC" character encountered.
The Setup Menu 3-21
X.75
X,75 is an inter-network protocol. X,75 is the protocol used by X.25 networks to talk to each
other. There are two major differences between X.25 and X.75:
■ X.25 (1980 version) allows a Level 2 control field one byte long. The 1984 version
of X.25 allows one or two control field bytes (Normal or Extended Control).
■ X.75 has an additional network utilities field that is inserted in the header of certain
packet types.
Setup the HP 4952A for X.75 by performing the following:
1. From the Top Level Menu press i^'lJH*! ,
2. Select HDLC as the protocol.
3. Select either Normal Control or Extended Control.
In the Monitor and Simulate menus, the softkey assisted entry for Level 2 and Level 3 is
available for both normal and extended control. This allows flexibility to create triggers
and/or send strings that are normal control (Ext Ctrl = OFF) or extended control (Ext Ctrl
= ON) in Level 2, and Modulo 8 or Modulo 128 in Level 3.
Extended Asynchronous Baud Rates
The extended asynchronous baud rates 56K and 64K bits per second are supported as a special
application which can be loaded from the Utility Disc (filenames ASYNC_56K and
ASYNC_64K) supplied with each HP 4952A instrument.
These applications provide the means to either monitor or simulate asynchronous data speeds
of 56K or 64K bits per second. The HP 4952A retains its full capabilities for other data speeds
when this application is loaded.
3 - 22 The Setup Menu
Loading the Extended Asynchronous Baud Rate Applications
1. Insert the Utility Disc into the HP 4952A disc drive.
2. From the Top Level Menu, press more, then |2^33&3 •
3. Move the cursor over the desired file, ASYNC_56K or ASYNC_64K, and press
4. Press IgQ^SQ^ to load the application. When the application is finished loading, the
screen will revert back to the Top Level Menu.
Selecting the Extended Asynchronous Baud Rates
1. From the Top Level Menu, press
2. Cursor to the Protocol field and select
3. Cursor to the Mode field and select
4. Cursor to the Bits/sec field. Select either EB3 or K233 (whichever is available). The
other data speeds are accessed by pressing MORE.
Compatibility With Other IHP Protocol Analyzers
The following Setup menu entries are unique to the HP 4952A and are not supported on other
HP protocol analyzers:
Ext NRZI
CCITT set
Mono Sync
38400, 48000, 56000 and 64000 bits per second (not supported on the HP 4951C)
Async 12kbps, 14.4kbps
If you load an HP 4952A Setup menu into another HP protocol analyzer, either from disc or
remote transfer, the entries listed above will be changed by the other analyzer into a different
entry.
Before you use an HP 4952A Setup menu on another HP protocol analyzer check the entries
to avoid any discrepancies.
The Setup Menu 3 - 23
3-24 The Setup Menu
Monitoring
■ Introduction
■ Monitoring the Line
■ Monitoring the Buffer
■ Monitor Menu Softkey Commands
■ CompatibiUty With Other HP Protocol Analyzers
■ Monitor Programs
■ Triggering
■ Measuring Time
■ Counting Events
■ Conditional Branching
■ Unconditional Branching
■ Program Pauses
■ Starting and Stopping
■ Commenting
■ Subprograms
■ Monitor Error Messages
■ Monitor Status Messages
Monitoring 4-1
Introduction
Monitor means to look at. When you monitor a data link, you look at the data passing on the
link. The HP 4952A makes it easy for you to look at the passing data with several different
display formats.
Monitoring has no effect on the line because it is passive and non-interactive.
The HP 4952A lets you monitor data in the run menu by watching the data scroll across the
screen, or you can go to the monitor menu and tell the analyzer to look for events and
perform measurements on user set conditions.
Two Types of Monitoring
The HP 4952A enables you to do two types of monitoring:
Monitoring the Line
Monitoring the line means that you connect the analyzer
through the appropriate pod to the link under test.
Monitoring the Buffer
After collecting the data in the buffer, either by monitoring
the line or by loading from disc, you can monitor the buffer
exactly as if you were monitoring the line. You can perform
any monitoring tests that you might do when monitoring in
real-time from the line.
4-2 Monitoring
Monitoring the Line
Monitoring a line is one of the most common uses for a protocol analyzer. You simply
connect the analyzer to the line and watch the activity scroll across the screen.
Hookup
To monitor a line, you must connect the analyzer through its pod and Y-cable into the line as
shown below.
DTE
HP 4952
O
DCE
-
POD
RS-232/V.24
Y-Cable (Ribbon)
Figure 4-1. Hookup for Monitoring the Line
Monitoring 4-3
Setup
Before monitoring the line, you must set up the analyzer to the parameters beiag used by the
data link. The analyzer must know basic information, such as protocol, data code, and data
rate. For example, if the link is using X.25 protocol, ASCII data code, and 9600 bits/sec, you
must enter these values into the setup menu or the data may not be recognizable.
To monitor a line you can use Auto Configure. Even on nonstandard protocols Auto
Configure can help you get started by finding some of the parameters.
Display Mode
Use the display mode field in the setup menu to select the type of display you wish. Each
display shows the data in different ways. For example, the "two hne" format shows both the
DTE and DCE channels. The "DTE only" and "DCE only" formats show only one channel.
The "data & state" format shows both channels, as well as lead timing information. The
"Frame" and "Packt" formats decode frame and packet information.
4-4 Monitoring
Monitoring tlie Buffer
Monitoring the buffer is often called "post-processing." Post-processing is a very useful
feature. Once you have captured data in the HP 4952's buffer, you can repeatedly run monitor
menu programs on the data.
Monitoring the buffer requires no connection. All you need is buffer data. You can fill the
buffer with data in three ways: capture the data while monitoring the line, load the buffer
from the disc, or upload/download during a remote operation.
Setup
Use the setup menu to configure the analyzer to the line parameters used when the data was
collected. For example, if the data in the buffer is BSC protocol, EBCDIC data code, and
9600 bits/sec, then you must set the analyzer to those parameters. If you're not sure what
some of the parameters are, change the setup and look at the buffer in the examine data
menu to see if the data is more understandable.
Collecting Data From the Line
As described on previous pages, one way of collecting data in the buffer is to monitor or
simulate on-line. As you simulate or monitor the line, data is automatically stored in the HP
4952A's 32 Kbyte (768 Kbyte with Option 02) buffer. The buffer is a first-in, first-out memory
in which the oldest data is overwritten by the newest.
Another way of putting data in the buffer is to load data files from disc (see Chapter 12, "Mass
Store").
Monitoring 4-5
The Monitor Menu
It is not necessary to use the Monitor Menu to monitor a line. It is possible to monitor a line
from the Run Menu, however, you cannot write test programs that look for events and
highlight or beep.
By using the Monitor Menu and writing programs giving the HP 4952A specific instructions
you can increase the effectiveness of the instrument.
To access the Monitor Menu, press |2Q||j|iQ^I in the Top Level Menu. The analyzer then
allows you to begin writing programs (see Table 4-1).
Monitor
Block 1
Table 4-1. The Monitor Menu
start
Stop
Inc
Ctr
If
When
Trig
High-
Light
Beep
Reset
Goto
Blk
Lead
Gosub
Block
Re-
turn
Move
Crsr
Mes-
sage
Insert
Line
Block
Line
Delete
Block
Prg
Print
Prog
[MORE]
[MORE]
[MORE]
[MORE]
4-6 Monitoring
Monitor Menu Softkey Commands
Most of the softkeys in the monitor and simulate menus are the same. The commands that
appear in the Monitor Menu are those that only pertain to capturing data.
All of the first-level softkey commands that appear in the monitor menu are summarized
below in the order they appear.
Start
The start softkey is available to start the itHjWBHi , I^Q , WliiBBi . 'Start' and 'Stop'
commands should be tied to the start of execution or the last preceding trigger.
Stop
The stop softkey is available to stop the 1»IHS!BW , Q^l , |^^|| and Q33 • 'Start'
and 'Stop' commands should be tied to the start of execution or the last preceding trigger.
Inc Ctr
'Increment Counter' uses one of the five counters to count events and select an increment
value.
If
An 'If Counter' causes a program branch according to the condition of a counter. An 'If Lead'
causes a branch according to the condition of a lead at the time of the last trigger. If the
statement is true the program will jump to a specified block. If the statement is false the
program goes to the next block.
When Trig
'When Trig' is the only statement that defines a trigger event. The analyzer can look for any
event and then branch to a designated action. Program execution stops and waits until at least
one 'When Trig' condition is satisfied. Triggers are the only way to provide a reference point
in the data stream.
Monitoring 4-7
Highlight
Marks up to the last 63 trigger events in the buffer.
Beep
Audibly notifies you when the last preceding trigger is found.
Reset
Resets to zero and stops a specified WiiiHil or [|^^^| .
Goto Bile
Effects a branch to another block.
Message
'Message' statements are used for entering comments in a program.
Gosub Block
The 'Gosub Block' command causes a jump to a subroutine that ends in a 'return' statement.
Without a 'return' statement 'Gosub Block' acts like a 'Goto Block' command.
Return
A command that terminates a subroutine and return to the command immediately following
the 'Gosub Block' statement.
Insert Line
Inserts a new line when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
4-8 Monitoring
Insert Block
Inserts a new block when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Delete Line
Deletes a line when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Delete Block
Deletes a block when the cursor is at the begiiming of a line.
Delete Prg
Deletes the entire monitor program when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Print Prog
Prints the monitor program if an ASCII printer is connected.
Move Crsr
Allows the cursor to be positioned at the start of a block.
Monitoring 4-9
Compatibility With Other HP Protocol Analyzers
The following Monitor functions are unique to the HP 4952A and are not supported on other
HP protocol analyzers.
Message statements
Gosub Block and Return
When triggers
Inc Cntr by n
If you load an HP 4952A Monitor menu or program into another HP protocol analyzer, either
from disc or remote, the functions listed above will be changed by the other analyzer into a
different function.
Before you use an HP 4952A Monitor menu or program on another HP protocol analyzer,
verify the menu program to avoid any discrepancies.
Caution Remove all 'Message' statements before transferring programs or menus
from an HP 4952A to another non-4952A protocol analyzer.
4-10 Monitoring
Monitor Programs
You must enter programs in the Monitor Menu to instruct the HP 4952A to look for specific
events or make measurements. Programming in the Monitor Menu is softkey driven making it
fast and easy.
Softkey Programming
Softkey programming is easy. Press the appropriate softkey and other choices appear leading
you through the program. For example, pressing iii^lAJ causes the new softkey choices
WHSlBBj , l^^l , and mj^| to appear.
Setup
Always set up the analyzer with the proper parameters before monitoring. If the setup is
incorrect the monitor program may not work. For example, if the data code being monitored
is EBCDIC, but your setup is ASCII, the data will be decoded incorrectly.
If you change the setup menu after entering a monitor program, the program may have
blinking entry fields indicating those entries are inappropriate for the setup. If you change the
setup data code or protocol after entering a character string, you must retype the string. The
program will fail unless you change either the setup or the program.
Moving Through the l\/ler:iu
Use the cursor keys to move around the menu and roll the display up and down. Note that the
softkeys change as you move the cursor to different fields. You can change an entry at any
time if the appropriate softkey appears. Press MORE whenever the word appears at the lower
right corner of the screen, and more softkeys appear giving you more options. |2BQBS3
can be used to position the cursor at the start of any block.
l\/lonitoring 4-11
Blocks
Programs are organized in blocks. A maximum of 31 blocks is allowed per program. Blocks
provide a reference for looping back or jumping ahead during program execution. When you
insert and delete blocks, the numbering is automatically adjusted.
Inserting and Deleting Lines and Blocks
Use the WiEggMllitJisiWJW and l»HHfJllitJi:H'H!liJitJl softkeys for editing programs. Press
MORE whenever the cursor is at the beginning of a line to see these softkeys.
Note
The litHJAJI;IHJ!l is especially useful when editing programs.
Inserting and Deleting Characters
To trigger on characters, you must enter character strings after a 'when DTE/DCE'
command. To insert or delete characters in a 'when' string, use the |^^S| and |33
softkeys while the cursor is positioned in the string. The l>IJm=l key is continuous, the
I^^SI key is not. To insert more than one character the BD^QQI key must be pressed for
each character.
Executing Monitor Programs
You must exit the Monitor Menu and go to the Run Menu to execute a program. Press
ifWMBBBffl and then the appropriate BilfMmWJUIiTJisWflgHI softkey.
If you are not using a monitor program, go to the Top Level Menu, press |^B2QQQ , and the
appropriate M!BlBniMlltfJi:lllIHii key.
If you wrote a program in the Monitor Menu, go to the Run Menu to execute the program.
4-12 Monitoring
Triggering
Triggering means to look for an event. By telling the analyzer to trigger on an event, you are
telling it to look for that event in the data stream.
The HP 4952A can trigger on up to 63 different events simultaneously. Once the analyzer has
found an event, it can:
■ notify you by beeping
■ mark the event in memory
■ count the event
■ measure the time between events
■ branch to another command
Defining Triggers
Only the 'when' statement can define a trigger. Press the ISJi^JAUEl softkey in the monitor
and simulate menus to access the 'when' statement.
Triggers Provide a Reference
'When' statements provide a point of reference in the data stream. They tell the analyzer
exdctly when to start an action. For example, all 'highUght', 'beep', 'start' and 'stop'
statements reference the last preceding 'when' statement in the program. Without a preceding
'when' statement, the analyzer cannot determine the exact point at which to start, stop, beep,
or highlight.
If you put a command at the beg innin g of the program, action starts at the beginning of
execution. But if you need to have an action start at the precise tune that some event occurs,
you must use a preceding trigger for that event. For example, to measure time you must tell
the analyzer exactly when to start the timer.
l\/lonitoring 4-13
Types Of Triggers
There are six different types of trigger statements. You can trigger on DTE or DCE
characters, lead changes, errors, time-outs, and your own softkey entries.
Characters
Leads
To trigger on characters, specify "DTE" or "DCE" and type
in the desired characters.
When DTE this is a character string
then goto Block 2
When DCE this is a character string
then goto Block 2
To trigger on lead changes, select the desired lead from the
softkeys. The appropriate leads appear on the softkeys
according to the pod attached.
4-14 Monitoring
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 2
Errors
Depending on the setup menu, you can trigger on PCS,
BCC, parity errors, aborted frames or framing errors.
When Error FCS on DTE
then goto Block 2
Timeouts
On the HP 4952A you can specify one of five timers in 1
millisecond increments from to 65534.
When Timer 1. > 100
then goto Block 2
Softkeys
You can trigger on the press of softkeys 3, 4, or 5. The
softkeys are numbered from 1 to 6 from left to right.
When Softkey 3
then goto Block 2
Marking Triggers
The HP 4952A will find events that you specify as triggers. The HP 4952A can mark each
event in memory, or it can beep whenever the event occurs, or it can do both.
Beep
The 'beep' statement provides an audible sound for some specified condition. The analyzer
can beep anytime, and as often as desired. In the following example, the analyzer beeps
every time the string "abc" occurs on the DTE channel.
Block 1;
When DTE abc Tell the analyzer what event to look for. Note:
then goto Block 2 the *beep' command refers to the last preceding
trigger event.
Block 2:
Beep Beep and then begin looking for the event again,
then goto Block 1.
Highlight
Use the 'highlight' command Jifter a 'when' statement to mark trigger events in memory.
Highlighted characters appear in half-bright, inverse video both during run-time and in the
examine data menu. Lead and timer transitions appear on the DCE line in the examine data
menu if you are not using the li^^BftSSQI display.
The HP 4952A remembers the last 64 highlights in the buffer. Only the last character of a
trigger string is highUghted. HighUghts are lost when the data is stored to disc.
The following example highlights the "z" in the "xyz" string whenever it occurs on the DCE line
and causes a beep whenever "xyz" is found.
Block 1: Find the event. Note that the "when" statement
When DCE xyz must precede the "highlight" command,
then goto Block 2
Block 2: Highlight the event and beep. Then start looking
Highlight for the event again.
and then
Beep
and then goto Block 1.
Monitoring 4-15
Measuring Time
Timers are program commands that measure the time between triggers. The HP 4952A
monitor and simulate menus each contain five timers identified by numbers, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5,
Each timer can measure up to 65,535 miUiseconds.
l\/leasurlng Time Between Triggers
Timers measure the time between trigger events. In the example below the 'start timer' and
'stop timer' statements refer to the last preceding trigger statement (regardless of how far
back in the program). A timer must have a reference point to start it and to stop it. Triggers
provide a reference because they point to real events in the data stream.
When
Start Timer [ ]
When...
Stop Timer C ]
How To Access Timers
To enter a 'start timer' statement in the monitor or simulate menu:
■ Press I
■ Press
■ Select the timer number from the softkeys
For example, the program statement to start timer 3 looks hke this:
start Timer 3
To stop the timer, use the same procedure, but press Q2SI3 instead of
Note There must be a preceding trigger statement in the program
to provide a reference for the timer statement.
4-16 Monitoring
To measure the time interval between two events, use two trigger statements to identify the
events. After one trigger statement identifies the first event, start the timer. The second
trigger statement identifies the second event, stop the timer.
This example shows the correct way to measure the time interval between two trigger
conditions. The starting and stopping of the timer is entirely dependent upon the occurrence
of the two trigger conditions.
Block 1;
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Timer 1 starts when this trigger occurs.
Block 2:
Start Timer 1
Timer 1 stops when this trigger occurs.
Block 3:
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 4
Block 4:
Stop Timer 1
Reset a Timer To Zero
Timers are always reset to zero at the beginning of execution and can can be reset during
program execution with a 'reset' statement:
Reset Timer 1
Stop a Timer Without Resetting
Timers can be stopped under program control with either a 'stop timer' or a 'stop tests'
statement.
Caution Do not use a 'Stop Tests' statement unless you want to stop program
execution.
Monitoring 4-17
How Timers Work
Timers measure by looking at time stamps that are inserted with the data entering the
analyzer. Because data is stored in a 32K first-in, first-out buffer, the time stamps are also
stored. The timers measure the number of time stamps between trigger events.
Time stamps are stored in the buffer depending upon the bits/sec selection. That's why the
bits/sec selection is so important, even with synchronous protocols. If bits/sec is slower than
the line rate timing measurement resolution is reduced. If bits/sec is faster than the line rate
the buffer is filled with more time stamps than necessary and storage efficiency is reduced.
In bit oriented protocols, the start flag and address of a string have the same time mark. This
is also true of the last character, the FCS, and the end flag.
Cursor Timing
Cursor timing is available in the Examine Data menu and is a manual technique to measure
time. With data in the buffer:
■ Press ■i!l=lnl»l;VJ»l to enter the Examine Data Menu
■ Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement event
■ Press I
■ Move the cursor to the event where you want the measurement to end
. Press ESErnsa-
The time is shown at the top of the display:
TIME =
The Effect Of the Data Filter On Timing
If you are filtering out certain characters with the data filter, you cannot measure the time
between them because they aren't in the buffer. And if you have 'timing information' turned
off in the data filter, your timing measurements will be inaccurate.
Ensure 'timing information' is turned on in the data filter to measure time. You cannot
measure time between events if you have filtered them out.
4-18 Monitoring
Counting Events
Increment Counter [ ] by [ ]
The 'increment counter' statement is used for counting events. The HP 4952A has five
counters that can count five different events simultaneously.
Accessing the nsasi Softkey
To enter the 'increment counter' statement into a monitor or simulate program:
■ Press
■ Select the counter number from the softkeys
■ Type in the increment value
The counter can be incremented by any number up to 65,535. For example, if you increment
counter 4 by 2 every time an event occurs, the statement looks like this:
Increment Counter 4 by 2
Countable Events
Countable events can be characters or character strings, lead changes, timer changes, counter
changes, or program loops; almost any action the analyzer performs can be counted. To use
the counters effectively, place the increment counter statement directly after the event of
interest.
Maximum Count
Each counter counts to 65,535 and then starts over from zero. You can cascade counters by
having one counter increment whenever a second counter overflows.
Monitoring 4-19
Resetting Counters
Counters are always reset to zero at the start of execution. Counters can also be reset under
program control with the 'reset counter' statement. When they are reset during a program,
they go to zero and do not restart unless you start them again with an "increment counter"
statement.
Decrementing Counters
To decrement a counter by 1, set the increment value to 65,535 rather than 1. To decrement
by 2, set the increment value to 65,534. And so on.
Example 1 : Counting Parity Errors
The following example counts the number of parity errors on the DTE line.
Block 1:
When Error Parity on DTE
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
This trigger finds the parity errors.
Count each error and continue looking.
Increment Counter 1 by 1
and then
goto Block 1.
Example 2: Counting Positive Lead Changes
The following example counts the number of times RTS goes on.
Block 1:
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Increment Counter 3
and then
Goto to Block 1
Look for positive RTS transitions.
Count each positive RTS transition and continue
looking.
4-20 Monitoring
Conditional Branching
Using the 'if statement you can cause a branch in the program, depending on the status of a
counter or lead at the time of the last trigger. Counters £ire independent of line status. Thus,
the *if lead' statement requires a 'when' statement somewhere earUer in the program.
Accessing the m Softkey
To enter £in 'if program statement in the monitor or simulate menu, press |B and then either
or
[ Off ]
[ On ]
If Lead'
If Lead
[ RTS ] i
[ CTS ]
[ DSR ]
[ DTR ]
[ CD ]
then goto Block [
The correct leads automatically appear on the display depending upon the pod connected to
the analyzer. For exzmiple, the above leads would appear on the softkeys if an HP 18179A
(RS-232C) pod were connected.
In the following example, if DSR is on when the following statement is executed, the program
will jump to block 5. Otherwise, execution will continue with the next sequential statement.
If Lead DSR is On
then goto Block 5
When Is Lead Status Checked?
To test lead status, you must tell the analyzer the precise point in time using a trigger. 'If
lead' statements always test the link at the time the last trigger was found . There should
always be a trigger statement somewhere in the program before the 'if statement. This
preceding trigger should define the point in time of interest.
Monitoring 4-21
Example: 'if Lead'
A trigger must be used to define the exact time, therefore a 'when' statement must appear
earlier in the program when using 'if lead'. An *tf lead' statement always refers to the lead
condition at the time of the last trigger .
In this example, block 2 checks the status of CTS only when the trigger in block 1 is satisfied.
Block 1;
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
If Lead CTS is On
then
goto
Bl
ock 4
'If Counter'
If Count
:er
[ 1 ] >
[ 2 ]
[ 3 ]
C 4 ]
[ 5 ]
then goto
Block
[
[
]
type
a
nunber
]
To use the 'if counter' command, press iJBWinSHi and select the counter number from the
softkeys. Then type the comparison number. You can enter any number from to 65,534.
Example: 'If Counter'
Counters run independently of Une status. Therefore, 'if counter' statements do not need to
be preceded by 'when' statements.
4-22 Monitoring
The following two examples are equivalent: they count the number of times RTS goes on.
When RTS has gone on 100 times, the test stops.
Block 1
When RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2
Increment Counter 1 by 1.
If Counter 1 > 99
then goto Block 4
Block 1
When RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2
Increment Counter 1. by 65535
If Counter 1 > 65436
then goto Block 1.
Block 3 Block 3
Goto Block 1_ Stop Tests
Block 4;
Stop Tests
How 'If and 'When' Are Different
Only 'when' can define a trigger and wait for an event. 'If tests the current status. UnUke 'if,
the 'when' statement stops execution until the trigger is satisfied.
Combining 'If Statements
'If statements in the same block are 'ORed'. The analyzer looks for all the conditions at the
same time. The first satisfied 'if controls the branch.
Monitoring 4-23
Combining 'If and 'When'
'If can be used to guarantee action. For example, if you enter:
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 2
and RTS is already off, the program never moves. No program statements are executed until
the trigger is satisfied. The 'when' statement requires a transition. On the other hand, if you
enter:
If Lead RJS is Off
then goto Block 2
and RTS is on when the 'if statement is executed, the program will never go to block 2.
Unlike the 'when' statement, 'if does not wait for a condition to happen. To ensure that
execution always moves to block 2 when RTS goes off, enter the following:
If Lead RTS is Off
then goto Block 2
When Lead RJS goes Off
then goto Block 2
4-24 l\/lonitoring
Unconditional Branching
Goto Block [ ]
Use the 'goto block' command to branch to a different part of the monitor or simulate
program. This is an unconditional branch because it forces a jump in the program.
'If and 'When' Always Force a Branch
Both 'if and 'when' commands automatically append a conditional 'goto block' statement. In
the following example, the analyzer looks for a positive RTS transition. You can put any
action you want into block 2.
Block 1:
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Start Disc
You can use 'goto block' to loop continuously. In the following example, you increment
counter 1 until it reaches 200 and then jump out of the loop.
Block 1:
Increment Counter 1 by 1_
If Counter 1 > 199
then goto Block 3
Block 2:
Goto Block 1
Monitoring 4-25
Program Pauses
There are many times in a program you must enter a pause statement. For example, what if
you want to wait 40 miUiseconds for a relay to open before performing the next program
command?
Using a Timer To Pause
You can use timers to delay the program for a specified time. In the following example, you
may want the analyzer to beep every three seconds:
Block 1:
Beep
and then
Start Timer 1.
When Timer 1. >
3000
then goto Bl
ock 2
Block 2:
Reset Timer 1_
and then
Goto Block 1
Using a timer to insert a delay is not always the right solution in some situations. Timer status
can only be tested with a 'when' trigger. But if you tell the analyzer to trigger on an event, you
are telling it to 'look for' that event. The trigger pointer must move through the data looking
for the trigger event ~ which is in this case a particular time stamp.
The trigger pointer cannot move backwards after it has moved through the data looking for
the correct time stamp. A timer is the best way to insert a program delay if you do not use
multiple triggers.
4-26 Monitoring
Using a Counter To Pause
You can also use a counter to delay program execution. Each increment of the counter takes
about 3.6 milliseconds. You may want to experiment to find more exact delay times. Counters
are tested by *if statements any problems are minimized with counters if the 3.6 ms delay is
acceptable.
For example:
Block 1:
Beep
Block 2:
Increment Counter 1 by 1
If Counter 1 > 822
then goto Block 4
Block 3:
Goto Block 2
Block 4:
Reset Counter 1_
and then
Goto Block 1
Note Do not use the 'wait' statement in the simulate menu to delay simulate
programs. 'Wait' affects 'send' and 'set lead' output statements.
Monitoring 4-27
starting and Stopping
Using 'start' and 'stop' commands, you can operate the display or the disc under program
control. The 'stop tests' command halts program execution.
Note Do not use the 'wait' statement in the simulate menu with these commands,
'Wait' affects 'send' and 'set lead' output statements.
'Start' and 'Stop' Need a Reference
There are two ways to provide a reference point for 'start' and 'stop' commands:
1. Start of execution. If you put a 'start' or 'stop' command at the beginning of the
program, it becomes active as soon as you begin execution in the run menu,
2. Preceding trigger. The last 'when' statement in the program provides a reference. A
'start' or 'stop' becomes active at the point in the data stream when the last trigger
event was found. If you insert a program pause using a timer or counter, 'start' or
'stop' is delayed by the amount of the pause.
Filtering Data With 'Start' and 'Stop'
The 'start' and 'stop' commands can filter events of interest. Define an event of interest in a
'when' statement, and then start or stop the display or disc when that event occurs.
4-28 IVIonitoring
'Start' and 'Stop' Disc
You can stzirt and stop the disc to capture only events of interest under program control. You
can start and stop the disc as often as you like.
The following rules apply to 'start' and 'stop' disc statements:
1. The disc can be started and stopped more than once.
2. The 'start' command tries to store the 512 bytes of the buffer preceding the event.
The 'stop' command attempts to store the 512 bytes of the buffer after the event (512
bytes may be up to 250 characters, depending on time stamp frequency and line
utility). There is no way to indicate the event on the disc because highlights are not
stored to disc.
3. Timing measurements should not be made across data segments. The results could
be in error.
In the following example, the analyzer captures data on disc from the time RTS goes on until
RTS goes off.
Block 1:
When RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2: NOTE
Start Disc
Commands such as *Start
When RTS goes Off Disc' are ignored when
then goto Block 3 running from the buffer.
Block 3:
Stop Disc
and then
Goto Block 1
Monitoring 4-29
When you enter the Run Menu and execute a monitor or simulate program with a 'start disc'
statement, the analyzer asks you to provide a file name and comment for the new disc file.
The file type is always 'Menu & Data' and is not changeable.
Function: Store
File Name
Comment
As soon as you have entered a file name and comment, press i3B3HII^ to begin running the
program.
'Start/Stop Display'
The 'stop display' statement freezes the display after the occurrence of some trigger event.
That trigger event and the preceding data are displayed on the screen. Execution is not
stopped even though the display is turned off. The buffer is continually being filled with new
data. To start the display again, use a 'start display' statement, or the Q£B93S3E9 softkey.
Note It is efficient to turn the display off if you are running a program that causes
buffer overflow errors.
The followng example freezes the display if there is a frame check sequence error on the DTE
line.
Block 1;
When Error FCS on DTE
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Stop Display
4-30 Monitoring
'Stop Tests'
The 'stop tests' statement halts execution. No new data is loaded into the buffer, the disc
stops, and any active timers stop. The following rules apply:
1. A 'stop tests' command is executed only after all the 'wait', 'send', and 'set lead'
statements prior to it are performed.
2. The 'stop tests' statement halts execution of all other program statements.
3. If there are no 'when' statements in the program, the display will continue running
until rule #1 is satisfied.
4. The EXIT key is the only way to halt immediately.
The following example stops execution if there is a Negative Acknowledgment (NAK) on the
DTE line. Note that you enter the NAK by pressing [CNTLJU.
Block 1:
When DTE NK
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Stop Tests
Monitoring 4-31
Commenting
The HP 4952A provides the capability for commenting programs with the 'message' statement.
These messages are also displayed above softkeys 3, 4, and 5 during execution. Messages are
entered the same way as send strings, except that characters can only be inserted or deleted.
Hex characters cannot be entered.
Uses For 'Message'
1. You can insert comments in a long program to help you remember what different
parts of the program do.
2. You can have the analyzer display a message during executionfor debugging
programs. You can discover where program execution is locking up.
3. You can have the analyzer tell you to perform some action during execution, such as
pressing a softkey.
4. You can label softkeys 3, 4, and 5, which are those used for softkey triggers.
How To Enter Messages
Press MORE twice, then K^i^HM and begin typing text after 'Message'. Messages can be up
to 16 characters long (including spaces).
You must enter something in the message field, even if it is only blanks. If you do not enter
anything in the field, an error message appears when you try to execute.
Note It is a good practice to fill in all 16 characters of the message field, using
spaces as necessary.
If a message is not a full 16 characters long, some characters of a previous message may still
show on the display. For example, if your first message was EXIT RUN PROGRAM, and
the second message was START PROGRAM, the display after the second message would be
START PROGRAMRAM. Filling the rest of the second message with spaces would fix the
problem.
4-32 Monitoring
If a message is used to label softkeys 3, 4, and 5, the problem just described becomes an
advEintage. A message can be sent to label the three softkeys. Later in the program, a new
message can change one of the softkeys and leave the others.
How To Display Messages During Execution
Messages are identified by their block number. Whenever a block with a message, or multiple
messages, is executed, the message(s) in that block are displayed. A message can therefore be
displayed during execution in the following ways:
1. The message block is executed during normal sequential execution.
2. A 'goto block' command references the message block.
3. 'If or 'when' statements reference the message block.
4. A 'gosub block' command references the message block.
Example: Using a Prompt
You can use the 'message' command in combination with the 'when softkey' trigger to tell you
when to press a softkey during execution.
When some event occurs press softkey 3.
Block 1:
When ...
then
goto Block 2
Block 2:
Message
Press Softkey 3
Block 3:
When Softkey 3
then
goto Block 4
Block 4:
Message
After pressing softkey turn off the message.
Note that you must actually enter the blanks
with the space bar.
Monitoring 4-33
Subprograms
You can enter subprograms in the main monitor/simulate program using the 'gosub block'
and 'return' commands. You can nest subroutines within subroutines, up to a depth of eight.
Subprograms are useful if there is a sequence of statements used repeatedly in the program.
You can shorten the program by entering the sequence of statements once. If you put a 'retrn'
statement at the end of the sequence, you can call that sequence anytime with a 'gosub block'
statement.
The 'gosub block' statement causes a jump to the designated block. The 'return' statement
causes a jump back to the line immediately following the 'gosub block' statement.
Example 1: Subprograms
Let's assume there are several places in a program where one of three different error
messages might need to be displayed. Instead of entering all of the different error messages in
the program repeatedly (which could make the program longer) you can enter three
subprograms.
Block x:
Message This
is
BCC Err
and then
Return
Block xx:
Message This
is
Par. Err
and then
Return
Block xxx:
Message This
is
Fram Err
and then
Return
4-34 Monitoring
Example 2: Using a Delay Repeatedly
In the following example, the same five second delay is used three times.
Block 5:
Start Display
and then
Gosub Block 25
Block 6:
Stop Display
and then
Gosub Block 25
Block 7:
Start Display
and then
Gosub Block 25
Block 25:
Start Timer j.
When Timer 1 > 5000
then goto Block 26
Block 26:
Reset Timer 1
and then
Return
Monitoring 4-35
Monitor Error Messages
Max Length
This message appears if you attempt to specify more than 255 characters in a single string.
Max Strings
This message means that the monitor and simulate menus combined contain strings which
have a total of more than 2000 characters.
Menu Full
The monitor and simulate menus combined contain 143 steps.
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu
This may occur if you enter 'When DTE/DCE' without completing the trigger branching
instruction. This error can also occur if you leave a 'message' or 'send' statement empty. You
must enter something into the message field, even if it is only blanks.
No File; Run Aborted
The menu requesting the run-time disc data file was exited prior to being executed.
File Already Exists
The menu requesting the run-time disc data file was given the name of a file already created.
DLC Error
HP 4952A hardware problem. Contact HP for service.
4-36 Monitoring
Monitor Status Messages
Text
Enter a single keyboard character.
Not Text
Enter a single keyboard character which should NOT be triggered on.
Hex
Enter two digits for each hex character.
Not Hex
Enter a hex character which should NOT be triggered on.
Binary
Enter eight bits from softkeys. If the Setup data code is less than eight bits, the most
significant bits are ignored.
End Frame
Enter the PCS character (good, bad, abort, don't care).
Start Flag
The cursor is over a start flag, delete this character if desired.
Monitoring 4 - 37
4-38 Monitoring
Triggers
Introduction
Trigger Types
Multiple Triggers
Triggering On Characters
Triggering On Errors
Triggering On Leads
Triggering On Timers
Triggering On Softkeys
Triggers 5-1
Introduction
Triggering is the basis for programmability. Triggers are the events you want the analyzer to
look for, such as characters, lead changes, or errors. The capabihty to select trigger events
allows you to control the data that is captured and stored in memory.
Once the analyzer finds the designated event, it will perform any action you specify. It can
beep, highlight the event in the buffer, count the event, or measure the time between events.
The HP 4952A stores all line data in its buffer. With triggering, you can selectively analyze
only events of interest.
When Statements Define Triggers
Triggers must be defined to be useful. You can define triggers with 'when' statements in
monitor or simulate programs. The 'when' statement is used in conjunction with the desired
action the trigger will effect.
To load a trigger condition:
■ Enter the desired menu to write a program, either the Monitor or Simulate menu.
■ Press liliHi>liBl . As soon as you press BQ^B&I > ^^ softkeys appear which
provide you with the choice of six types of triggers. You can trigger on DTE or DCE
characters, lead changes, errors, timeouts, and your own softkey entries.
Triggers Provide a Reference
When you start or stop an action, you need to tell the analyzer precisely when to start or stop
or the measurement may not be the desired data. For example, the START, STOP, BEEP,
HIGHLIGHT, and IF statements all need a point of reference to be meaningful.
There are two ways to provide a reference point for measurements:
1. Start of execution. A measurement positioned at the start of a program begins when
execution begins. However, this doesn't reference any actual event because execution
begins when you press the softkey in the run menu. Usually, you will want to tie
measurements to actual events.
5-2 Triggers
2. Following a trigger. By pointing to an actual event in the data stream, a trigger
provides a precise point of reference. Most monitor/simulate commands reference
last preceding 'when' statement. If a 'when' occurs earUer in the program, the
measurement starts at the time that trigger event was found.
To use a trigger event as a point of reference, action commands must follow 'when'
statements. For example, to start a timer when a certain event occurs, place the 'when'
statement first.
Block x:
When .
Block xx:
Start Timer
Caution Place the 'when' statement first or the timer won't be tied to the trigger event
and will start at some indeterminate time.
Triggers Stop Execution
A monitor /simulate program does not move out of a block containing 'when' statements until
at least one of the 'when' statements in that block is satisfied. Program execution "locks up"
(data continues to be acquired) until the trigger event is found. For example, in the following
program execution will not move out of block 5 until the analyzer sees either an "abc" on the
DTE channel or an "xyz" on the DCE channel:
Block 5:
When DTE abc
then goto Block 7
When DCE )(yz
then goto Block 8
Triggers 5-3
Trigger Types
There are six different types of 'when' trigger statements. You can trigger on DTE or DCE
characters, lead changes, errors, timeouts, and your own softkey entries.
Characters
To trigger on characters, specify "DTE" or "DCE" and type
in the desired characters.
5-4 Triggers
When DTE this is a character string
then goto Block 2
When DCE this is a character string
then goto Block 2
Leads
Errors
To trigger on lead changes, select the desired lead from the
softkeys. The appropriate leads appear on the softkeys
according to the pod attached.
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 2
Depending on the setup menu, you can trigger on FCS,
BCC, parity or framing errors, or aborted frames.
When Error FCS on DTE
then goto Block 2
Timeouts
On the HP 4952A you can specify one of five timers in 1
millisecond increments from 0-65534.
When Timer 1 > 100
then goto Block 2
Softkeys
You can trigger on the press of softkeys 3, 4, or 5. The
softkeys are numbered from 1-6 from left to right.
When Softkey 3
then goto Block 2
Multiple Triggers
You can combine triggers two ways:
■ You can logically 'or' triggers by putting 'when' statements in the same block.
■ You can 'sequence' triggers by putting 'when' statements in different blocks.
ORing Triggers (When statements In the Same Block)
'When' statements in the same block are ORed. The analyzer looks for both events
simultaneously; it looks for one event or the other event.
Therefore, to look for two or more triggers simultaneously, put the 'when' statements in the
same block. Once a trigger event is found all other triggers in that block are disabled. If two
'when' statements in the same block are satisfied simultaneously, only the one appearing first
in the block is recognized.
Note that in the following example, you can substitute 'or' for 'then goto block.'
Block 1:
When DTE abed
then goto Block 2
When Error Parity on DTE
or
When Error Parity on DCE
then goto Block 3
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 4
Triggers 5-5
Sequencing Triggers (When statements in Different Blocks)
In this example, the HP 4952A must find the string "abed" before it can look for string "efgh".
To get to block 5, the analyzer must find both strings.
Block 1:
When DTE abed
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
When DTE efgh
then goto Block 5
Overlapping and Duplicate Triggers
For overlapping or duplicate triggers in the same block, the one found first disables the other
triggers.
In the following example, if the data is "yabc", only the first 'when' statement is satisfied. If
the data is "ybc" only the second 'when' statement is satisfied. If the data is "yc", only the third
'when' statement is satisfied. The first 'when' statement to be satisfied disables the others.
Block 1:
When DTE abc
then goto Block 2
When DTE be
then goto Block 3
When DTE c
then goto Block 4
If the data is "ybc", only the trigger "c" is found.
Block 1:
When DTE c
then goto Block 2
When DTE be
then goto Block 3
5-6 Triggers
Continuation Of Triggering
When there are multiple trigger strings in a block, some of the triggers may be partially
matched at the time one of the triggers is satisfied. If the monitor or simulate program comes
back to the seune block for the next 'when' statement, these partial matches aiQ remembered
when triggering resumes. This is useful when looking for strings on both sides of the line.
This example, counts the number of times the string "HELLO" occurs on the DTE and DCE
side of the data line.
Block 1:
When DTE HELLO
then goto Block 2
When DCE HELLO
then goto Block 3
Block 2:
Increment counter 1 by 1,
and then
goto Block 1
Block 3:
Increment counter 2 by 1_
and then
goto Block 1
Suppose the word HELLO occurs on both side of the line about the same time. The two line
display format might look as follows.
DTE HELLO
DCE HELLO
The HP 4952A begins matching triggers as the data comes in. When the "O" comes in on
DTE, the first when statement is matched. At the same time, the first four characters of the
second when statement have also been matched. Since the program returns to block 1 for the
next set of triggers, the partial match is remembered. When the final character on the DCE
hello is received, the match on the second when statement is completed.
Triggers 5-7
Branching From a Trigger
A 'goto block' command is automatically appended to every 'when' statement (unless you
substitute *or'). Because any command can appear in the designated block, the HP 4952A ca
branch to any action as a result of a trigger. For example:
Block 2
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 4
When the analyzer sees lead RTS going off, it jumps to block 4 and performs the command in
block 4:
Block 4
Increment Counter 1 by 1_
Every time lead RTS goes off, the analyzer increments counter 1, The analyzer is counting
the off-going RTS lead changes.
After finding a trigger, you can have the HP 4952A perform any or all of the actions in its
repertoire. For example, in block 4 above, you could enter:
Block 4
Increment Counter 1 by 1.
and then
Start Disc
and then
Stop Timer 3
and then
Highlight
and then
Beep
and then
Reset Counter 4
5-8 Triggers
Triggering On Characters
|*Good FCS
*End Frame ---
|*Bad FCS
♦Start Flag
|*Abort
*Levl 3
1 DTE
Delete
When Trig
1
Insert
1 DCE
Text
Hex
(* indicates bit
Binary
oriented protocols
Don't Care
only)
Not
*Levl 2
How To Select Characters
Press BBSSilSI and then press K
DCE characters.
to trigger on DTE characters, or
to trigger on
Text
Use the |QQ| softkey for keyboard characters. The SHIFT
key, when pressed with another key, accesses lower case
characters.
Control
Control characters, shown in blue on the key caps, are
accessed by pressing the CNTL key with another key.
Unless you use hex or binary entry, this is the only way you
can enter a control character. For example, you cannot
type NAK as three letters; you must hold down CNTL and
press the NAK key (which is on the same key as "U").
Hex
Press ||Q9 to enter characters in hexadecimal. You must
enter two hex digits for each character.
Binary
Press liHBIlW to enter characters in binary. If the setup
menu data code is less than eight bits, enter the correct
binary digits, right-justified. The excess bits on the left are
disregarded. Parity bits are explicitly entered. You have
the choice of entering correct or incorrect parity.
Triggers 5-9
Don't Care Press EBSD^^3 if you want to trigger on any character.
The analyzer then places a boxed "x" in that character
location.
Not Press UQl before selecting a character if you want to
trigger on all characters but the selected character. The HP
4952A then places a bar over each selected character and an
asterisk on the "Not" softkey until you leave the "not" mode.
To leave the "not" mode, you must press |2Q3| again.
Hex or Binary Equivalent Of a Character
You can see the binary or hex value of an already entered character by positioning the cursor
over that character and pressing ||QQ| or
Edit Character Strings
Use the cursor keys or the uyi^a and WBH^CT softkeys to edit a string. Press MORE to
access softkeys when the cursor is positioned in the string. The Q^QSI key is continuous.
The Bil^^SJ key is not continuous. It must be pressed for each character inserted.
Setup After Typing a String
If you change the data code or protocol in the setup menu after typing a character string, you
must retype the string to avoid triggering on the wrong characters. Characters in one code
may not have the same meaning in another code. The HP 4952A shows "?" if the newly
selected code is no longer than the old code.
Character Not On the Keyboard
EBCDIC and some other data codes have control characters not on the keyboard. Go to the
data code tables in the appendix and find the hexadecimal equivalent. Press ||QQ| or liHffi!^
and enter that character from the keyboard.
Binary and Hex Characters
Use the |Jg3i or lUiHM softkeys to enter hexadecimal characters or binary strings. Two hex
numbers occupy each character position, requiring two keyboard entries. Hex characters are
underlined to differentiate them from text control characters with the same abbreviation.
When you press iiUSH^ , eight binary bits are displayed, allowing you to enter a 1, 0, or don't
care in any bit position. Once you move the cursor out of the binary string, it collapses to its
hex equivalent but is double underlined to indicate it was entered in binary.
5-10 Triggers
If the data code selected in the Setup Menu is less than eight bits (e.g., Baudot or Transcode),
the appropriate number of higher order bits are disregarded.
Masking Out Characters
Use liUiUlkbQl to mask out string characters or bits of no interest. "Don't Care" characters
are denoted by a boxed "x". If any bit in a binary string is designated as "don't care", the
compressed character is denoted by a boxed "?".
Excluding Characters
To trigger on anything but a particular character, press |j£m before selecting the character.
Not characters are overlined. The analyzer places a bar over each character that you select
from then on, until you leave the not mode by pressing BBS again.
Flags and Frame Check Characters
Unlike send strings, flags and frame check characters are not automatically appended for
'when' strings. You can enter these characters with the IctJ^UJiKTl and IJtMdJ^lnM . End
frame characters (the FCS characters and the last flag) may be useful if you wish to trigger on
Bad FCS or Abort characters. Triggers for FCS errors or abort characters can only be
programmed when a bit oriented protocol is selected on the setup menu.
Parity
The HP 4952A ignores the parity bit when triggering. You can see this by expanding the
specified trigger character in binary when the setup is ASCII 7. The MSB (left) is designated
"don't care.". You can explicitly define this character by entering a 1 or in binary to override
the setup Menu. Parity error triggers can be entered only when a character oriented protocol
is selected in the setup menu.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
The HP 4952A provides an assisted mode for entering level 2 or level 3 character strings.
Softkey prompting allows you to enter the correct bits for frame and packet entry. When the
cursor is positioned after a "when DTE/DCE" statement, press I^UJ or |QQQ to enter
the assisted mode.
Note imSUU aiid U^QKI appear if bit oriented protocols are selected.
Triggers 5-11
Triggering On Errors
When Error---
(*FCS DTE)
(*FCS DCE)
(*Abort DTE)
(*Abort DCE)
(**Pan'ty DTE)
<**Parity DCE)
(**BCC DTE)
(**BCC DCE)
(***Parity DTE)
(***Parity DCE)
(***BCC DTE)
(***BCC DCE)
(***Framing DTE)
<* bit oriented setups)
(** synchronous character setups)
(*** asynchronous character setups)
(***Framing DCE)
Example: Counting Errors
Assume you have selected BSC as the protocol in the setup menu and you want to count the
number of errors that occur over a one minute time period.
Block 1:
Start Timer 1_
When Timer 1 > 60000
then goto Block 4
When Error Parity on DTE
or
When Error Parity on DCE
or
When Error BCC on DTE
or
When Error BCC on DCE
then goto Block 3
Block 3:
Increment Counter 1 by J.
and then
Goto Block 1.
Block 4;
Stop Tests
5-12 Triggers
Triggering On Leads
When Lead
RTS
CTS
DSR goes -■
DTR
CD
On
Off
Depending on the pod being used, the appropriate leads automatically appear as softkey
choices. For example, with an RS-232C/V.24 pod, the softkey selections are as shown above:
RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, and CD.
The lead trigger is satisfied when the lead goes on or off. Unlike an "if' statement, the lead
trigger requires a transition.
Example: Looking For Illegal RTS/CTS Transitions
CTS should never go off before RTS goes off. You could use the following program to check
for illegal transitions:
Block 1:
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
If Lead CTS is On
then goto Block 1.
If Lead CTS is Off
then goto Block 3
Block 3:
Highlight
and then
Goto Block 1
Triggers 5-13
Triggering On Timers
You can trigger on the timeout of one of the HP 4952's five timers. The analyzer will trigger
whenever the timer becomes greater than some specified time in miUiseconds. You can select
any time from to 65,534 milliseconds. Timer triggers are not counted by the trigger counter.
Thus, you can enter as many timer triggers as you want, and not be limited by 63.
Example: Beeping After Two Minutes
Here's how to cause a beep every two minutes:
Block 1:
start Timer 1
When Timer 1 > 60000
then goto Block 2
60000 msec = 1 minute.
Block 2;
Increment Counter 1 by 1.
If Counter 1 > 2
then goto Block 4
Has counter 1 counted two 60000 msec
intervals?
Block 3:
Reset Timer 1
and then goto Block 1.
Timer 1 now measures the second minute.
Block 4:
Beep
and then
Reset Timer J.
and then
Reset Counter 1^
and then
Goto Block 1
Beep and then start over
5-14 Triggers
Triggering On Softkeys
When Soft key [3,4,5]
The HP 4952A can trigger on the press of softkeys 3, 4, and 5. Then, during execution, the
analyzer will stop execution and wait for you to press the specified softkey.
"When Softkey" triggers can only be recognized when the program is executing the block in
which they appear; they are not global.
"When Softkey" triggers can cause a character trigger in the same block to be missed, if the
character trigger is more than one character long. It is a good practice to have only error,
lead, or timer triggers in the same block with softkey triggers.
Example: Using a Prompt
You can use the "message" command in combination with the "when softkey" trigger to tell you
when to press a softkey during execution.
Block 1:
When When some event occurs press softkey 3.
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Message Press Softkey 3 After pressing softkey 3 turn off the
message.
Block 3:
When Softkey 3
then goto Block 4
Block 4:
Message Note that you must actually enter the blanks
with the space bar.
Triggers 5-15
5-16 Triggers
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Introduction
The Level 2 Softkey
The Level 3 Softkey
Entering a Level 2 'When' String - An Example
Entering a Level 3 'When' String - An Example
Entering a Level 2 'Send' String - An Example
Entering a Level 3 'Send' String - An Example
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-1
Introduction
The HP 4952A can assist you in entering level 2 and level 3 "send" and "when" strings in the
monitor and simulate menus. Without this capability, you would have to refer to bit pattern
charts. The setup menu protocol must be bit oriented, e.g., SDLC, HDLC, or X.25 (see
Appendix C).
"Send" and "When" Strings
The "send" command is available only in the simulate menu. However, the level 2 and 3
assisted mode is similar for both "when" and "send" strings. Therefore, the discussion of level
2 and 3 assisted mode for both "when" and "send" strings is presented entirely in this chapter to
avoid duplication.
Accessing the |QB and iebqbi Softlceys - "Send" statements
1. The setup menu protocol selection must be either SDLC, HDLC, or X.25 .
2. In the simulate menu, press ^^sl •
3. Press MORE until you see the MWWUrM and/or IKWJi softkeys.
Accessing the |QB and H^jB Softlceys - "When" statements
1. The setup menu protocol selection must be either SDLC, HDLC, or X.25.
2. Press IBBSI, and then EQI or Q
3. Press MORE until you see HAmisl and/or
6-2 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Level 2 Softkeys
Frames are entered by selecting |£QUm . The address byte is entered followed by the
control byte, which determines the frame type. In the control byte you can select type of
frame, the poll/final bit (P/F), and the send and receive sequence numbers (N(S) and
N(R)). You have the option of entering extended address or control fields depending on the
selection in the setup menu.
Level 3 Softkeys
Packets are entered by selecting |EBB| and then the entry point; either general format
identifier (GFI), logical channel nimaber (LCN), or packet type. When GFl is chosen, the Q
and D bits and the modulo 8 or 128 can be entered. If "packet type" is chosen, softkeys
appear for 17 different packet types.
General Procedure For Level 2 and 3 Assist
As you type in each entry the cursor automatically moves to the next entry position. A prompt
appears to tell you the next entry and the previous entry. The prompting message also appears
when you manually move the cursor with the cursor keys. For the cursor to move
automatically to the next entry position, you must actually type in an entry, even if it is the
same as the present entry. Of course, you can always move the left and right cursor keys to
the adjacent field.
If you move the cursor too far and drop out of assisted mode, press the IBQ9 or
softkeys again. Then move the cursor to the desired field.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-3
The DSns Softkey
The DSDBI softkey allows the entry of the Address (Extended if present), Frame bits (I, S,
U- frame), Frame type (RR, SABM, etc., if present), Poll/Final bit, N(S) (if present),
and N(R) (if present).
The automatic sequence in which the cursor moves in an I-frame is shown below:
1. Address Byte (hex entry ~ two digits).
2. Control Byte (binary entry ~ eight bits).
Type of frame: the first bit on the right.
N(S): the next three bits from the right.
P(F): the fifth bit from the right.
N(R): the last three bits from the right.
3. Information Field (one or more characters in text, hex, or binary).
The Address Field
When you press MW^fiUrM , you are prompted to enter (in hex notation) a value for the
"address" field. This prompt is displayed at the bottom of the HP 4952A display. If the right-
cursor key is pressed before entering an address, the address defaults to 00 hex.
Extended Addressing
If extended addressing is ON in the setup menu, two softkeys appear when the cursor is in the
address field: ECEEESQI ^^d l^ilifJiM . Pressing liUJJtf*! sets the least significant bit (LSB)
to and then, if necessary, adds a new byte to the address field. Pressing QQQIsS ends the
address field by putting a "1" in the LSB of the byte at the cursor position.
6-4 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Frame Type
After entering the address, you are prompted to enter the frame type. If you wish to enter an
I-frame, read the following discussion on "I-Frame Fields". Otherwise, read the succeeding
discussions on S-frames or U-frames.
I-Frame Fields
When you select I-frame, the least significant bit (right-most) becomes zero, indicating an I-
frame type. Then you are prompted to fill three fields. P/F requires one bit; N(R) and N(S)
require three bits each.
N(R) I P/F I N(S) I
The N(S) field takes on values of 0-7 if "extended control" in the setup menu
N(S) is off; and 0-127 otherwise. If a number greater than the upper limit is
entered, N(S) defaults to the upper Umit.
Enter a 1 or in the P/F field.
P/F
Entry of this field is the same as for the N(S) field. Pressing the left-cursor
N(R) key leaves the N(R) value unchanged. Entering a value for N(R) will exit you
from level 2 entry.
S-Frame Fields
When you select S-frame, the least significant two bits (right-most) are set to 01. Then you are
prompted to fill the next three fields from right to left. S-frame "type" is two bits; P/F is one
bit; N(R) is three bits.
N(R) I P/F I type | 01
To select an S-frame after entering the address, select Q|^^3 . You are then prompted to
enter the S-frame type:
irn M:il\M IJJl lilJJl
After entering the S-frame type, you are then prompted to enter the P/F field and then the
N(R) field. After entering N(R) the HP 4952A exits from the level 2 entry mode.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-5
U-frame Fields
When you select U-frame, the two least significant bits (right-most) are set to 11, indicating a
U-frame. You are then prompted to select the type of U-frame from the following softkeys:
^3!l ^^^ liiMrJ!! iJHii Q3i insi 133 I23SI3
l:fi1J!U IW Ml!! BM 15H3a ItTJ-JiU lJ?lr4iU l;li!l QQI
The type of U-frame is defined by two 3-bit fields, which are filled at the same time when you
select U-frame type from the softkeys. The default value for the U-frame type is UI. The P/F
field requires one bit.
type I P/F I type | 11
After entering P/F the analyzer exits you from the level 2 entry mode.
6-6 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
The i^B Softkey
The IKMM softkey enables you to enter the three fields of the packet header: GFI, LCN,
and Packet Type. For most packets, these each take up one byte. Some packet types,
however, require a longer packet header. The packet header normally follows the first two
bytes of level 2 information, "address" and "control".
flag I address | control | GFI | LCN | packet type
Of course, if either "extended address" or "extended control" in the setup menu are on, there
may be more than two level 2 bytes. Frame type also determines the number of level 2 fields.
Selecting BSBDBI Before iq^b
You can select liWM without going through IKMBsl first. In this case, zeros are
automatically appended for the level 2 bytes in send strings, and "don't cares" in trigger
strings. Unless "extended address" or "extended control" in the setup menu are on, the cursor
is positioned on the third byte, which is 10 hex. (Flags are shown below by " | ", and a good
frame check sequence by "GG").
I OoOoIqgg I
Three Entry Points - GFI, lcn, Packet Type
When you press |[^SUKifl » three new softkeys appear, allowing you to enter the packet header
from three different points: QQ y WM > ^^'^ lJ»!4!l4JltfBa .
If LCN is selected before GFI (missing GFI), the Q and D bits are set to zero, modulo 8 is
selected, and the LCGN is set to zero ("don't cares" for trigger strings).
If l:IJf4!M JWCT is selected first (missing GFI and LCN), the GFI is set the same as above,
and the LCN is also set to zeros ("don't cares" for trigger strings).
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-7
The GFI Field
The GFI byte consists of three fields from left to right: Q, D, MOD, and LCGN. Q and D
consist of one bit each; Mod is a 2-bit field; and LCGN is a 4-bit field.
Q I D I mod I LCGN
The Q Bit
Pressing the QQ softkey prompts you to enter a 1 or for the Q bit. When you enter a value
for the Q bit or press the right-cursor key, the D-bit prompt appears.
The D bit
When you enter the D bit or press the right-cursor key, the D prompt appears.
Mod
Press either ■app»:« or ^jSEMOS^ to select either 01 or 10 for the two-bit mod field. Entering a
value for the mod field or pressing the right-cursor key causes the LCGN prompt to appear.
Selecting U^HEjgi causes the packet type field to expand to two bytes for some packet types,
as described under "Data Packet Fields" below.
The LCGN Field
The LCGN is a four-bit field which you can enter with a decimal value from - 15.
The LCN Field
The LCN field is the next byte to the right of the GFI byte. You can use either decimal or hex
entry to select values from 0-255 or 00-FF.
6-8 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
The Packet-Type Field
When the last digit of the LCN is entered, the "packet-type" field appears, making the
following softkeys available:
The default packet type is Data. If |2ESI19 was chosen in the GFI field, the packet-type
field expands to two bytes for some packet types, as described below.
Data Packet Fields
The Packet-Type field for a data packet is Uke the control field for an I-frame. Entry of the
P(S), M, and P(R) is just like the entry of N(S), P/F, and N(R) fields. When you select
ISEQ9I packet, the least significant bit (right-most) becomes zero, indicating a data type
packet. Then you are prompted to fill three fields from right to left. P(S) and P(R) each
require three bits; M requires one bit.
P(R) I M 1 P(S) I
If you selected MEEMU^^ i^ the GFI, the packet-type field consists of two bytes rather than
one. P(S) and P(R) each take up seven bits:
Other Packet Types
RR, REJ, and RNR packet types have a P(R) field. All other packet types do not have any
such fields except Data.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-9
Entering a Level 2 "When" String - An Example
The following example describes the procedure for entering a level 2 "when" string. The setup
protocol must be either SDLC, HDLC, or X.25 to see the MWIMrM softkey. If you don't see
the indicated softkey, press MORE until you do. In the following example flags are shown as
"I".
1. Set protocol to SDLC in the Setup menu.
2. In the monitor or simulate menu, press liliHimitl and then |j||3 or §SSM • Let's
select O
When DTE
then goto Block 2
3. Press IKWs^ , The start flag and the address field (00) now appear:
When DTE |Oo
then goto Block 2
4. Type the address in hexadecimal. Let's type "4A". The control field now appears in
binary unless extended address is ON; and the softkeys prompt you to select the type
of frame, which is determined by the least significant one or two bits (on the right).
When DTE |4a00000000
then goto Block 2
5. Let's select Ql&S • The least significant bit (on the right) remains 0. The cursor
now moves to the left into the three-bit N(S) field. Enter an N(S) of 5.
When DTE |4a00001010
then goto Block 2
6. The cursor now moves to the left into the one-bit P/F field. Let's enter a P/F of 0.
Note that even though the P/F bit is already 0, you must still enter to automatically
move the cursor into the next field. Of course, you can always use the cursor keys.
When DTE |4a00001010
then goto Block 2
6-10 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
7. The cursor now moves into the three-bit N(R) field. Let's enter an N(R) of 7.
When DTE |4a1 1101010
then goto Block 2
As soon as you make the entry the eight-bit control field collapses to its hex
equivalent to save space:
When DTE |4aEa
then goto Block 2
8. The cursor novi' moves into the I-field, prompting you to enter text.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-11
Entering a Level 3 "When" String -An Example
The following example illustrates level 3 assisted entry for a "when" string. If you don't see the
indicated softkey, press MORE until you do. The setup protocol must be either SDLC,
HDLC, or X.25 to see the |mm^ softkey. In the following example, " | " indicates flags,
"GG" indicates a good frame check sequence, "don't care" characters are shown as "x", and
characters with no hex equivalent as "?".
1. Set the protocol to SDLC in the Setup menu.
2. In the monitor menu or simulate menu, press |S2laBI&l ^^^ then |j|m .
when DTE
3. Press IIISI9 . The flag is automatically entered and the next two bytes, address
and control, are shown as "don't care".
When DTE |x?
4. The first byte (level 2) is indicated by "x", which means "don't care". The cursor is
positioned on the third byte, where level 3 entry begins. This byte is shown as
unknown (?) because some of its bits are "don't cares".
At any point you can change the first two bytes by moving the cursor to the left and
pressing |
5. When the cursor is positioned on the third byte (?), three softkeys appear:
§EM, andBSSBEISI- Press Oil; the third byte now expands to eight binary
bits, with the last four bits being "don't cares". The GFI consists of the first four bits
on the left. The cursor now prompts you to enter the Q bit, which is the first bit on
the left.
When DTE |xx0001xxxx
6. Now enter the Q and D bits. Press to enter a Q bit of 0. The cursor now moves
one bit to the right, prompting you to enter a D bit. Press the 1 softkey to enter a D
bit of 1.
When DTE |xx0101xxxx
6-12 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
7. The cursor now moves into the modulo 8 or 128 field, which consists of the third and
fourth bits from the left. Press |2Q9Q| , which is 01.
When DTE |xx0101xxxx
8. The ciu^sor now moves into the last four bits, which is the LCGN field. You can enter
a maximum of 15 decimal; if you type a number higher than 15, the entry defaults to
15. Type 09 (note that you must enter leading O's to have the cursor move
automatically). The third byte collapses to its hex equivalent, and the cursor moves to
the fourth byte.
When DTE |xx010l1001 becomes When DTE |xx5900000000
9. The fourth byte is the LCN. You can enter a maximum of 255 decimal; if you type a
number higher than 255, the entry defaults to 255. Type 045 or select hex entry and
enter 2D (note that you must enter leading O's for the cursor to move automatically).
The fourth byte collapses to its hex equivalent, and the cursor moves to the fifth byte.
When DTE |xx5900101101 becomes When DTE |xx592dOOOOO0OO
10. The fifth byte is the packet-type identifier. The cursor moves to the least significant
bit (most right). A least significant bit of indicates a "data" packet. Let's select a
data packet type by pressing mifjl . The least significant bit remains 0.
11. The cursor now moves to the left into the three-bit P(S) field. Type 7.
When DTE |xx592d00001110
12. The cursor moves to the M bit, which is the fifth bit from the right. Press
When DTE |xx592d000x1110
13. The cursor moves to the three-bit P(R) field, which is the last three bits from the left.
Type 5. The fifth byte collapses to "?" because there is no hex equivalent.
When DTE |xx592d101x1110 becomes When DTE |xx592d?
14. The cursor moves into the text field, allowing you to type any text you wish. Type
"THIS IS TEXT".
When DTE |xx592D?THIS IS TEXT
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-13
15. Press ESEEEB, and then ^S|^.
When DTE |xx592d?THIS IS TEXT GG|
then goto Block 2
The trigger counter at the bottom of the display should indicate "42 triggers left".
Therefore, the entire string used up 63 - 42, or 21 triggers.
NotG You may not have needed to trigger on the complete string. You can trigger
on any character or characters in the string. For example, if you wish to
trigger only on packets which have an LCN of 2D, you can enter the
following:
When DTE |xxxx2D
This tells the analyzer to look for a 2D in the fifth byte after any start flag.
6-14 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Entering a Level 2 "Send" String -- An Example
The "send" command is available in the simulate menu only (see Chapter 7, "Simulate Menu".
The discussion of level 2 and 3 assisted mode for both "when" and "send" strings is presented
entirely in this chapter to avoid duplication.
The following example illustrates level 2 assisted entry for a "send" string. The setup protocol
must be either SDLC, HDLC, or X.25 to see the |^|g softkey.
In this example, " | " and "GG" indicate flags and FCS.
1. Set the protocol to SDLC in the Setup menu.
2. Press Q§Bg| in the simulate menu, and then |QQQ . The string should look like
this.
Send |OoGG|
3. The cursor is sitting over the 00, and the message tells you to enter a hexadecimal
address from the keyboard.
4. Type 01 for the address. The cursor now moves over to the control byte. The string
looks like this:
|OiOOOOOOOOGG|
5. The cursor is on the LSB, the right-most bit of the control byte, and the softkeys
prompt you to select either |BQ|[3 , QQgJg| , or IQQgQS • select HB
, which is denoted by a "0" in the LSB.
6. The cursor now moves to the left, prompting you to enter the N(S) number, which
takes up the next three bits. You may enter any number from to 7. Let's select "7".
The string should now look like this:
|0i00001110GG|
7, The cursor now moves to the fifth bit from the right, prompting you to enter the P/F
bit. Let's enter "0". Press the softkey.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-15
8. The cursor now moves to the sixth bit from the right, prompting you to enter the
N(R) number, which takes up the last three bits. You may enter any number from
to 7. Let's select "5":
|0i10101110GG|
9. As soon as you have selected the last control bit, the control byte is shown in
hexadecimal, rather than binary:
|OiAeGG|
10. The cursor is now positioned to the right of the control byte, prompting you to type in
the information field. Let's type the message "THIS IS DATA". The string should
look like this:
|OiAe this is data gg|
11. Press IIQsQOEl or cursor down to end the frame.
6-16 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Entering a Level 3 "Send" String -An Example
The "send" command is available only in the simulate menu. The discussion of level 2 and 3
assisted mode for both "when" and "send" strings is presented entirely in this chapter to avoid
duplication.
The following procedure illustrates level 3 entry for a "send" string. The setup protocol must
be either SDLC, HDLC, or X.25 to see the IQB and BSB softkeys.
In the following description, " | " indicates a flag and "GG" indicates a good frame check
sequence.
1. Set the protocol to SDLC in the Setup menu.
2. Press |^g| in the simulate menu. Press MORE until you see the HW>.1 softkey.
Press lgBl>.ll ; the string should look like this.
|OoOoloGG|
Note that the first two bytes are both Oq. These are the level 2 address and control
bytes, which default to 0. You can move the cursor back and change them if you
wish. When you move the cursor back to these bytes, you drop out of the level 3
assisted mode; and you can press IPIBJ for assistance in entering these bytes.
For now, make sure you are in the level 3 mode and the cursor is positioned over the
right-most byte, Iq. When you press |^Q|j| you will see the following three
softkeys:
Press QQ • The right-hand byte is expanded to its binary components:
|OoOo00010000GG|
The cursor is sitting over the left-most bit, prompting you to enter the Q bit. Let's
enter "0". Press the softkey.
The cursor now moves to the second bit from the left, prompting you to enter the D
bit. Let's enter "1". Press the 1 softkey.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode 6-17
5. The cursor now moves to the two-bit "mod" field. Mod 8 is 01 binary, and mod 128 is
10 binary. Press l^ggj^l . The string should now look Uke this:
|OoOo01010000GG|
6. The cursor now moves to most right-hand bit, prompting you to type in a LCGN.
Since this is as four-bit field, you can enter any number from to 15. Let's enter "9".
Type 09 (you must enter the "0" before the "9". The GFI field collapses to 59 hex, and
the next byte appears, prompting you to enter the LCN:
|OoOo5900000000GG|
7. You can enter any three decimal digits or any two hexadecimal digits for the eight-bit
LCN field. If you enter a number greater than 255, the entry defaults to 255. Type
155 decimal. The LCN field collapses to 9B hex, and the next byte appears,
prompting you to enter the packet type:
|OoOo599bOOOOOOOOGG|
8. Enter |£|3 for the packet type. The right-most bit remains and the prompt moves
left to the three-bit P(S) field. Enter 7 for the P(S):
|0000599b00001110GG|
9. The cursor moves to the fifth bit from the right, prompting you to enter the M bit.
Enter for the M bit. The prompt now moves to the last three bits on the left, which
is the P(R) field. Enter 5 for the P(R):
|00O0599b1O101110GG|
10. The packet-type byte collapses to its hex equivalent, AE, and the cursor moves to the
data field, prompting you to enter text:
|OoOo599bAe GG|
6-18 Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Simulating
Introduction
Device Selection
The Simulate Menu
Simulate Softkeys
Compatibility With Other HP Protocol Analyzers
Simulate Functions
Send Characters
Controlling Interface Leads
Delaying Output
Simulate Error Messages
Simulate Status Messages
Simulating 7-1
Introduction
The HP 4952A can be placed in a line and substitute for an active device. In this mode the
analyzer becomes an integral part of the link and actually drives leads.
The simulation menu is similar in appearance to the monitor menu because you must program
the analyzer to act as a device in the link. The programs are similcir but the function is much
different.
Connect the HP 4952A For Simulating
1. Turn off the analyzer and connect the pod.
2. Disconnect the DTE or DCE device to be simulated.
3. Use the Y-cable suppUed with the pod to connect the HP 4952A in place of the device
to be simulated. You need only one branch of the Y-cable as shown below.
HP 4952
O
POD
NC
DTE or DCE
Equipment
RS-232/V.24
Y-Cable (Ribbon)
Figure 7-1, Hookup for Simulating
7 - 2 Simulating
Device Selection
The first selection, before any programming can begin, tells the analyzer what device is being
substituted. The selections are DTE or DCE and are selected with softkeys.
This selection is very important because it determines the interface pins the analyzer uses for
sending and receiving. It also determines which clocks are suppUed and expected by the
analyzer. For example, on an RS-232C interface, ETC is provided when simulating a DTE;
TC jmd RC 2ire provided when simulating a DCE.
Setup for Simulating
If parameters such as protocol or bit rate are wrong, the other devices on the line may not
respond. Use the setup menu to configure the emalyzer to the link. Setup should be
performed before you make entries in the simulate menu, otherwise, some simulate entries
may be incorrect.
Lead Handshaking
The other devices on the link may expect leads to turn on and off at the correct times. For
example, on some RS-232C interfaces the DTE raises RTS and waits for CTS from the DCE.
Leads are turned on and off by 'set lead' statements in the simulate program.
Simulating 7-3
The Simulate Menu
The simulate menu is used for telling the analyzer how to simulate. After entering a simulate
program in the simulate menu, you must go to the run menu to execute the program.
The simulate menu is similar to the monitor menu, with the addition of three softkeys:
BQBSI y ^iid ISSBQI • Simulation requires the sending of data £ind the setting of leads, and
this is done with softkey commands in the simulate menu.
Table 6-1. The Simulate Menu
Simulate DTE/DCE
Block 1
Line
Start
Stop
Inc
Ctr
If
When
Send
High-
Beep
Reset
Goto
Set
Wait
Light
Blk
Lead
Gosub
Re-
Move
Mes-
Block
turn
Crsr
sages
Insert
Delete
Print
Block
Line
Block
Prg
Prog
[MORE]
[MORE]
[MORE]
[MORE]
7 - 4 Simulating
Simulate Softkeys
Most of the softkeys in the monitor and simulate menus are the same. All of the first-level
softkey commands that appear in the monitor and simulate menus are summarized below in
the order they appear. Softkeys available only in the simulate menu are shown with an
asterisk.
Start
The start softkey is available to start the IBHSnE^ , l^gj , Q^g| 'Start' and 'Stop'
commands should be tied to the start of execution or the last preceding trigger.
Stop
The stop softkey is available to stop the IBBHEW , |J|^| , BHiigB . 'Start' and 'Stop'
commands should be tied to the start of execution or the last preceding trigger.
Inc Ctr
'Increment Counter' uses one of the five counters to count events.
If
An 'If Counter' causes a program branch according to the condition of a counter. An 'If Lead'
causes a branch according to the condition of a lead at the time of the last trigger.
When Trig
'When Trig' is the only statement that defines a trigger event. The analyzer can look for any
event and then branch to a designated action. Triggers are the only way to provide a reference
point in the data stream.
♦Send
The 'Send' command tells the analyzer to send characters. You can enter the characters in
text, hexadecimal, or binary. Level 2 or 3 assisted mode m£ikes entry of frame and packet
headers available.
Simulating 7-5
Highlight
Marks trigger events in the buffer.
Beep
Audibly notifies you when the last preceding trigger is found.
Reset
Resets to zero and stops a specified BHQB or QQ|£§j|| .
Goto BIk
Effects a branch to another block.
* Set Lead
Sets interface leads on or off.
*Wait
'Wait' statements are used to delay 'Send' or 'Set Lead' commands by a specified number of
milliseconds.
Message
'Message' statements are used for entering comments lq a program.
Gosub Block
The 'Gosub Block' command causes a jump to a subroutine that ends in a 'return' statement.
Without a 'return' statement 'Gosub Block' acts like a 'Goto Block' command.
7-6 Simulating
Return
A command that terminates a subroutine and return to the command immediately following
the 'Gosub Block' statement.
Insert Line
Inserts a new line when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Insert Block
Inserts a new block when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Delete Line
Deletes a line when the cursor is at the beginning of a hne.
Delete Block
Deletes a block when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Delete Prg
Deletes the entire simulate program when the cursor is at the beginning of a line.
Print Prog
Prints the simulate program if an ASCII printer is connected.
Move Crsr
Allows the cursor to be positioned at the start of a block.
Simulating 7-7
Compatibility With Other HP Protocol Analyzers
The following Simulate functions are unique to the HP 4952A and are not supported on other
HP protocol analyzers.
Message statements
Gosub Block and Return
When triggers
Inc Cntr by n
If you load an HP 4952A Simulate menu or program into another HP protocol analyzer, either
from disc or remote, the functions listed above will be changed by the other anzJyzer into a
different function.
Before you use an HP 4952A Simulate menu or program another HP protocol analyzer, verify
the menu program to avoid any discrepancies.
Caution Remove all 'Message' statements before transferring programs or menus
from an HP 4952A to another non-4952A protocol analyzer.
7-8 Simulating
Simulate Functions -
In addition to the regular monitoring commands, the simulate menu contains three other
statements — ESSI , |g^JU^2s|, and|
The following three functions are described in more detail on the following pages.
Sending Characters - 1
To simulate a DTE or DCE, you must be able to send characters to the other devices on the
link. jj^gjjUl allows you to enter characters to be sent by the analyzer.
Controlling the Interface - MJJiJkM
A simulating device must be able to change the leads on the interface. The HP 4952A lets you
turn leads on and off with Igj^PJ^Q . Of course, the £inalyzer can only drive the leads
controlled by the device it is simulating.
Delaying Output - JESSM
Sometimes it is necessary to delay sending or setting leads by a certain number of milUseconds.
The ISSDI can be used before 'send' or 'set lead' statements.
Simulating 7 - 9
Send Characters --
Using |gg|g|, you can simulate a DTE or DCE by sending any bit or character sequence in any
of the codes supported by the HP 4952A. Maximum length for each string is 251 characters.
Send
Text
Hex
Binary
[MORE]
Delete
Insert
[input from the keyboard]
Handshaking Requirements
The receiving equipment may require a handshaking sequence before accepting the data you
are sending.
Note
Determine which interface leads must be set on or off before sending data.
Otherwise, the receiving equipment may not accept the data.
How To Select w^SM Characters
enters characters in the data code selected in the setup menu. The SHIFT key accesses
lower-case characters and the CNTL key accesses control characters. You can see the binary
or hex value of any entered character by positioning the cursor over that character and
pressing DJQ or I
7-10 Simulating
Control Characters
Control characters, such as SYN appear in blue at the top of the keys. To enter sync, or other
control characters, press CNTL while pressing the key with the desired control character.
Note You must use the CNTL key to enter control characters. For example, you
cannot just type "SYN". Of course, you can always enter the hex or binary
equivalent.
You must explicitly enter sync characters at the beginning of "send" strings for character
oriented protocols. Otherwise, the receiving device cannot synchronize to the message. For
example:
Send SySy this is a message
Note In character oriented protocols you must expUcitly enter sync characters such
as SySy. Otherwise, the receiving device does not recognize the message.
When a Character Is Not On the Keyboard
EBCDIC and some other data codes have control characters which are not on the keyboard.
Go to the data code tables in the appendix to find the hexadecimal equivalent. Press BQQI or
and enter that character from the keyboard.
Simulating 7-11
Binary and Hex Characters
Use either BJ^i or iilBBfWi to enter hexadecimal characters or binary strings. Two numbers
occupy each hex character position, requiring two keyboard entries. When you press fUBSBHi ,
eight binary bits are displayed, this lets you enter a 1 or in any bit position from the softkeys.
Once you move the cursor out of the binary string, it collapses to its hex equivalent.
How To Edit Character Strings
Use IrfJKU and ^l«tfJ4| l to edit a string. Press MORE to access these softkeys when the
cursor is positioned in the string.
Sending Idles
The HP 4952A can be set up to capture data and idles monitored on a hne. When simulating,
the line will not display idles, or store idles in the buffer, unless they are expUcitly placed in
the send string.
Block Check Characters (BCC)
In character oriented protocols, the HP 4952A automatically appends the correct block check
character to "send" strings. You can see this character at run-time or in the buffer after a run.
In "char" protocol setup you can select the characters on which error checking is to start and
stop.
In the setup menu, the "start on" selection begins error checking following the designated
character. The "stop on" character selection includes the designated character in the error
check.
The BCC is automatically generated only for the first required BCC. The BCC for subsequent
blocks of text or data must be entered manually into the string.
7-12 Simulating
Flags and Frame Check Characters
Flags and frame check sequence (FCS) characters are automatically added whenever a bit
oriented protocol (HDLC, SDLC, X.25) is selected in the setup menu. The HP 4952A does
not show you the actual frame check character.
For received data, GG, BB, or AA are displayed to indicate 'good FCS', 'bad FCS', or
'abort'. For 'send' strings, good FCS characters (GG) are automatically selected; but you may
choose bad FCS (BB) characters or abort (AA) characters either by explicitly entering the
frame check characters, or by using UitsU^uB .
Flags and frame check characters disappear if you change the setup to a character oriented
protocol and again move the cursor into the string.
Parity Bits
In 1^1 mode the current setup determines the parity bit. In Ej^ or 13HBBH!! mode the
current setup also determines the parity for 8-bit data codes (e.g., ASCII 8, EBCDIC). For
data codes less than 8-bits (e.g., ASCII 7, Baudot), the parity bit is determined by the hex or
binary entry.
For example, assume the setup is ASCII 7 with odd parity. In the |jQQB mode, if you enter an
"E" in the send string, the binary code sent will be 01000101. The parity is (left-most bit).
To change the parity bit to 1, use liHiEtW or E^l and enter 11000101 or 5 .
Note The run-time and exzmiine data displays ignore the parity bit on transmitted
data. In the above example, the run-time and examine data displays show an
"E" even when you send C5. However, parity errors are detected on received
data. When receiving a C5 with odd parity, the C5 appears as a blinking "E" in
both displays and the parity bit indicated in the examine data menu is 1.
Simulating 7-13
Zero Bit Insertion
In bit oriented protocols, the HP 4952A automatically inserts a (invisible to the user) after
five consecutive I's before transmitting non-flag characters (invisible to the user). When
receiving, it automatically removes any bits inserted by the transmitter. 2^ro Insertion is
not done in the case of char protocol setup.
Changing the Setup After Typing the String
If the data code or protocol are changed in the Setup Menu after typing a character string,
you must retype the string. Characters in one code may not have the same meaning in another
code. This is especially important for sync characters, which when typed as Sy usually mean
different things in different data codes, and can cause incorrect sync-up of the receive
channel.
Level 2 and 3 Assisted Mode
Just as with 'when' strings, |^Q|s| and H^SJUJ provide an assisted mode for entering level
2 and 3 information. Chapter 6 provides detailed information on level 2 and 3 assisted mode.
7-14 Simulating
Using Timers With
Timers measure intervals between trigger events. Each line event is time stamped as it is
placed in the buffer. Timers are always referenced to the last preceding 'when' statement.
The following example shows the correct way to measure the time it takes to send the string:
Block 1:
Send SySySx abcdefghi ik Ex
and then goto Block 2
Block 2:
When DTE a
then goto Block 3
Block 3:
Start Tinner 1
When DTE k
then goto Block 4
Block 4:
Stop Timer 1.
The next example is incorrect because the start of the timer is not tied to a preceding "when"
trigger statement. The timer starts when execution starts.
Block 1:
Start Timer 1.
and then
Send SySyS y abcdefghi jk Ex
and then
Stop Timer 1
Simulating 7-15
Controlling Interface Leads -bbbeI
The 'set lead' command turns on or off a selected interface lead. The HP 4952A always knows
which pod is attached and displays the correct softkeys.
When Are Leads On or Off?
With a RS-232C/V.24 interface, a lead is "on" when the voltage is high; it is "off when the
voltage is low. This may be different for other interfaces.
Which Leads Can Be Controlled?
When simulating a DTE, you cannot control DCE leads, and vice vesa; only the appropriate
lead softkeys are displayed, as shown below ( * indicates RS 449-leads ). See Chapter 15
"Interface Pods" for more information.
DTE DCE
I RTS (*RS) I CTS (*CS)
Set Lead | DTR (*TR) Set Lead | DSR (*RR)
I CD (*DM)
HP 4952A Lead Status During Simulation
At the beginning of simulate execution, the HP 4952A sets all the leads it can drive off. You
must use "set lead" statements in the simulate menu to perform handshaking with the receiving
device.
Note Determine which interface leads must be set on or off before sending data.
Otherwise, the receiving equipment may not accept the data.
7-16 Simulating
HP 4952A Lead Status When Not Simulating
Lead status is independent of the HP 4952A, except when it is simulating. Remember this
when you use 'if lead' statement in a monitor program.
Example: Simulating a DTE
Because the HP 4952A always sets the appropriate DTE or DCE leads off at the beginning of
the simulation run, 'set lead' statements are needed to turn the appropriate leads back on
before sending data. If this is not done, the receiving device might not accept data from the
HP 4952A. You must know the handshaking requirements on your system in order to
simulate correctly.
Simulate DTE
Block 1:
Set Lead DTR On
and then
Wait 1000
and then
Set Lead RTS On
If Lead CTS is On then goto Block 2
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Send abed
and then
Set Lead RTS Off
Simulating 7-17
Delaying Output --
Controls Output Only
Note The 'wait' statement controls output only.
Use |!S9 only with l^^l and ^SB^SI statements. IQgQI has no effect on program
flow or timers. If you need to insert program pauses, use timers or counters.
Note The shortest 'wait' possible is 3 milUseconds. Thus, 'waits' of 1 or 2
milliseconds are actually 3 milUseconds.
Delaying Characters or Leads
The 'wait' command can be set in 1 millisecond increments to cause delays of up to 65,535
milliseconds. In combination with counters, very long delays Ccm be set up. The following
example repeatedly sends a string of numbers and then waits 50 milliseconds.
Block 1;
Send 1234567
and then
Wait 50 msec
and then goto Block 1
7-18 Simulating
Simulate Error Messages
Max Length
This message appears if you attempt to specify more than 255 characters in a single string.
Max Strings
This message appears if monitor and simulate programs combined contain strings totalling
more than 1750 characters.
Menu Full
The monitor and simulate menus combined contain 143 program statements.
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu
This may occur if you enter 'When DTE/DCE' without completing the trigger branching
instruction. This error can also occur if you leave a 'message' or 'send' statement empty. You
must enter something into the message field, even if it is only blanks.
No File; Run Aborted
The menu requesting the run-time disc data file was exited prior to being executed.
File Already Exists
The menu requesting the run-time disc data file was given the name of a file already created.
DLC Error
HP 4952A hardwjire problem. Contact HP for service.
Simulating 7-19
Simulate Status Messages
Text
Enter a single keyboard character.
Not Text
Enter a single keyboard character which should NOT be triggered on.
Hex
Enter two digits for each hex character.
Not Hex
Enter a hex character which should NOT be triggered on.
Binary
Enter eight bits from softkeys. If the Setup data code is less than eight bits, the most
significant bits are ignored.
End Frame
Enter the PCS character (good,v bad, abort, don't care).
Start Flag
The cursor is over a start flag, delete this chju-acter if desired.
7-20 Simulating
8
The Run Menu
■ Introduction
■ Run Menu Softkeys
■ Displaying Data
■ Run-Time Messages
The Run Menu 8-1
Introduction
The Run mode is used to execute all tests. When all setups and hookups are complete, you
must go into the Run Menu and execute the tests. An exception to this rule is in Auto
Configure when the HP 4952A automatically goes to the run mode.
Run Menu Softkeys
After pressing QSflESD > the following softkey choices appear.
Monitor Sim- Data BERT
Line Buffer ulate Filter
See the monitoring, simulate, or BERT sections for detailed information on the correct
hookup and setup.
Monitor Line
To monitor the line, perform the correct hookup and setup (see Chapter 4) and then press
|2S2^fflDB39 ^^ the run menu to execute.
Monitor Buffer
To monitor the buffer, make sure there is data present in the buffer, perform the correct
setup, and press KBliiniMrllllJJil ia the run menu to execute.
8-2 The Run Menu
Simulate
To simulate, perform the correct hookup and setup, ensure that lead handshaking is correct in
the simulate menu (see Chapter 7) and press JjHiWHEHSl in the run menu to execute.
Data Filter
The data filter enables you to use the buffer more efficiently and eliminate characters of no
interest.
Data filtering affects only the data being acquired, not data already in the buffer. When any
form of data filtering is in effect, the following message appears continuously in the run menu:
'DATA FILTER ACTIVE'.
If an asynchronous protocol is selected, a 'character counting inactive' message is displayed
since flags or syncs are required for the skip/capture portion of the data filter.
The Data Filter Setup Menu
The data filter setup menu is shown below. Entry options are shown in brackets.
Data Filter [ On ] [ Off ]
Capture Data On [ DCE Only ]
[ DTE Only ]
[ DCE & DTE ]
[ Errs Only ]
X21 Idles <*,Sy, Bl) [ On ] [Off]
(Only appears when X21 is selected)
Timing Information [ On ] [ Off ]
(not available with X21)
Lead Changes Turned [ On ] [ Off ]
(not available with X21)
[ Skip ] [ Capture ] the First [ use keyboard ] Chars
The Run Menu 8-3
Data Filter Definitions
Data Filter On/Off
With this selection you can turn the entire data filter off, regardless of any other selections.
Capture Data On
The 'Capture Data On' selection determines whether you captiu^e data on the DTE, DCE, or
both, or whether you capture only errors on either channel. Filtering does not turn off errors,
even on a channel that is turned off. If you are capturing data on DTE only, errors will be
seen on the DCE channel. Error conditions are always stored in the buffer.
X21 Idles [Off] will filter out X21 idle characters to use the buffer more efficiently.
Timing Information (Not available when X21 is selected)
Normally, a time stamp is stored periodically in the buffer. By turning off 'Timing
Information' you eliminate the time stamps and store more characters. Of course, you can't
make timing measurements in the monitor or examine data menus. When 'timing
information' is turned off, you cannot store lead changes.
If you try to make timing measurements on data that had timing information turned off,
erroneous results will occur. If you store data to disc that had timing information turned off,
use the comment field to indicate this condition.
Note To measure time in the monitor, simulate, examine data menus, you must
have selected 'timing information' On in the data filter. Also, if you want to
trigger on an event in the monitor or simulate menu, then you must not have
filtered that event out in the data filter.
8-4 The Run Menu
Lead Changes (Not available when X21 is selected)
You have more room for characters if lead changes are turned off. This is useful on lines
where the leads are changing rapidly or on noisy lines. You can make more efficient use of
the buffer by turning off 'lead changes.'
If the data and state display format was selected when 'lead changes' was turned off, the two-
line display is automatically selected.
Skip the First N Chars
'Skip the first N chars' tells the analyzer not to store the first 'N' characters of frames or
blocks, regardless of their size. The value for 'N' can be to 255. Skip is for synchronous
protocols only.
Frames or blocks that are less than N+ 1 (not including the FCS or BCC) are not stored. You
can select 'N' so that all frames or blocks without information above a certain protocol level
£ire suppressed. For example, setting N = 2 when the protocol is X.25 filters out frames
containing only level 2 information. When frames are longer than 'N' bytes, end flags are
stored but not start flags.
Capture the First N Chars
'Capture the first N chars' tells the analyzer to store only the first 'N' characters of a frame or
block. The value for 'N' can be 1 to 255. Error information on all frames is edways stored.
Capture is for synchronous protocols only.
BERT
To execute BERT tests, perform the correct hookup and setup, and then press |jj|3ai in the
run menu to execute (see Chapter 10, "The BERT Menu").
The Run Menu 8-5
Displaying Data
Use the 'Display* field in the setup menu to change the display format. The six display formats
are:
DTE DTE data only. Displayed in regular video.
DCE DCE data only. Displayed in inverse video.
Two Line DTE over DCE. DCE data is displayed in inverse video.
Data & State DTE over DCE data, and timing diagrams of four interface leads.
Packet Decodes X.25 level 3 information.
Frame Decodes the frames of bit-oriented protocols.
Full Duplex and Half Duplex Data
On half duplex data, the HP 4952A displays complete DTE messages alternating with
complete DCE messages. On full duplex data, the HP 4952A displays the individual
characters in the order which corresponds closely to the timing order in which they are
received. To see the actual order, use cursor timing in the examine data menu.
Blinking Characters
Blinking characters indicate failed error checks: BCC, FCS, parity, or framing errors
resulting from incorrect setup or loss of synchronization.
8-6 The Run Menu
Run-Time Messages
Messages shown at the bottom of the display durmg run-time are:
EJil <> Buf = n Prg = n
IJiflsl
Hex/Text
Pressing |||^| converts all subsequent displayed data to hex format. The softkey label then
changes to HggQI for changing the display back to the current data code.
Stop Display/Start Display
TheEESBE l alternates with ^J.UJiifelJ . lAl.l.lilH.l freezes the display, and
Isi^UJBsl causes the most recent incoming data to be displayed. These do not affect the
run, but the continuity of the run-time display may be lost. This softkey works identically to
the 'start/stop display* statements in the monitor and simulate menus.
Buf = n
Message indicating which 2 kbyte block of memory (1 to 16) is being displayed. When
memory wraparound occurs, the next 2 kbyte block to be loaded becomes Block 1. When
viewing the buffer after run-time with examine data, the oldest data becomes Block 1. In the
examine data menu, block numbers may go as high as 304 if the buffer data has been loaded
from disc (or 384 if loaded from the extended capture buffer).
Prg = n
Message indicating which monitor or simulate menu block is currently executing. This can tell
you when the program is locked up or when the analyzer is looking for a trigger event. It may
flash very rapidly.
Summary/Data Display
These alternate to show either the data display or the setup summary. Press EWBH^ without
affecting the run, to review the current setup and observe the counters and timers. The
summary tracks the current setup menu. Press 1>HJ;1»IIJS1 to return to the data screen.
The timers and counters display is updated at least twice per second.
The Run Menu 8-7
Exploding Diamond (<>)
Symbol indicating data is being processed.
No Pod Attached
An interface pod must be attached in order to run BERT, Auto Configure, Simulation, and
Monitor on-line. No pod is necessary to Monitor the Buffer.
Buffer Overflow
Data has filled the buffer (16 blocks or optionally 384 blocks) and will begin to overwrite data
that has not yet been processed.
Receiver Overrun
The hardware capability to process serial input is being exceeded.
Invalid Monitor/Simulate Menu
This occurs because of incomplete 'when', 'if, 'send' or 'message' statements. For example,
if you do not finish the statement 'When DTE'.
8-8 The Run Menu
The Examine Data Menu
Introduction
Viewing the Buffer
Examine Data Menu Features
Examine Data Menu Softkeys
Displaying Data
More On Cursor Timing
Examine Data Error Messages
The Examine Data Menu 9-1
Introduction
The HP 4952A is equipped with internal memory. This 32 Kbyte memory buffer loads
continually when monitoring a line. When the memory capacity is reached the new data
overwrites the oldest data.
An optional 768 Kbytes extended memory board is also available.
Viewing the Buffer
Press I^^QgQj on the Top Level Menu to look at the buffer contents. Notice how this is
different from viewing while in the run mode, monitoring on-line, monitoring from the buffer,
or simulating. In all of these, you are looking at the buffer during run-time. You can stop the
display, but you cannot go backward. The Examine Data Menu lets you scroll through the
entire buffer.
Most line activity is stored in the buffer. This is what makes it possible for the HP 4952A to
post-process data from the buffer. The following items are stored:
■ DTE and DCE characters
■ Lead changes on the five interface leads. Select Data and State display format or use
the highlight feature in the Monitor and Simulate Menus
■ Errors, such as parity, BCC, and PCS
■ Time marks and lead status
i-iow the Buffer is Loaded
The buffer is continually being loaded with data when monitoring on-line or simulating. The
buffer can also be loaded from a 3 1/2 inch microfloppy disc or by remote. If it is a controller
it can download data or as a slave upload data. This gives you several alternatives on storing
data and recaUing it later or capturing new data and evaluating it in great detail.
9-2 The Examine Data Menu
Examine Data Menu Features
Viewing Timers and Counters After a Run
The examine data menu lets you look at the final state of the timers and counters after a run
by pressing the H^^^SQQj softkey. The timers and counters aiQ reset if another run is
started, if l^gQ and I^^QQgQ]^ ^^^ pressed, or if data is loaded from disc or remote.
Viewing the Entire Buffer
During rim time you can stop the display and view the contents of the display buffer, but you
can't go back and look at what you've missed. The examine data menu lets you go back after a
run and scroll through the buffer.
Bit Shifting
If the framing is off because the sync characters are unknown, press QQQ^BI ^^ ^^^
Examine Data menu and realign the bits until the data becomes meaningful. Bit shifting is
only available when Character or Bisync protocols are selected.
Bit shifting is not available when:
■ Parity is selected; the softkey does not appear.
■ Suppressing any display data.
■ Data is selected to be MSB first.
Decoding Characters
Move the cursor to any character on the screen data. Lx)ok at the top border of the display
and observe the binary, hex, and octal equivalents of the data at the cursor. You can also see
the parity bit for any character and the number of positions the bits have been shifted.
Cursor Timing
Move the cursor to the starting event and press Q^QQ^ . Move the cursor to the ending
event and press I^BQQ • '^^^ time between the two events is shown at the top of the
display. You can make both positive and negative timing measurements.
The Examine Data Menu 9-3
Decoding High Level Protocols
If the data contains other higher level protocol information (e.g., ISO levels 4-7, or SNA),
the relevant fields can be read from the hex/octal/binary decoding at the top of the display.
Cursor Memory
The HP 4952A is equipped with a smart cursor. It remembers the location in data that it
represents. When the cursor has been placed in data it will remain in that position even if you
change menus and display formats.
Extended Memory Board (Option 02)
If your HP 4952A has the extended memory board. Option 02, the buffer is increased from
32 Kbytes to 768 Kbytes. During monitor or simulate execution, data is continuously loaded
into the entire 768 Kbyte buffer memory.
The standard 32 Kbyte buffer is a window into the 768 Kbyte extended buffer. You can view
only 32 Kbytes with the |S||!I1, ^SMSEM, IBIZEa, and 13^2^3 key.
Use the ■J»JH*IAI..lJi and ■aiJi^aJAIfU to see a different 32 Kbytes of the 768 Kbyte extended
buffer. When you use these keys, a bar at the bottom of the display shows approximately
where you are in the buffer.
You can also go to a specific block by pressing ESHgWaiiBW .
The 768 Kbytes on the extended capture buffer is volatile, so current data is lost when the
power is turned off. The standard 32 Kbyte buffer is nonvolatile.
9-4 The Examine Data Menu
Examine Data Menu Softkeys
The Examine Data Menu is a very versatile function within the HP 4952A. To accommodate
the extensive function set three layers of softkeys are embedded under the MORE key. If the
softkey function is not visible on the screen press MORE.
Hex/Text
The E^l and B^Q softkeys toggle between the two. If the current display is in text (Text is
default) the available softkey is ||^| . Press B^QI to display the data in the code selected in
the setup menu. Press U^l to display the data in hexadecimal.
When one of the selections has been made, it will not change until the softkey is pressed again.
Roll Up and Roll Down
Press ■riaiwiisM or I33EDSSSI to move the displayed data up or down one line at a time. You
can view up to 32 Kbytes, the current contents of the display buffer.
Next Page and Prev Page
The BBMEggHi and iSK^B^BBBI softkeys move from one screen-full of data to the next
immediate screen, either previous or successive. A page is one full screen of information.
Timer and Cntr
With the Ulu^i^JsliQIJ softkey you can at any time look at a summary of the setup parameters,
as well as the status of the timers and counters at the end of the last run.
Specify Block
The Q3S9SIEEE9 softkey lets you specify a particular 2 Kbyte block. The block number
indicates the first character's position in the buffer. Some buffer information, like time
marks, is not displayed, so WB!BB3Sgg| may cause the block number to jump by several
numbers. Buffer data loaded from disc may have block numbers as high as 308 (384 with the
Extended Capture Buffer).
The Examine Data Menu 9-5
Next Hilit
The liiQiiiEiiQI softkey in the monitor or simulate menus lets you mark trigger events. The
llSJ^miBQI softkey lets you move to the next highlighted event.
You may have to press D|^S||||^S|| in frame and in packet displays to get to the remaining
highlights.
Note Highlights are not retained when data is stored to disc.
Next Segment and Prev Segment
The IJtJIAJrfJ.ltBBBl and MlSBB^BBtSBSM softkeys appear when you have loaded a data file from
disc that is too large to be entirely contained in the buffer. With this feature you can examine
the disc like the buffer. These softkeys load either the next or the previous 16 Kbytes of data
from disc into the buffer for examination.
They also appear when the option memory is installed and greater than 32 Kbytes of data has
been captured.
Bit Shift
Press the QEEOBQI softkey and the entire data stream is shifted. If the displayed data is
unrecognizable you may have to use this softkey to find the correct framing of unknown
protocols.
This softkey appears only in character oriented setups. When either Character or Bisync
protocols are selected in the Setup Menu a field appears to suppress specific data, i.e., idles,
nulls, control character, etc. When any of the suppress options are turned on, bit shifting is
not available.
Bit shifting is not available if bit order is MSB first.
9-6 The Examine Data Menu
start Time and End Time
The QgQQQQS ^nd mfjUluS softkeys are used for cursor timing. To find the time interval
between two events in the buffer, move the cursor to the first event and press H^SQ^dai •
Then move the cursor to the second event and press Q[g|^^ . The time between the two
events is displayed at the top of the screen border.
Note To measure time with cursor timing or with 'start' and 'stop' timer statements
in the monitor and simulate menus, do not filter out timing information in
the run menu when collecting data.
Change Display
Press the W^BBgWi HgOHl softkey to change the display format.
Print Summary and Data
If you have an ASCII printer connected (see Chapter 13), you can print either the data display
or the setup summary by pressing the l'JJIii*<lliM or IJilttJiMHI softkeys.
To print data from the Examine Data Menu:
■ Place the cursor on the page you wish to begin printing.
■ Enter the number of pages you wish to print (up to 9999).
. Press EBaSSEI
To stop printing in the middle of the print cycle press EXIT.
The Examine Data l\1enu 9-7
Displaying Data
The same six display formats available during run-time are available in examine data. You can
change the display either by moving to the "display" field in the setup menu, or by pressing the
QlgQS|^3El i^ th^ examine data menu.
Two Line
DTE
DCE
Data and State
DTE over DCE. DCE data is displayed in inverse video
(see Figure 9-1).
DTE data only. Displayed in regular video (see Figure 9-2).
DCE data only, Displayed in inverse video (see Figure 9-3).
DTE over DCE data, and timing diagrams of four interface
leads (see Figure 9-4),
The Data & State display format does not show absolute
timing relationships of activity occurring on different lines.
Simultaneous events are not shown directly over each other
but are staggered across the display screen.
For example, in Figure 9-4, the top half of the display shows
CTS and DSR transitioning from low to high. CTS appears
to change before DSR. These transitions could be
simultaneous.
Frame
Packt
Use cursor timing to verify the time relationship of events
on different lines.
Decodes the frames of bit oriented protocols. X.25 packets
are also decoded at the top of the display when present. To
decode a particular packet, move the cursor up or down to
that particular frame. See the appendix for level 2 and 3
definitions (see Figure 9-5).
Decodes X.25 Level 3 packets. See the appendix for
definitions (see Figure 9-6).
9-8 The Examine Data Menu
lAWSr lAWl^ IftMl^
^^■^ ions*' <'-»M£1!^ ^wii5j>l^ <-^H
1AVa»6
^^■r.-.t. .f,-',t,i,t6M.>, . ^;.v,t'i-HV4 • ^l.f5^^^^fdkJ!j^ i h oa,-, ,,!^ ^H
¥j%¥,f,%Sj¥jE'iOi %%%f4^6%f&%%ml^
^m ^^^^
^^Mkmk-.^'^j%%, %¥.*^^ijr§|^ ^ft!iiJ^ ^M
%flili^ 1AlSa¥j%?<
^™ ^ A itr/6^^i*i%i; . m^iS'^ 1 *^ bteJ^ ^
%^Si%mll^ iA
Figure 9-1. Two Line Format
How Setup Affects Display
The display formats let you look at the data in different ways. Use the format which best
shows the aspect of interest.
Sometimes, you may need to change the display format in order to see the buffer data. For
example, if the buffer data consists entirely of lead transitions, you must use data and state
display format.
The Examine Data Menu 9-9
Blinking Cliaracters
Blinking characters indicate feiiled error checks: BCC, FCS, parity, or framing errors
resulting from incorrect setup or loss of synchronization.
^^■^Ti t - 9 uctctl - J".'!^^!
%%f4^ sir 1 ft S%%'4§<%§<iMM/6%ai3^ i ^Ml?
1 ft ai^i^ 1 ft i%%i%%»%f^5ii%%% mas^
^x%^^%%%lM%MMf 1 ft Ml? 1 ft Ml? < ftM%l
^^|m >--' 1 >.l p |{ I c .a r,|p a 01 >?|p >-> 4 -1" >: r . ' »
Figure 9-2. DTE Only
9-10 The Examine Data l\/lenu
ICE'* B'lrT « -'Tiii'daeiti ' m»x ' = c i
.»<* » 9 Octal ~ 38H
.Cn + rl
rol iBRoI iflftlextlPreviT:
Up pDo^'n^p^'ctge^oge^J
Figure 9-3. DCE Only
Figure 9-4. Data And State Format
The Examine Data IVIenu 9-11
^^■HJjjg^^^^S
^^^^^^^^^^^^'^^'""''"'"^^^B
TYPE
QD
MOD LCN PS 11 PR
Call Accept
00
8 00 1
v;i rt
8 90 1 8 '~^^H
Data
80
8 00 1 8 I
^^H ^'
n I't
M 1 - ^^H
75
V'1
^^^H
^^Bh€-. B Up y
Figure 9-5. Frame Only
Figure 9-6. Packet Format
9-12 The Examine Data Menu
More On Cursor Timing
Lead Changes
Timing on lead changes is exact to the resohition provided by the speed rate selection in the
setup menu.
Lead changes on the T and R lines (when an X.21 protocol is selected) are exceptions to the
above rule. Timing information for the T and R Unes is delayed 16 bit times from the
beginning of a steady state "1" or "0". Timing on these signals represents when the lead should
be recognized as a steady state "1" or "0", and not when the steady state signal began,
COP Send Strings
Data sent by the HP 4952A in character-oriented protocols (using send strings) has a two-bit
offset in the timing information. Each transmitted character actually begins two bit times after
the time reported by a cursor timing measurement.
Received COPs
Data received by the HP 4952A in character-oriented protocols is time stamped two bit times
after each character is completed. So the delay from the start of each character to its time
stamp is one character time plus two bit times.
The last character in a sync pattern has an added delay of one more character time. So the
delay from the start of the last sync character to its time stamp is two character times plus two
bit times.
The first character in a two character sync pattern has an added delay of still another character
time.
The Examine Data Menu 9-13
Bit-Oriented Protocols
Data in bit-oriented protocols is time stamped in the same way regardless of whether it is sent
or received by the HP 4952A.
The start flag time stamp has a delay equal to 26 bit times plus one bit time for each zero
automatically inserted in the bit stream of the first two characters following the start flag. A
zero is automatically inserted after a series of five consecutive ones.
The first byte (address) has a time stamp delay of 18 bit times plus one bit time for each zero
inserted during its own transmission or during the following byte. The result is that a cursor
timing measurement from the start flag to the first byte shows "time = 0.0 ms".
All other bytes, except the Frame Check Sequence (FCS), are time stamped 34 bit times after
they begin, plus one bit time for each zero inserted after any of these 34 bits.
The first byte of the FCS is time stamped 24 bit times after it begins plus one bit time for each
inserted zero. The second FCS character is time stamped 16 bit times after it begins plus one
bit time for each inserted zero.
The end flag time stamp has a delay of eight bit times.
Timing Resolution
Timing resolution is the smallest unit of measurement that can be timed at a given speed. The
following table gives the resolution for speed ranges, and a correction factor for exact
measurements. To get a more exact measurement, multiply the time measured by the
corresponding correction factor.
Factor
1.0107
1.0113
1.0132
1.0164
Speed
Resolution
50-2400
1.0 msec
3200 - 4800
0.5 msec
7200 - 9600
0.2 msec
12 k - 64 kbps
0.1 msec
9-14 The Examine Data Menu
Cursor Timing Limits
The maximum cursor time that can be measured before an overflow will occur is given in the
table below. To determine the maximum cursor time that can be measured, select the speed
(Bits/sec) and the corresponding maximum cursor time is given to the right in the table.
If an overflow does occur, you will have to use the Monitor menu timers and run from buffer
data.
Bits/sec Maximum Cursor Time
50 - 2400 66.24 seconds
3200 - 4800 33.14 seconds
7200 - 9600 13.28 seconds
12 k - 64 kbps 6.66 seconds
NotG At 64 kbps, full duplex data may be time stamped such that occasional
groups of two or three sequential characters appear to be simultaneous. This
has no accumulative effect.
The Effect Of the Data Filter Upon Timing
If the timing information is disabled (turned "off') in the data filter menu, then the cursor
timing feature operates normally with three exceptions.
1. The range within which measurements can be made is no longer 65,536 times the time
stamp resolution but, instead, is only 64 times the time stamp resolution.
The Examine Data Menu 9-15
2. The range in item 1 above is absolute, not relative. So for any given start point, the
total time before and after the start point is 64 times the resolution of the time
stamps. For example, if the speed rate is 2400 bps, then the resolution is 1
millisecond. If a measurement is started at point B (see figure below), then you can
only measure time up to point C or back to point A. The time between points A and
C would be 64 milliseconds. Note that if the start point is D, you can still only
measure time up to point C and back to point A.
SySySx This is sample data ExSySySx • • .
This is only an example. The actual points A and C are best determined in practice
by moving the end time, one cursor position at a time, imtil the resulting
measurement differs greatly from the previous result.
When the maximum range is exceeded, the result usually does not flash. Note that
long time intervals can still be calculated by knowing how many times the range or
boundary is crossed and then adjusting the result accordingly.
In any case, cursor timing is meant to be used only when timing information is
enabled. Timers in Monitor and Simulate menus do not work at all if the timing
information is disabled when data is captured.
Timing information should be disabled to retain the maximum amount of data in the
capture buffer, specially in low line use situations.
9-16 The Examine Data Menu
Examine Data Error Messages
No data in buffer - use exit key to exit
This occurs if the buffer is empty when you go to the Examine Data Menu. Monitor On-Line,
or load from the disc to fill the buffer.
No displayable data in buffer for the selected display format
This indicates that the buffer contains non-displayable data for the selected display format,
such as lead transitions in a format other than Data and State, or DTE data only with DCE
only format selected, or vice versa.
Disc removed during a read operation
When you remove the disc duruig a load operation, the buffer data is invalid. Use the EXIT
key to exit. Try loading the data again.
Disc read error: buffer data invalid
This may be caused by a broken disc controller, or by a worn out disc. Use the EXIT key to
exit. Try another disc to help isolate the problem.
End of valid data
When you scroll to the end of buffer data.
Start of valid data
When you scroll to the beginning of buffer data.
No more highlights
When you press the iSJ^IUUjyUQQI and there are no more highlights.
End of disc file
When you specify a block number beyond the last block on disc.
The Examine Data Menu 9-17
End of Data Segment
End of the current 16 blocks (32 Kl)ytes) of data.
Start of Data Segment
Start of the current 16 blocks (32 Kbytes) of data.
9-18 The Examine Data Menu
10
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
■ Definitions
■ BERT Menu Softkeys
■ BERT Menu Selections
■ Running a BERT Test
■ Data Screen Definitions
■ Compatibility With Other BERT Testers
■ DCEBERT
■ BERT Error Messages
■ Examples
■ Other Tests
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-1
Definitions
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) measure digital noise. Through the use of BERT tests you can
determine how often highs are erroneously changed to lows and vice versa. When in the
BERT menu the HP 4952A is configured as a DTE.
PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence)
A BERT tester generates pseudo random bit sequences from a shift register of length L,
where the sequence length equals 2^L - 1 bits. A PRBS may be of any length but certain
pattern lengths have become standard. The HP 4952A uses PRBS lengths of 63, 511, 2047, or
4095.
Bit Error Rate
The number of bit errors divided by the number of bits received.
Blocics
Bit error rate does not give any indication of error distribution. For example, if most errors
occur within a few moments of each other, it might indicate that the line was all right, but had
perhaps been affected by a lightning hit or path switch. For this reason, bits are grouped in
blocks for measuring block error rate , sometimes referred to as BLERT.
Note BERT blocks are not to be confused with blocks used in other HP 4952A
menus.
Block Error Rate
The number of block errors divided by the number of blocks received. Whether there is one
error or ten errors in a block, it is still counted as one block error.
Block Sizes
The Bell system uses a block size of 1000 bits. CCITT, the world-wide standard, uses a block
size equal to the pattern size. For example, if the PRBS pattern is 511 bits, then the block
size would also be 511 bits.
10-2 B'lt Error Rate Tests (BERT)
BERT Menu Softkeys
Press liHrAJiiiMtW on the Top Level Menu. The BERT Menu selections are shown on the
next page.
Pattern
Four PRBS pattern lengths are available: 4095, 2047, 511, and 63 bits.
Block Size
ThelOOO=bitblocksizeisusedintheU.SA. CCITT, the world wide standard, uses 511 and
2047-bit block sizes.
Duration
You can select the length of the test either as a time interval or as the number of bits sent.
For later comparison, test durations must be the same.
Bits/Sec
Notice the Bits/Sec selections are different from the other menus.
If the network clock is being supplied by the network or modem, select EXT for the speed.
Framing
Framing means that you send standard asynchronous characters with one start bit and two
stop bits. The frame size is equal to the start and stop bits plus an optional parity bit plus the
selected character size. To select framing, choose the size of the data character (5, 6, 7, or 8
bits). An optional parity bit may be added immediately after the data character, before the
two stop bits. Each frame alternates with an idle (high) time which is the same length as the
frame. If you don't want framing, press 1
Parity
If you select framing, three new softkey choices appear. You can select odd, even, or none.
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-3
BERT Menu Selections
Pattern
[ 4095 ]
[ 2047 ]
[ 511 ]
[ 63 ]
Block Size
[ 2047 bits ]
[ 1000 bits ]
[ 511 bits ]
Framin!
Duration
[ 10^4 ] [ 10^9
[ 10^5 ] [ 5 min
[ 10^6 ] [ 10 min
[ 10^7 ] [ 15 min
Parity
[ 10^8 ] [ Cont
[ None ]
[ 5 bits ]
[ 6 bits ]
[ 7 bits ]
[ 8 bits ]
[ None ]
[ Odd ]
[ Even ]
Bits/sec
[ 64000 ]
[ 56000 ]
[ 48000 ]
[ 38400 ]
[ 19200 ]
[ 14400 ]
[ 9600 ]
[ 7200 ]
[ 4800 ]
[ 3600 ]
[ 3200 ]
[ 2400 ]
[ 2000 ]
[ 1800 ]
[ 1200 ]
[ 600 ]
[ 300 ]
C 200 ]
[ 150 ]
[ 134.5 ]
[ 110 ]
[ 75 ]
[ 50 ]
[ EXT ]
Compatibility With the HP 4951 Protocol Analyzer
The following BERT menu entries are unique to the HP 4952A and are not supported on the
HP 4951 Protocol Analyzer.
4095 PRBS pattern length
38400, 4800, 56000, and 64000 bit per second
If you load an HP 4952A BERT menu into an HP 4951, either from disc or remote transfer,
the entries Usted above will be changed by the HP 4951 into different entries. These different
entries are impredictable.
10-4 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Running a BERT Test
After you have entered the test parameters in the BERT Menu, press |^Q2SB1 • ^^ the Run
Menu press QJSI •
Data Screen
When you press igQiU in the Run Menu, a run-time data screen continuously displays test
progress. The data screen shows:
■ Elapsed seconds (since synchronization)
■ Number of bits and blocks sent
■ Number of errors found
■ Number of errored seconds
Completion of a Test
When a receiving BERT tester receives all the bits required for the test, or when you press
EXIT, the receiver stops the test. The transmitter continues to transmit, ensuring that the
other receiver gets all needed test bits.
% Error-free Seconds
When the receiver is finished, or when you press EXIT, the % error-free seconds is
computed.
Exit Key
EXIT halts reception. Press EXIT again to return to the Top Level Menu.
Setup Summary
During a test, press i»WPIM to look at the setup parameters without stopping the test. To
change any of the setup parameters, stop the test by pressing EXIT twice and reenter the
BERT Menu.
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-5
Data Screen Definitions
Elapsed Seconds
Elapsed time since receiver synchronization,
Errored Seconds
Tells how many of the elapsed seconds had error occurrences.
% Error-Free Seconds
Errored Seconds divided by Elapsed Seconds. Displayed at the end of the test.
Block Count
Tells how many blocks have been sent thus far in the test.
Block Errors
Tells how many blocks had at least one error. Divide block errors by block count to get Block
Error Rate.
Bit Count
The number of actual data bits sent since synchronization (excluding framing, start, stop, and
parity bits).
Bit Errors
Divide bit errors by bit count to get Bit Error Rate.
10-6 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Inject Error
Press |QQ§QQQ||^3 at any time during the test. The receiver at the other end should indicate
one bit error. This function can be used at the beginning of the test to check for proper
hookup.
Inject 10 Errors
Press QI^QBQQQI to send a burst of errors. The receiver at the other end should have
counted ten bit errors, one or two block errors, and one or two errored seconds.
Compatibility With Other BERT Testers
Synchronization
Unless the BERT receiver is synchronized to the transmitter at the other end, the receiver has
no way of knowing whether the next bit in the received PRBS pattern is correct. You should
use BERT testers equivalent to the HP 4925B which have the following characteristics:
1. For unframed patterns, the speed of the clock generating the transmitter pattern must
be within 1% of the clock generating the receiver pattern.
2. With framing, the clocks should be within 5% of each other.
Handshaking
For BERT testing, the HP 4952A simulates a DTE. At the beginning of the test the HP
4952A sets the RTS and DTR interface leads on. For RS-449 interfaces, it sets RS and DS
on.
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-7
DCE BERT
This application enables the HP 4952A to function as a DCE while running Bit Error Rate
Tests. The standard instrument can function as a DTE, but not a DCE. With this appUcation
loaded the HP 4952A emulates a DCE by transmitting and receiving PRBS patterns and
appropriate clocks for asynchronous, synchronous, and isochronous links.
This application is suppUed on the Utility disc that was shipped with the standard instrument.
Loading The Application
Note This appUcation cannot be used concurrently with other apphcations.
Load the Utility Disc into the HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer.
1. From the Top Level Menu, press MORE, and then press |2|^g|g^9 .
2. Move the cursor to the DCE_BERT selection, press |^^ and then press B^^SirHI
The DCE BERT appUcation will be loaded.
10-8 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
DCE BERT Setup
The DCE BERT Setup menu is in the second level softkeys.
■ Press MORE in the Top Level Menu; a new softkey appears.
■ Press isigsjisiljl and use the setup menu to make the proper settings to run the DCE
BERT apphcation.
Note Do not use the BERT Menu in the Top Level Menu to make setups for DCE
BERT operation. The BERT menu on the standard instrument is for DTE
BERT operation.
DCE BERT can be rim in three modes:
■ Asynchronous
■ Synchronous
■ Isochronous
Note The HP 4952A may be set in either an end-to-end or a single unit loopback
configuration.
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-9
Asynchronous
DCE BERT Setup Menu
Mode:
Bits/sec:
Framing:
Parity:
PRBS Pattern:
Block Size:
Test Duration:
1200
7 bits
Odd
511
1000
15 MIN
Figure 10-1. Asynchronous Screen Selections
The asynchronous menu selections are:
Bits/sec
[ 19200 ]
[ 2400 ]
[ 200 ]
Framing
[ 5 bit ]
Parity
[ None ]
PRBS Pattern
[ 4095 ]
Block Size
[ 1000 ]
[ 9600 ]
[ 2000 ]
[ 150 ]
[ 64K ]
[ 6 bit ]
[ Even ]
[ 2047 ]
[ 511 ]
Test Duration
[ 10^4 ] [ 10^5 ]
[ 5 Min ] [10 Min ]
[ 7200 ]
C 1800 ]
[ 134.5]
[ 56K ]
[ 7 bit ]
[ Odd ]
[ 511 ]
[ 2047 ]
[ 10^6 ]
[15 Min ]
[ 4800 3
[ 1200 ]
[ 110 ]
[ 48K ]
[ 8 bit ]
[ 63 3
[ 10^7 3
[ Cont 3
[ 3600 3
[ 600 3
[ 75 3
[ 38. 4K 3
[ None 3
[ 10^8 3
[ 3200 3
[ 300 3
[ 50 3
[ 14. 4K ]
[ 10^9 3
10-10 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Synchronous
DCE BERT Setup Menu
Mode:
DTE data clocked by:
DCE data clocked by:
Bits/sec:
PRBS Pattern:
Block Size:
Test Duration:
511
1000
15 MIN
Figure 10-2. Synchronous Screen Selections
The Synchronous Menu Selections are:
DTE data clocked by: [DCE INTERNAL] [DTE EXTERNAL]
Bits/sec
[ 19200 ]
[
9600
]
[
7200 ]
[
4800 ]
[ 3600 ]
[ 3200 ]
[ 2400 ]
[
2000
]
[
1800 ]
[
1200 ]
[ 600 ]
[ 300 ]
[ 200 ]
[
150
]
[
134.5]
[
110 ]
[ 75 ]
[ 50 ]
[
64K
]
[
56K ]
[
48K ]
[ 38. 4K ]
[ 14. 4K ]
PRBS Pattern
[ 4095 ]
[
2047
]
[
511 ]
[
63 ]
Block Size
[ 1000 ]
[
511
]
[
2047 ]
Test Duration
[ 10^4 ]
[
10^5
]
[
10^6 ]
[
10^7 ]
[ 10^8 ]
[ 10-9 ]
[ 5 Min ]
[10 Min
]
[15 Min ]
[
Cont ]
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-11
Isochronous
Isochronous transmission is asynchronous data with an internal XI clock.
DCE BERT Setup Menu
Mode:
DTE data clocked by:
DCE data clocked by:
Bits/sec:
Framing:
Parity
■BSTM
DCE
1
PRBS Pattern:
Block Size:
Test Duration:
511 ■
1000 1
15 MIN
1
gQUQ E|^2B BB H jOEB [^3
Hi W/M HI HI aHil laaBS
Figure 10-3. Isochronous Screen Selections
The Isochronous Menu Selections are:
DTE data clocked by:
Bits/ sec
t 19200 ]
[ 2400 ]
[ 200 ]
Framing
[ 5 bit ]
Parity
t None ]
PRBS Pattern
[ 4095 ]
Block Size
[ 1000 ]
[ 9600 ]
[ 2000 ]
[ 150 ]
[ 64K ]
[ 6 bit ]
[ Even ]
[ 2047 ]
[ 511 ]
[DCE INTERNAL]
[ 7200 ]
[ 1800 ]
[ 134.5]
[ 56K ]
[DTE EXTERNAL]
[ 4800 ]
[ 1200 ]
[ 110 ]
[ 48K ]
[ 3600 ]
[ 600 ]
[ 75 ]
[ 38. 4K ]
[ 3200 ]
[ 300 ]
[ 50 ]
[ 14. 4K ]
[ 7 bit ] [ 8 bit ]
[ Odd ]
[ 511 ] [ 63 ]
[ 2047 ]
Test Duration
[ 10"4 ] [ 10"5 ]
[ 5 Min ] [10 Min ]
[ 10"6 ]
[15 Min ]
[ 10^7 ]
[ Cont ]
[ 10"8 ]
[ 10"9 ]
10-12 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
BERT Error Messages
Bad Data - Cannot Sync
Indicates that incoming data does not match selected pattern. Could be either lots of line
errors, wrong speed selected, or wrong pattern selected.
Data Error - Sync Lost
Indicated that sync was lost after start of text. Could be either line going bad, or tester
changed on other end of the line.
No Data Present
Non framed cases - indicates all I's coming in. Framed cases - indicates no character being
received.
Clock Slipped During Run
Corrupt data received. A portion of the bit stream was lost.
Sync Lost One or More Times
A Data Error - Sync Lost error has occurred more than once.
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-13
Examples
Example 1 : End-to-End Testing
Two BERT testers are connected to opposite ends of the line. Each BERT tester contains
both a transmitter and a receiver, making it possible to check both send and receive channels
simultaneously. The transmitter at each end is essentially a PRBS generator; the receivers are
pattern checkers.
HP 4952
O
POD
HP 4952
^
MODEM
O
C
POD
^
MODEM
-L
J
endtoend
Figure 10-4. End-to-End Testing
10-14 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
Example 2: Loopback Testing
If you have only one BERT tester, you can loop back at the other end. The BERT tester
sends on one channel, and receive its own transmission on the other channel. Remember, if
you loop back, you will be adding together the errors on both the send and receive channels:
one channel may contain many more errors than the other channel.
HP 4952
O
POD
MODEM
z
c
^
External/Internal
Loopback
Analog Line
V— External/Internal
\ Loopback / I
C
MODEM
loopback
Figure 10-5. Loopback Testing
Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT) 10-15
other Tests
Some BERT testers (such as the HP 4925B) perform the following character error checking
besides BERT tests.
Quick Brown Fox Tests
The 'Quick Brown Fox* message (or any message) tests the abiUty of terminals to receive
messages. Use the Simulate Menu in the HP 4952A to run this test.
Startup Tests
The HP 4952A does many types of start-up tests, such as RTS - CTS delay (see Chapter 16,
exzunples 9 and 10 for more on End-to-End testing).
10-16 Bit Error Rate Tests (BERT)
The Remote Menu
11
Introduction
Remote Setup
Remote Operations
Remote Menu
Modem Operations
Tape To Disc File Transfer
Remote Status Messages
The Remote Menu 11-1
Introduction
The HP 4952A can be used on a remote site and is capable of unattended operation. Tliis
capability enables unmanned data gathering or control. Once a remote analyzer is set up a
controlling instrument, an HP 4952A or any other HP protocol analyzer, can send instructions,
applications, and menus and receive data for later evaluation.
The Remote Menu is used to configure two Hewlett-Packard protocol analyzers together to
communicate and test a remote data line. Within the menu are submenus to configure one
analyzer as a controller and one as a slave.
Remote Setup
Remote operation demands that two protocol analyzers be physically linked together. This
can be accomplished through asynchronous modems or, v^thout modems, using a modem
eliminator cable. Each connection is made using the REMOTE/PRINTER connector on the
rear panel.
When the two analyzers are connected:
■ Configure each analyzer, one as the controller and one as the slave.
Note Make sure the instrument designated as the slave is configured in the slave
menu. If it was mistakenly configured in the controller menu no remote
communication is possible.
■ Set the data rate of each instrument the same and slave address if the slave is an HP
4953A.
■ Press EXIT two times to place the slave in the Top Level Menu.
■ Proceed with remote operation.
11-2 The Remote Menu
Remote Operations
The HP 4952A can receive and transmit menus, applications, and buffer data remotely to
another HP protocol analyzer. When used as a slave at a remote site the HP 4952A is capable
of unattended operation.
Resetting To Top Level
Many operations cannot be executed unless the slave is in the Top Level Menu. To put the
slave in the Top Level Menu you must reset the slave:
■ Execute the |^g3|QQSg| command from the controller while it is connected to the
Slave.
■ Or press EXIT on the slave keyboard until the Top Level Menu screen appears on
the Slave.
Lockout Slave's Keyboard
Keyboard locking is automatic with an HP 4952A as a slave. All operations except 'slave's
status', 'identify slave', and 'reset slave' require the keyboard to be locked. To lockout the
keyboard, the slave must be in the Top Level Menu.
Ending Remote Operations
To stop execution of any remote operation, press EXIT on the controller to return to the
remote menu. This will abort the current slave operation immediately. The operation may
not complete.
Remote Restrictions
The slave HP 4952A cannot be in the Setup menu when it is uploading menus to a controller.
Monitor and Simulate programs with 'message' statements cannot be uploaded to an HP 4951,
HP 4953 or HP 4955 without corrupting the controller menus.
The Remote Menu 11-3
Uploading Monitor and Simulate programs with 'when softkey*, *gosub', and 'return'
statements will cause a non-HP 4952A controller to see trigger in and trigger out statements.
These can be transferred back to the HP 4952A without losing the original statements (except
to an HP 4953A).
"CCITT Set Os" error check selection can only be transferred to another HP 4952A.
X.21 menus can only be transferred to another HP 4952A.
The monosync mode selection can only be transferred to another HP 4952A.
Controller operations without a valid slave response will abort:
■ After 24 seconds above 300 baud (three retries of eight seconds each).
■ After 48 seconds at or below 300 baud (three retries of sixteen seconds each).
■ After three CRC errors.
Extended menus lets you save remote and printer setup menus as well as BERT test results.
Extended menus can not be transferred by remote. X.21 menus (or externally clocked NRZI)
must be saved by extended menus.
Remote Data Transfer
There are two basic data transfer operations:
■ Transfer from controller to slave (download)
■ Transfer from slave to controller (upload)
As a Controller, the HP 4952A can download menus, applications, and data to the slave or
receive uploaded information from the slave.
Data transfer can be accompUshed with or without an extended capture buffer. Either the
controller or the slave may or may not have an ECB and the data flow will be performed.
11-4 The Remote Menu
upload
Controller
Download
Figure 11-1. Data Transfer
Download Applications
A controller displays the current block number being transferred. The size of an application is
Usted in sectors in the directory. To equate the two, one block equals 8 sectors.
To download an appUcation from a controller:
1. Load the appUcation you want to transfer and return to the Top Level Menu.
2. Press MORE and press I^Q^QQQ to access the Remote Menu.
3. Configure the controller menu by setting the Bits/sec, Modem String, and select an
operation.
4. Configure the slave menu by setting the slave address. Bits/sec and Modem String
and return the slave to the Top Level Menu.
5. Press QQQQSSI (download application).
NotG Every time a command is selected in the Remote Menu you must press
1^^313 telling the controller to begin the operation.
The Remote Menu 11-5
6. Press |^Q3I^9 • The analyzer will display the results of the command, e.g., Operation
successful.
Download Menu
To download a menu from a controller:
1. Load the menu you want to transfer and return to the Top Level Menu.
2. Go to the Run Menu and select the operation that you will be doing by Remote.
Execute Run Monitor or Run Simulate and return to the Top Level Menu. This will
set an internal flag that dictates the operation when Q^BSQl is pressed in the
controller menu.
3. Press MORE and press |^QgQQSQ| to access the Remote Menu.
4. Configure the controller menu by setting the Bits/sec, Modem String (if desired), and
select an operation.
5. Configure the slave menu by setting the slave address. Bits/sec and Modem String.
6. Return the slave to the Top Level Menu. Press the EXIT key on the slave keyboard
until the Top Level Menu screen appears.
7. Press IZEEBISBl (download menu).
Note Every time a command is selected in the Remote Menu you must press
MS^HSWa telling the controller to begin the operation.
8. Press ESS3 • The analyzer will display the results, e.g., operation successful.
Download Data
A controller displays the current block number being transferred. The size of a data block is
Usted in sectors. To equate the two, one block equals 8 sectors.
11-6 The Remote Menu
To download data from a controller:
1. Load the data you want to transfer and return to the Top Level Menu.
2. Press MORE and press IrlJuMJJJJJBia to access the Remote Menu.
3. Configure the controller menu by setting the Bits/sec, Modem String (if desired), and
select an operation.
4. Configure the slave menu by setting the slave address, Bits/sec and Modem String.
5. Return the slave to the Top Level Menu.
6. Press liBBl^Hai (download data).
Not8 Every time a command is selected in the Remote Menu you must press
B3BHgB^ telling the controller to begin the operation.
7. Press E^SQI. The analyzer will display the results, e.g.. Operation successful.
Upload to Controller
When operating protocol analyzers in the remote mode, a logical sequence is download a
menu to a slave, instruct the slave analyzer to capture data, tell the slave to transmit all
captured data up to the controller for evaluation.
A slave can upload applications, menus, and data. The most common occurence will be
uploading data to the controller for evaluation in the Examine Data menu.
When data is uploaded you must specify the slave's blocks to be transferred. The slave will
reject transfer requests that are not within the range of its buffer, 384 blocks with an ECB and
16 blocks without an ECB. The slave will also reject requests for negative or blocks.
The controller will place the received blocks of data in the corresponding controller blocks.
Data in the controller buffer is overwritten when uploading data from a slave.
The Remote Menu 11-7
Controller Menu
Bits/Sec ||££^i]
Modem HHHHlHIil
1
!
Start Blk# ■! End Blk# U
S^E BEffi ^9 SDE IQE H
2^Q iJyV] Baal 2Q ^Q
im
Figure 11-2. Controller Setup Menu
If the currently displayed block of data is not within the range of specified uploaded blocks,
you will not be viewing the new data. Use the E^H^KHSHM softkey to specify a block within
the range of uploaded data to view.
To upload data from a slave:
1. Press the desired upload operation from the controller menu. The available upload
selections are HBBWJffJW (upload application), lIBlfJlAgiffl (upload menu), and
rtriri'nfl (upload data).
2. Select the desired blocks to upload. The menu field is a three digit field, you must
enter all three digits. For example: enter 0,0,1.
NotG Every time a command is selected in the Remote Menu you must press
i^SHSW^ telling the controller to perform the function.
3. Press Q^SSI- The analyzer will display the results, e.g., Operation successful.
4. Press EXIT two times and then press ISf^lBlSCTBl . If you are not viewing uploaded
data, use BSBHMHlt.HM to go to the correct data.
11-8 The Remote Menu
Controller Softkeys
The controller sends the commands to the slave. Each command is softkey driven.
ID Slave
The slave transmits its model number. This is often performed to test for proper remote
communication.
Slave Status
Requests the slave to transmit its current menu and error status to the controller. Tells what
the slave is doing.
Execute Run
Executes the slave's run menu. The operation executed is the last operation that was run on
the slave or the last operation set up on the slave.
Reset Slave
Stops slave execution and resets the slave to its Top Level Menu.
Timers and Counter
The slave transmits the status of its timers and counters. This is an upload function only.
Lock Keyboard
The slave's keyboard becomes inoperable. This is necessary before executing all operations
except 'slave status', 'identify slave', and 'reset slave'. Lock keyboard is performed
automatically on HP 4952As functioning as a slave.
Enable Keyboard
After a 'lock keyboard' operation, this operation is necessary to restore the slave's keyboard.
This may be necessary if a menu, data, or appUcation transfer is aborted by the controller.
The Remote Menu 11-9
Run Application
Loads the application that is currently resident in the slave into application memory. Use
Execute Run to execute the application.
Download Application
Transmits the currently active application program from the controller's application memory
to the slave. To execute the apphcation on the slave, use |3
Upload Application
Receives the current application program from the slave's application memory and executes it
on the controller.
Download Menu
Transmits the setup, monitor, simulate, and run menus to the slave.
Delete Application
Deletes the current apphcation in the slave's apphcation memory.
Download Data
Transmits test results from the controller buffer to the slave.
Upload Data
Receives buffer data from the slave. You must specify the correct block limits in the slave.
Remote BERT
When lillJJiilJrAJ (Execute BERT menu) is selected as the operation, the slave's BERT
menu is executed. Use 'download menus' to change the slave's BERT menu. The slave must
be in the Top Level Menu and must be an HP 4952A.
When QJSBSSi (Upload BERT stats) is selected as the operation, the BERT statistics are
sent from the slave to the controller. Either the current statistics if BERT is running, or the
last statistics if the slave is in the Top Level Menu. After the statistics have been uploaded you
can print them from the BERT menu. It is not possible to view percent error free seconds,
but it can still be calculated.
11-10 The Remote Menu
Remote Menu - Controller Configuration
Bits/sec
[ 19200 1
[ 600 ]
[ 9600 ]
[ 300 ]
[ 4800 ]
[ 200 ]
[ 2400 ]
[ 1200 ]
Modem String [ use keyix>ard to enter hex or text characters ]
Operation
[ ID Slave ]
[ Slave Status ]
[ Execute Run ]
[ Timers & Ctrs ]
[ Enable Keybd ]
[ Downld Applic ]
[ Downld Menus ]
[ Delete Applic ]
[ Upld Data ]
[ Exec BERT
[ BERT Stat
[ Halt Slave
[Lock Keyboard
[ Run Appl
[ Upld Applic
[Upld Menus
[ Downld Data
Start Blk # [ ]
End Blk # [ ]
Remote Menu - Slave Configuration
Slave Addr [ use keyboard to enter decimal characters ]
(00-15)
Bits/sec [ 19200 ] [ 9600 ] [ 4800 ] [ 2400 ] [ 1200 ]
[ 600 ] [ 300 ] [ 200 ] [ Save Cnfg ]
Modem String [ use keyboard to enter hex or text characters ]
The Remote Menu 11-11
Modem Operations
Note Only asynchronous modems can be used for remote transfers.
Modem Strings
The modem string field in the controller and slave menus enables you to configure the
modem. For example, with a Hayes Smart Modem, you might enter ATDT9„5551212. Press
IjlJtMrf.liffil to send the controlling string to the modem.
Modem Handshaking
In remote operations, the HP 4952A is configured as a DTE. The following handshaking
convention is used.
1. DTR is turned on when you press |^^V|Q . The HP 4952A then waits for DSR to
go on.
2. The HP 4952A then sets RTS on and waits for CTS and CD to go on.
3. The "modem string" field is for configuring the modem.
Operations Without Modems
The HP 4952A is configured as a DTE for remote operations. If two units are connected
directly without modems, one unit must be configured as a DCE.
For applications with no modem, use a modem eliminator cable such as the RS-232C/V.24
printer cable M/M (HP 13242G). You may also open all the breakout switches except pin 7
on one of the pods, and jumper the following pins: 2 to 3, 4 to 8, and 5 to 6 to 20.
11-12 The Remote Menu
Remote X.25 Packet Switched Network
An X.25 Packet Switched Network can be used to transmit data instead of modems. The
restrictions on this operation are:
■ X.25 PADs are configured to be transparent to data, i.e., no additional processing of
data, no messages sent back to the HP 4952A. You must estabUsh a Permanent
Virtual Circuit between the two analyzers for the duration of the data transfer. When
the network connection is estabUshed you can upload data from the slave.
■ The controller must receive a response from the slave for each operation within 24
seconds or it will abort. Excessive propogation will prohibit remote communications
due to the instrument timeout.
Tape To Disc File Transfer
If you have menus or data files that are stored on tape cassette from an HP 495 lA or HP
4951B, you can remotely transfer these file to the HP 4952A and store them on disc.
General Procedure
To transfer files from tape to disc:
■ Connect the tape-based and disc-based analyzers together through the remote ports
or interface pods.
■ On the tape-based analyzer load the desired file from tape into the buffer.
■ Remotely transfer the data or menus to the disc-based analyzer using the Remote
menu.
■ On the disc-based analyzer store the file to disc.
The Remote Menu 11-13
Remote Status Messages
Application Cannot be Run on 4952
Invalid application for the HP 4952. Select another model protocol analyzer and proceed.
Application Already Loaded
The application is already loaded in slave memory.
Invalid Application for 4952
Application cannot be run on the HP 4952.
Menus Incompatible with 4952
Communication between different protocol analyzers cannot be accomplished.
Must Reset Slave First
Press IrlS^M^BM before continuing.
Must Reset Slave to Top Level
Slave must be in the Top Level to continue operation.
No Data in Buffer
There is no data in the buffer to be transferred.
No Application Resident
The desired application cannot be run. Load appUcation and continue.
Reset Slave and Retry Operation
Slave must be reset to continue.
11-14 The Remote Menu
12
Mass Storage
■ Introduction
■ The Mass Store Menu
■ Loading From Disc
■ Storing To Disc
■ The Extended Memory Board (Option 002)
■ The RAM Disc
■ Using the Extended Capture Buffer (ECB)
■ Memory Blocks and Disc Sectors
■ The Disc Drive
■ The Copy Disc Utihty
Mass Storage 12-1
Introduction
The HP 4952A has two mass storage devices: a disc drive and a 32 Kbyte buffer. Also
available is an optional 768 Kbyte Extended Memory Plus memory board (Option 002).
The Disc Drive
The disc drive provides 613 Kbytes of usable storage per disc.
■ You can load (read) data and menus from the disc.
■ You can store (write) data and menus to the disc.
■ Several types of files are possible: data only, menus only, extended menus only,
menus and data, or application programs. Thus, you can load or store the menu
setups that were originally used to capture the data right along with the data.
■ The 3 1/2 inch flexible disc provides a convenient method of saving and transporting
information.
■ Use 'start' and 'stop' disc commands in the monitor and simulate menus to
continuously and selectively store data on the disc while running.
■ If you don't have the optional memory board, you can use the |2|^^^^^| and
I^^^^SQ in the examine data menu to scroll through data files that are too large
to be completely loaded into the 32 ICbyte buffer.
The Optional Extended Memory Plus Memory Board (Option 002)
The optional memory board significantly increases the capability of the HP 4952A.
■ The optional memory board contains 768 Kbytes of volatile data storage. Operation
is essentially transparent to the user.
■ In addition to the 768 Kbyte extended capture buffer, the optional memory board
also contains 128 Kbytes of nonvolatile RAM disc for storing menus, extended
menus, and application programs. The RAM disc is selected with the |2S3EEESSI •
Operation is then essentially the same as using microfloppy discs.
12-2 Mass Storage
The Mass Store Menu
The Mass Store Menu is used for operations with the disc and optional memory board. The
following softkeys appear when you press |2QgQ^Q in the Top Level Menu:
MSD= Dir Load Store Del- Re- MORE
RAM
Del-
Re-
ete
cover
Re-
Print
name
Dir
For Pack Re- Print MORE
mat Disc
MSD=RAM
The BS3B3EISI ^^d IJJgliUjjim softkeys alternate. Press this softkey to select the mass store
device, either the microfloppy disc or the 128 Kbyte RAM disc on the optional memory board.
When the selected mass store device is the RAM disc, the |SQS39 softkey is available.
ISISB3S2I appears only when the Optional Memory Board is present. Space available on the
option memory bozird will show 126 Kbytes when empty.
Directory
The directory I^Qj operation hsts the disc contents, giving File Name, File Type, and a
Comment field. Six file types are possible.
Data Buffer data only.
Menu Consists of menus only (setup, monitor, simulate, BERT).
Menu & Data Both buffer data and menus (setup, monitor, simulate, BERT),
Ext Menu Consists of the same menus as the "menu" type, plus remote, printer,
filter, and BERT results. Also stores menus which have External NRZI
or X.21 protocols selected.
Applic Progm Only HP 4952A appUcation files can be loaded.
Undefined This type of file indicates either that the appUcation supporting this
filetype is not loaded on the HP 4952A, or that the undefined file is from
some other non-supported instriunent.
Mass Storage 12-3
NotG Identical file names may coexist if the file types are different. Undefined
files cannot be restored or renamed once they have been deleted.
The cursor keys can be used to scroll through the files on the directory.
Format
Pressing the QEE^i ^^Y ^^^ ||S^Q9 ^^y initializes the disc, erases the disc directory, and
places a new format on every track of the disc. Use this softkey to erase an entire disc and
initialize new discs. The formatting process takes about 45 seconds.
The discs can be read by an HP series 200 computer but discs formatted in a series 200 cannot
be written to during run-time on an HP 4952A.
Load
Pressing the ||^>| key and key and BBgHlffil key effects a read-from-disc and write-to-RAM
action. When the disc drive is being accessed the yellow indicator light is on.
File names may be entered from the keyboard or by moving the cursor to the file name before
pressing the |^^| softkey.
Store
Pressing the ISHBBi key and then i^HWtS causes a read-from-RAM write-to-disc action.
When the disc drive is being accessed the yellow indicator light is on.
File names may be entered from the keyboard or by moving the cursor to a file in the directory
before pressing QQQ and then modifying the name. File type must be specified. An
optional comment field is provided to aid identification of the file.
Caution Any fiile marked DEL in the directory can be overwritten by the store
function and is therefore not recoverable.
12-4 Mass Storage
Delete
Pressing the |^QgQg| key and Q^SIQ key marks files for removal from the disc. The ^e is
marked for deletion in the directory (a Del in the right most columns) but is actually not
deleted until lJ»f«iM»HiM and B3^HHM is pressed.
To delete all files on a disc, mark each file for deletion and press QQJQjQ and EQ^QQI ^^
press ISQjQ HQ^Og and reinitialize the disc. If a disc is full with one (or few) files the
fastest way to delete the contents of the disc is press |^Q^9 , I^^QQ , Ij^JJj^^^ ,
File names may be entered from the keyboard or by scrolling to the file name using the cursor
arrow keys before pressing the |3bDS3 key and then modifying the name.
CSUtion Undefined files can not be restored or renamed once they have been deleted.
Recover
Pressing the l^g^SE^B ^^^ Q]§3S3 softkeys allows files marked for removal from the disc to
be 'restored' as valid active files in the directory. Only files created on a HP 4951C or HP
4952A disc series protocol analyzer may be recovered.
Enter each filename from the keyboard or by scrolling to the filename using the cursor arrow
keys before pressing the |^^Q|| key and then the I^Q^Q^Q key and modifying the name.
This can only be done before the disc has been packed. Undefined files cannot be recovered.
Pack Disc
Pressing the lJif«M»IMgi softkey and then PHWB^ rearranges the files on the disc to
accommodate lost space due to deleted files or when run-time files are created.
This process allows you to regain disc space and use the disc more efficiently.
Caution Once the pack disc operation has been completed there is no way to recover
the purged files.
Mass Storage 12-5
Rename
Pressing the ^^HiB^lHi and IJ^HUgi softkeys allow you to rename a file or change the
comment associated with a file. Undefined files cannot be renamed.
Print Directory
Pressing the I3BB3I30 ^^^ ISS3S3 softkeys allow you to print the directory if an ASCII
printer is connected.
Note When a Mass Store operation results in an error message, remove the disc
and reinsert it before attempting additional disc operations.
12-6 Mass Storage
Loading From Disc
To load data from the disc:
■ Insert the disc into the disc slot.
■ Press I2IIB in the Mass Store menu to see how the file is Usted on the disc.
■ Move the cursor to the file name (as it is Usted in the directory).
■ Press the |QQ key.
■ Press |^QSQ9 to load the file into the buffer.
Menus May Be Changed After Loading
If the file type is 'menu, 'menu & data', or 'extended menu', the current analyzer menu setups
will be changed by the load operation. The setup, monitor, simulate, and BERT setups are
all modified to the new values. When you load 'extended menu' types, the remote, printer, and
data filter menus are also changed. Any menus which you wish to save must be stored to disc
before the load operation.
Caution Do not perform the load operation if you want to save present menu setups.
Loading Files Larger Than the Buffer
When loading a disc file that is too large for the buffer the softkeys BBMBEHIiW and
QSSEEQI ^^ automatically displayed in the QQ^QQjQ menu. You can scroll through the
rest of the file by using these softkeys. These softkeys scroll through the file in 16 Kbyte
segments (1/2 the buffer size). Use these softkeys when running monitor programs on data
files that £ire too large for the buffer.
l\/lass Storage 12-7
Autostart Files
Autostart is a feature that uses a disc file called 'AUTOSTART.' When the HP 4952A is
turned on with a disc installed, the first file on the disc called AUTOSTART is loaded and
executed if possible. You can turn on the HP 4952A and have it automatically monitor a line,
simulate, or execute an application.
The run mode (i.e., monitor, simulate) used by the AUTOSTART file will be the last run
mode operation performed before storing the AUTOSTART file. To make the autostart
program execute correctly, run it first and then store it to a disc with the name AUTOSTART.
For example, to automatically monitor a Une, write the monitor menu, execute Monitor Line
in the Run menu and then store the monitor menu to disc with the file name AUTOSTART.
Do not use a run mode of Monitor Buffer (there is no data in the buffer at power-up) and do
not use the file name AUTOSTART for data files (data files are not executable). The
following file types can be used with the autostart feature:
Menus Load and execute the menu
Extended Menus Load and execute the extended menu
Menus & Data Load and execute the menu, load the last data
Application Load and execute the apphcation
Some things to consider when using AUTOSTART:
■ Buffer data may be lost when autostart executions begins.
■ To prevent the HP 4952A from autostarting, remove the disc before turning it on.
■ Remote slave operations will fail until the autostart operation is complete.
■ Disc errors when attempting an autostart are displayed at the bottom of the display.
■ Autostart cannot be used from RAM files.
12-8 Mass Storage
storing To Disc
To write data and store to disc:
■ Insert and format the disc if it is blank (do not format if the disc contains files you
wish to save).
■ Press ]
■ Enter the filename, the file type, and an optional comment.
■ Press I^^SSI . If the disc has insufficient room for a file, 'Disc Full' is displayed.
What You Can Store To Disc
You can store the following type of files:
■ Data
■ Menu
■ Menu & Data
■ Application Program
■ Extended Menu
When you select 'menu' or 'menu & data' as the file type, the menus saved are setup, monitor,
simulate, and BERT setup. When you select 'extended menu' as the file type, the remote,
printer, and data filter menus are also stored. 'Extended menu' also stores menus which have
External NRZI or X.21 protocols selected. HighUghts are not saved on disc.
Mass Storage 12-9
storing Data Directly From the Line
To store directly to disc while monitoring on line, use 'start disc' and 'stop disc' instructions in
the monitor and simulate menus.
For example:
Monitor
Block 1
Start Disc
If the disc becomes full, it will stop and the message 'Disc Full' appears. If the disc cannot
keep up, 'Buffer Overflow' is displayed.
The Store to disc operation will reclaim space from files that have been deleted. The HP
4952A will try to store to empty sectors at the end of the disc. If there is not enough space at
the end of the disc it will look for deleted file space. If there is a large enough hole it will
store, if not the message Disc is full message will appear. The overwritten file can no longer
be recovered.
12-10 Mass Storage
The Extended Memory Board (Option 002)
If |2g^9SSI appears in the mass store menu, your HP 4952A has the Extended Memory
Bo£U"d (option 002). The extended memory board consists of:
■ Extended Capture Buffer
■ Ram Disc
The Extended Capture Buffer (ECB)
The extended capture buffer increases buffer size to 768 Kbytes. You can look at the extended
capture buff er in the examine data menu with the |33||!|1 , ■rlJIBil.lll.l , ■JlJUaJ.t.U , and
WSWM3SBSM softkeys that move you through a displayed 32 Kbyte portion of the ECB.
The 32 Kbyte part of the buffer viewed in the examine data menu acts like a movable window.
You can move the window and look at different 32 Kbyte parts of the ECB with the
|2SGQE^SSi and QQ^^^I keys in the examine data menu. The current 32 Kbyte part of
the ECB is nonvolatile and is the only part of the buffer saved after power-off.
The RAM Disc
You can select the RAM disc, rather than the microfloppy disc, by using |2g3BB3SI ^ the
mass store menu.
The RAM Disc consists of 128 Kbytes of nonvolatile memory you can use in the same way as
you would the microfloppy disc to load and store applications, menus, and extended menus.
Operation of the RAM disc is essentially the same as it is for the microfloppy disc.
Applications that are too large to fit in the normal application space automatically overflow
into the RAM Disc area.
Mass Storage 12-11
The RAM Disc
The RAM disc is the 128 Kbyte nonvolatile portion of the optional extended memory board.
The RAM disc is activated when you press ISSS19SSI in the mass store menu. Operation of
the RAM disc is the same as operation of the disc drive.
By saving commonly used menus and applications on the RAM disc, rather than on
microfloppy discs, the information is instantly available.
Select the RAM Disc
HSS^93iI2l appears in the mass store menu when an extended memory board is present. This
softkey selects the 'mass store device' to be used. To use the disc drive, select |Sg[BQQ3i •
To use the RAM disc, select ii|Hi|||i .
Using the RAM Disc
Operation of the RAM Disc is the same as operation of the disc drive. You can load and store
menus, applications, and extended menus. Like flexible disc storage, the RAM Disc is also
nonvolatile and stored information remains after power-off. Space available is given in sectors
for the disc drive; space available on the RAM disc is shown in Kbytes.
12-12 Mass Storage
The Extended Capture Buffer
The extended capture buffer is the portion of the optional extended memory board that
provides 768 Kbytes of buffer data storage. Operation of the ECB is mostly transparent to the
user. During monitoring on-line or simulating, data is continuously loaded into the extended
capture buffer the same way it is loaded with the standard 32 Kbyte buffer.
Summary Of Facts About the ECB
■ Like the standard 32 Kbyte buffer, the ECB stores only data.
■ Total buffer storage is 768 Kbytes.
■ Of the total 768 ICbytes, 736 Kbytes is volatile, data is lost at power-off. The
remaining 32 Kbytes is nonvolatile, data is retained after power-off.
■ The non-volatile 32 Kbyte portion of buffer is movable. You CcUi select which part of
the total 768 Kbytes is saved after power-off. This 32 Kbyte window can be moved
with IBSBI, lasa^Ql, JiTFHiUffll, andBSSBDO inthe
examine data menu. After power-off, all data in the 768 Kbyte buffer is lost except
for that contained in the current 32 Kbyte window.
Loading the ECB
There are two ways to load data into the ECB:
1. Monitor on-line or simulate. Operation is the same as for the standard 32 JQjyte
buffer.
2, Load the ECB from a disc file. Operation is the same as the standard 32 Kbyte buffer
except data files that take up an entire microfloppy disc, 613 Kbytes, can now be
loaded entirely into the ECB.
Mass Storage 12-13
storing To Disc From the ECB
Operation is the same, whether the mass store device (MSD) is micro floppy disc or RAM:
1. In the mass store menu, press |Q3B3 ^^d type in a file name.
2. Select ESEI or BB3gE9 as the file type.
3. Press f
4. Press either JBaESS^MSOi or I'BHliflP I • Pressing BaJBaBam loads the
present 32 JCbyte window onto disc. Pressing BQSDHSEI loads the everything from
the beginning of the current 32 Kbyte window until the end of the 768 Kbyte buffer,
or until the end of the disc is reached. To store from the start of the buffer, position
at block 1 in the Examine Data Menu.
Remember, the 32 KbytQ window can be moved with the U^m^^j ,
IBSESSM, E^ia^S], orlHUBBImtheexammedatamenu.
Printing from the ECB or Disc
The entire contents, up to 9999 pages, of the ECB or a disc data file can be printed if an
ASCII printer is attached to the analyzer. With the ECB full, or partially full, you can print
the entire contents, or partial contents, of the buffer (see Chapter 13, "ASCII Printer Output").
12-14 Mass Storage
Memory Blocks and Disc Sectors
Memory in the HP 4952A is divided into blocks. Two Kbytes of data can be stored in each
block.
Storage on your disc is divided into sectors. A blank initialized disc has 2452 sectors. Each
sector holds 256 bytes. Each block of data you store on disc takes eight sectors.
A header is appended to everything that is stored to disc. A header takes one sector.
Here is a summary of how many sectors are taken up when things are stored.
Menus
Extended Menus
Run Data
Data
33 Sectors
37 Sectors
33 Sectors (header & menu), plus data
1 Sector for header, plus data
Mass Storage 12-15
The Disc Drive
Caution Always instedl the transportation disc in the disc drive when transporting or
shipping the HP 4952A. The transportation disc prevents damage to the disc
drive from bumps and vibration that may occur. The warranty may be voided
if the transportation disc is not used during transit.
Type Of Discs
The HP 4952A disc drive uses 3 1/2 inch, double-sided, double density flexible discs. Specify
part number HP 92192A to order a set of ten discs.
Care and Handling Of Discs
Discs require a clean, dust-free environment. To avoid damaging your discs and losing
information, follow these rules for handling and caring for your flexible discs.
1. Make certain the shutter (the metal guard) is closed when the disc is not in use. The
shutter protects the disc from dirt, fingerprints, and scratches.
2. Use discs in a clean environment. Avoid getting smoke, dust, eraser particles, salt air,
food crumbs, hair, or fingerprints on your discs.
3. Keep discs stored upright in a cool, dry place. The storage temperature range for
discs is 4^0 to 53°C (39.20F to 127.4°?) with a relative humidity between 8% and
90%. Heat and moisture can damage your discs.
4. To avoid losing important information, copy and backup your discs frequently.
5. Do not put discs near anything that generates a magnetic field, such as a telephone,
magnetic paper clip holders, or appliances with motors.
6. Do not touch the disc surface.
7. Do not try to clean the disc. The plastic jacket contains its own cleaning device.
12-16 Mass Storage
Cleaning the Disc Drive
The disc drive does not need routine preventive maintenance, however, as with any mechanical
device it can get dirty. A dirty disc drive usually means dirty heads that can cause excessive
read errors from a disc.
To clean the heads of the HP 4952A use a head cleaning disc (HP part number 09122-89415)
as follows:
■ Turn the analyzer off and remove any floppy discs that are in the disc drive.
■ Turn the analayzer on and reset the menus.
■ Press MORE and then lE^BSa.
Note The message Disc Out will blink on the screen indicating there is no disc in
the drive.
■ Insert the cleaning disc in the disc drive.
■ Press U^l to activate the cleaning process.
An on-screen message indicates the cleaning disc is a single-sided disc. The disc drive light
will be on during the process.
Mass Storage 12-17
Inserting a Disc
Hold the disc, label side up and the metal shutter pointing toward the drive. Insert the disc
firmly but gently into the disc slot until the disc touches the back of the slot. Continue pressing
until you hear a click and the disc is pulled down into the drive (see Figure 12-1).
hp 4952
hp
□
.Jl.
write-
protected
35ITD
Figure 12-1. Inserting the Disc
Removing a Disc
To remove a disc from the disc drive, press the gray button just below the drive. The disc will
pop out part of the way. Pull the disc straight out. Check to see that the metal shutter is
closed before you put the disc away.
12-18 Mass Storage
Write-Protecting a Disc
You can protect data on a disc to ensure that no one can inadvertently write over or delete the
information on the disc. To write-protect a disc (see Figure 12-2):
1. Turn the disc over so you are looking at the back.
2. Place the tip of a pen in the small hole at the top of the write protect tab.
3. Slide the tab until it locks into place. The tab will no longer be visible.
You may load (read) from the disc with the protect tab in either position.
Figure 12-2. Write Protecting Your Disc
Mass Storage 12-19
Copy Disc Utility
The Copy Disc utility is a file on the Utility Disc that is suppUed standard with the HP 4952A.
If the Utility Disc does not have this apphcation, order one through your HP sales and service
office. You must load this utility onto the HP 4952A before you can access the Copy Disc
menu. See "Loading from Disc" section in this chapter for software installation instructions.
After loading the Copy Disc utiUty, the Top Level Menu will look like Figure 12-3.
Note The Copy Disc utility requires that you have the optional Extended Memory
Plus memory board (Option 002) installed.
Utkltsc
Hewlett - Packard
Copy Disc Utility
Rev. A.00.00
Copyright HP, 1987
HP 4952
Protocol Analyzer
A.02.00 c hp 1989
1 ^^^^^^^H ^^^^^^^H ^^^^^^^H ^^^^^^^H
^jBMlH
Reniot e
aPrint
^^^^^H ^^^^^H ^^^^^H
^^^^^1 ^^^^^1 ^^^^^1
Key - Go int
Figure 12-3. Utility Disc Main Level Display
12-20 Mass Storage
Copy Disc Utility
Name Type
Directory
Sectors
■sbBBBUBB
^^^^^H ^^^^^H ^BH^H
H^QBH ^^2EflH |EEQ^H
^^^^^^^H ^^^^^^^H ^^^^^^^H
Figure 12-4. Copy Disc Utility Keys
Copying Discs
Press the new key called W8BWHH8B1 to get the display shown in Figure 12-5. The Copy Disc
command allows you to duplicate your flexible discs. This utiUty creates an image copy of the
source disc to the destination disc(s).
Note Some software applications are not reproducible. They will appear to be
copied, but will be non-executable. When you try to load this type of
application, the HP 4952A will display the error message 'Application
Denied'.
Mass Storage 12-21
Caution Any previous information on the destination flexible disc will be destroyed
during the Copy Disc operation.
Before starting the Copy Disc utility, make sure you are copying to a formatted empty disc. If
the disc is formatted and contains information, it will be overwritten by the copy disc utiUty
IS^ii^ command.
Press the IrlAMtliiW key and the display prompts you to install a source flexible disc. After
installing the source disc, press the QQQQS key. This will take approximately one minute to
read the disc. Then remove the source disc and install the destination disc. Press the
BQOSEBI k^Y) £uid then press the |^^^9 ^^Y ^^ complete copying the disc. The copy will
take approximately one and a half minutes to complete if there are no appUcations already on
the disc, or two and a half minutes if the are appUcations on the disc.
Once the source disc has been loaded, you can make many copies of the source disc. Just
insert each destination disc in the disc drive and press the IJHI^M^IHM key, and then the
■SSSa^ey.
Archiving All Contents Of RAM Disc To Flexible Disc
The RAM disc is part of option 002. It is 128 Kbytes of non-voltile memory space used for
menus, setups, and appUcations.
You may perform an Archive (disc image) to backup your RAM disc to a flexible disc. A disc
image is a fuU reproduction of the RAM disc contents.
The file created on the flexible disc wiU be a unique file type labeled 4952A Archive. This file
type consists of a header sector and an image copy of the RAM disc. This file will only be
restoreable using the Copy Disc utiUty iflSBHBSl command because of its unique file type.
Press the QQ|QQ| key and the display prompts you to specify a file name and optional
comment. Then press l^HWn to perform the BHHBBEi function.
12-22 Mass Storage
Restoring the Archive File on Flexible Disc to RAI\/1 Disc
The |3a|Q3Q command copies the archive contents on your flexible disc to the RAM disc. All
existing files in the RAM disc memory wUl be deleted and replaced with the archive contents.
The entire 2 bytes of RAM disc directory space will be overwritten, regardless of the number
of files actually stored in the archive file.
Press the l^^&Si key and the display prompts you to specify the archive file name to be
restored. Press H^QQQ to perform the Restore fiinction.
Directory
Press the QQ softkey and display the directory for the installed flexible disc. This item is
identical to the Mass Storage utility Directory command.
Delete
Press the QS^Q softkey allows files to be marked for removal from the flexible disc. Files to
be deleted may be entered from the keyboard or by scrolling to the file name with the arrow
keys and pressing 03039 • The file is marked for deletion in the directory (a Del in the
right-most column) but actually is not deleted until a QQSSSS or PW8M command writes
over the data.
This function is identical to the Mass Store utility Delete command.
Deleted files can be recovered in the Mass Store menu using the |^^^3 key if the Pack Disc
command was not invoked.
Mass Storage 1 2 - 23
Format
Pressing the UgQIBSI softkey invokes a format function on the installed flexible disc.
Reformatting a flexible disc will destroy any contents on that disc.
This function is identical to the Mass Store utility Format command.
Pack Disc
Pressing the UgQQjQ^Q softkey deletes all files that have been marked by the ES^SI k^y>
and increases the available disc space. Files deleted using the Pack Disc command are not
recoverable.
This command is identical to the Mass Store utiHty Pack Disc command.
Print Directory
Press the QBflflB^l softkey to print the directory contents displayed on the screen if there is
an ASCII printer attached to the analyzer.
12-24 Mass Storage
13
ASCII Printer Output
■ Introduction
■ Hookup
■ Setup
■ Getting Things Printed
■ Printed Output
■ How the Printer Displays Characters
■ Print Error Messages
ASCII Printer Output 13-1
Introduction
The ASCII printer output lets you print buffer data, monitor and simulate menus, timer and
counter results, remote and print menus, and disc directories. HP 4952A display information
can be sent to a printer via the Remote/Printer (RS-232C/V.24) connector on the rear panel.
To use this feature, you need an ASCII Printer such as the HP 2601A, HP 2934A or ThinkJet
Printer (HP 2225D), and possibly a properly wired modem eUminator cable depending on
your printer's needs (HP 13242G).
Hookup
Connect the ASCII printer to the Printer /Remote connector on the rear panel using the HP
13242G cable (see Figure 13-1).
Modem Eliminator
or
HP 13242G
Cable Rs-232
Printer
HP 4952
Figure 13-1. Connecting the Printer
13-2 ASCII Printer Output
Setup
To setup your 4952A for printing, press ^^^QQQ^^| in the Top Level Menu and then
press IJiliVJ^fJffBl . Place the cursor at the point where you want to begin printing and set
the correct parameters for the printer. You must know the correct settings for your ASCII
printer.
NOtG If you are using an HP 2225A ThinkJet printer, set all switches to to get a
complete copy of a lengthy printout. If the switches are not set to 0, some
blocks of data will not be printed.
Character Code
Select either ASCII 8 or ASCII 7.
Parity
Select none, even, or odd.
Bits/sec
You can send data to the printer at any one of the speeds shown on the softkeys.
Handshake
You must set the Handshaking method. You can specify ENQ/ACK, XON/XOFF, or
Control Lead. Set the characters by typing in the characters from the keyboard. Type in
control characters, shown on the keycaps, by pressing CNTL simultaneously with the control
character.
Line Terminators
Type in the line termination characters expected by the printer. Two characters may be
specified, blanks are ignored. The standard sequence of a carriage return and line feed is the
default.
ASCI I Printer Output 13-3
Carriage Return Delay
Sets the delay after a carriage return in milliseconds. This field defaults to zero, but some
printers require a delay to avoid a loss of characters.
Enquire/Acknowledge (ENQ/ACK) Hand Shaking
In ENQ/ACK handshaking the HP 4952A inquires whether the printer is ready to receive
characters. The HP 4952A sends an ENQ character (usually 05 hex) to the printer after each
block of 33 characters. The printer must acknowledge the enquiry in order for printing to
proceed. The printer does not respond to an ENQ until it is able to accept more characters
into its buffer. When it is ready, the printer responds by sending an ACK character (usually
06 hex) to the HP 4952A. The ENQ and ACK characters may be different for various
printers. You can specify the characters to be used in the Printer Menu. The ACK must
occur within 60 seconds of the ENQ or the HP 4952A reports a hand shake error.
XOn/XOff Hand Shaking
XOn/XOff handshaking is initiated by the printer. When the printer is unable to continue
receiving characters, it sends an XOff character (usually 13 hex) to the HP 4952A. The HP
4952A then suspends transmission until the printer sends an XOn character (usually 11 hex).
Some printers use a second XOff character (usually 15 hex). One XOn character and two Off
characters can be specified in the printer menu. The XOn must occur within 60 seconds after
the XOff or an error occurs and displays the message 'Hand Shake Error.'
Control Lead Hand Shaking
The HP 4952A waits for CTS to become active for 60 seconds after it causes RTS. If CTS does
not change an error occurs with a hand shaking error.
13-4 ASCII Printer Output
Getting Things Printed
When the print setup menu has been properly filled out, you can get printouts by pressing the
BflBEi keys that are found in most of the HP 4952A menus. Here is a summary of where the
print keys are and what they do.
Setup Menu
Monitor Menu
Simulate Menu
Data Filter Menu
Examine Data Menu
BERT Menu
BERT Results
Remote Menu
Mass Store Menu
Prints all setup parameters from the setup menu (13 lines).
Prints the entire monitor program.
Prints the entire simulate program.
Prints the data filter menu (first 13 lines).
13BiWgiliiW Prints the Timers and Counters summary page (first
14 lines).
I2BQIS3 Prints the selected number of pages (screenfuls of
data) of data beginning at the current page.
Prints the BERT setup menu (first 13 lines).
Prints the BERT test results display (first 13 lines).
Prints the slave, controller or print setup menus (first 13 lines).
Prints the file directory with the comments.
You can manually terminate a print cycle by pressing EXIT.
ASCII Printer Output 13-5
Printed Output
The printed output reflects the display exactly. No extra spaces are inserted and no
abbreviations are expanded. Lines are 32 characters long unless the displayed Une is
completely in inverse video, in which case an asterisk is appended to the end of the line
(DCE). It is not possible to print inverse video or half-bright video.
HP Printer Output
Block 3 Print Page 1
DTE sssseF sssseF
yyyyqF yyyyqP
DCE ssssdZF*
yyyyIOF*
RTSO/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \0/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \000000000
CTSOO/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \0/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \00000000
DSR/1111111111111111111111111111
CD 000000000000000000000/1111111
DTE sssss/*SIGNONg4REMOTE73 RH
yyyyx s7
DCE *
RTSO/111 1111111 1111 11111111111 11
CTSOO/111 111111 11111111111 1111 11
DSR11111111111111111111111111111
CD \0000000000000000000000000000
Figure 13-2. Printed Output in Data & State Format
Data is printed in 'display' pages or screen size. At the top of each page, the block number
and the 'displa/ print page number are printed (see Figure 13-2).
Note Sometimes displayed data overlaps with data on the previous screen. This
data is removed before being printed.
13-6 ASCII Printer Output
**** HP Printer Output ****
Block 3 Print Page 1
sssseFsssseF sssss/*SIGN0Ng4
yyyyqFyyyyqF yyyyx s7
ssssdZF *
yyyyIOF *
REM0TE73 RHPRHPre"CF ssssses
sx DF yyyyyty
ssssd/F *
yyyyi f *
sssseF sssss/*$DA
yyyyqF yyyyx
ssssdZF *
yyyyIOF *
reN# F ssssse ssssdZF
sx F yyyyyt yyyyIOF
ssssd/F sssseF sssss*
yyyyi F yyyyqF yyyyx*
Figure 13-3. Printed Output in 2 Line Format
Printing the Entire ECB
You can print the entire contents or partial contents of the ECB or disc files. You must
specify the number of pages up to 9999.
To print the contents of the ECB:
1. Press QB3IQ3SBH and enter the Examine Data menu.
2. Press MORE two times and locate the IJilLUtMAW softkey.
3. Using the arrow movement keys, position the beginning data on the top Une of the
screen.
ASCII Printer Output 13-7
NOtG Printing will begin at the top of the displayed page, regardless of the location
of the cursor. Position the data you want to start printing on the top line of
the displayed page.
4. Enter the number of pages you want printed. If you want to print the entire buffer
contents enter 9999.
5. Press Qj^QQ . As the data is being printed, sent to the printer buffer, the display
will show the current print page.
Note If printing from disc without an ECB, do not remove the disc during the print
operation.
6. Press EXIT at any time to stop printing.
There is a delay from the time data is displayed until it is actually printed. If you see the data
you want printed scroll across the screen, you can press EXIT to stop print execution. By the
time the print cycle stops, your desired data will have been printed.
Data segments with no data to print will be printed as blank pages to verify that no data was
missed.
How the Printer Displays Characters
The output format for the ASCII printer is the same as for the HP 4952A display except:
■ All hex codes are in upper case. All ASCII control characters are in lower case. All
other sequences are: top character upper case, and lower character lower case.
■ All characters that have no ASCII representation are printed in hexadecimal mode.
13-8 ASCII Printer Output
Hexadecimal Characters
Hexadecimal characters are printed in upper case, with the most significant digit over the
least signifiicant digit. For example, B7 hex is printed as:
ASCII Control Characters
ASCII control characters are printed in lower case with the same mnemonics as displayed
except they are printed on two lines. For example, an ASCII acknowledge is printed as:
Lines that are in total inverse video on the display have an asterisk printed at the end of the
hne. This is useful for differentiating between DCE and DTE data.
Special Characters
r ?
9
BB
bb
XX
XX
Don't Care
X
X
Undefined Char
Start Flag
S
f
End Flag
Good FCS
GG
gg
Bad FCS
Abort
AA
aa
Don't Care FCS
Highlighted
Timer
H
t
Discontinuity
ASCII Printer Output 13-9
Lead Levels
Lead levels that are displayed are printed as follows:
High =1 Low =
Transition (rising or indeterminate) /
Transition (falling or indeterminate) \
Print Error Messages
The following print error messages may appear at the bottom of the display. When printing
data or a program the error messages may only be displayed briefly (minimum of two
seconds). Press the EXIT key to return to the printer menu and halt printing.
Handshake Error
The proper handshake responses were not present.
Printer Error
Other printer problems. Verify connections and printer setup.
Remote Timeout
The print operation has timed out due possibly to an internal error. If the problem persists,
contact your HP Sales/Service Office.
To return to the printer menu after one of the above messages, press the EXIT key. Check
the printer if handshaking is not acknowledged.
13-10 ASCII Printer Output
14
Async Terminal Emulator
■ Introduction
■ Loading the Terminal Emulator Application
■ Terminal Setup
■ Terminal Operation
Async Terminal Emulator 14-1
Introduction
The Asynchronous Terminal Emulator apphcation lets you use the HP 4952A as an
asynchronous terminal. When the apphcation is loaded, the new softkey QBEEI appears.
This softkey accesses the Terminal Setup menu.
Equipment Supplied
The terminal emulator apphcation is on the HP 4952A UtiUty disc. A second disc is provided
so that the master copy of the Utihty disc can be backed-up.
Applications
The terminal emulator apphcation is very useful in the field service environment where a
terminal is needed.
Often intelUgent devices must be configured with an asynchronous terminal. For example,
some statistical multiplexers must be configured through an asynchronous terminal connected
to them. The terminal emulator application is very useful for this purpose. The terminal
emulator apphcation can jJso be used to pinpoint problems to a terminal. Simulate menus can
be run from the terminal emulator to troubleshoot and pinpoint the problem.
There are cases where the terminal emulator is used to estabUsh a connection, and then
perform a test over that connection. In some cases, if the DTR/DSR lines drop, the
coimection is lost. These lines are maintained while going between terminal mode and
running a Simulate menu.
14-2 Async Terminal Emulator
Specifications
specifications are as follows:
Physical Interface
Data Codes
Parity
Data Rates
Handshake
Error Handling
Stop Bits
RS-232C/V.24 (DTE or DCE)
ASCII 7, ASCII 8
None, Odd, Even, Space, Mark, Ignore
up to 19.2 kbps
None, Enq/Ack
None (Parity errors flash)
Transmit - 2
Receive-at least 1 bit
Loading the Terminal Emulator Application
To load the application:
1. Insert the HP 4952A Utihty disc in the disc drive.
2. Press MORE, thenlEglBga.
3. Place the cursor over the file name VTIOO, then press
4. Press l^Hlffii to load the terminal emulator apphcation program. When the
application is loaded, it will revert back to the Top Level Menu.
Async Terminal Emulator 14-3
Terminal Setup
When the application is loaded, a new softkey appears in the second level of the Top Level
Menu called ■TimmM ,
By pressing UQBQQQI , the Terminal Emulator menu is accessed. The Terminal Emulator
menu has four softkey choices: H4<'hliHll'l , ^'>J"*^>'*i"i , ■»«nTn«i«» I^QIQ .
Setup Menu
Press the H^Q^S^I softkey to access the Terminal Setup menu. Shown below are the
default parameters.
Data ccxje ASCII 8
Parity None
Bits/sec 1200
Mode DTE
Handshake None
Echo On
Bell On
Display Functions Off
Auto LF after CR On
The above setup parameters must be known before the terminal emulator can be used
effectively.
Note Incorrect parameter choices will not result in damage to the system, only the
inability to use the terminal emulator.
Use the cursor arrow keys to move to the appropriate parameter field and select the the
desired parzimeter softkeys.
Data Code Field
The softkey selections for the Data Code field are ASCII 8 and ASCII 7.
14-4 Async Terminal Emulator
Parity Field
The softkey selectionss for the Parity field are None, Odd, Even, ASCII 7 space, ASCII 7
mark, and Ignore.
Bits/sec Field
The softkey selections for the Bits/sec field are:
300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
110 200 600 800 3200 3600
50 75 2000 134. 150 7200
Mode Field
The HP 4952A can be put into the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) or DCE (Data
Commtmication Equipment) mode. This removes the need for a modem eliminator. If
running a Simulate menu, the menu must be the same, i.e.. Simulate DTE or Simulate DCE
Handshalce Field
You can select either ENQ/ACK, or none. For more information on handshaking, refer to
the "Software Handshake" section.
Echo Field
The HP 4952A can be configured with local or remote echo. If the main computer in the
system echoes back each character received (remote echo), the local echo should be turned
Off or double characters will appear on the HP 4952A display.
Bell Field
When the system CPU sends a Bell character (BELL) the HP 4952A can be set to beep or
disregard the character.
Display Functions Field
Displays control characters.
Auto Line Feed after CR
Automatically inserts a line feed character after a carriage return.
Async Terminal Emulator 14-5
Setup = Simulate
The parameters from the Monitor /Sunulate Setup and Simulate menus an be imported to the
Terminal Emulator menu with the EgQQjj^^l softkey. The following terminal setup
parameters are overwritten by this function:
Terminal Parameter
Data Code
Pju-ity
Bits/sec
Mode
Simulate
Source
Data Code of Monitor /Simulate Setup menu
of Monitor /Simulate Setup menu
Bits/sec of Monitor/Simulate Setup menu
DCE or DTE (first line of Simulate menu)
The QBB3 softkey executes the Simulate menu over the terminal emulator connection.
To stop the execution of the Simulate menu press EXIT, To return to the Terminal Emulator
menu press EXIT.
14-6 Async Terminal Emulator
Execute
Pressing the i3!Hgtig softkey causes the HP 4952A to go into the terminal mode. When
terminal mode is entered for the first time, the display is cleared and the cursor is placed in
the top row, far left column.
The terminal emulator softkeys appear at the bottom of the display.
Caps Lock
The first softkey is i«??Blli!CT . An "*" in the softkey label indicates that the softkey is ON.
Clear Screen
Pressing the second softkey, Q^^Sifl clears both the top and bottom halves of the screen.
Display Top
Press the I^QQQQSI softkey to display the top half of the screen. The display is divided
into two half screens. A half page symbol in the lower left corner of the display indicates
which half is being displayed. If the symbol is up you are viewing the top half of the display
(row 1 through 13).
Display Bottom
Press the i»IH!!lgM38nH!il to display the bottom half of the screen. The display is divided into
two half screen, A half page symbol in the lower left corner of the display indicates which half
is being displayed. If the symbol is down you are displaying the bottom half of the display (row
12 through 24). Note the overlap of halves.
Hex Entry
Press the dgQQQjQI softkey and enter hexadecimal characters through the terminal
emulator. An "*" in the softkey label indicates that the softkey is ON.
Break
Press the sixth softkey, l:iifA1M to signal an interrupt of computer operations. It is a space
condition (logical 0). A break is sent for 500 milliseconds. The shortest break possible is 6
milliseconds.
Async Terminal Emulator 14-7
Terminal Operation
If local echo or remote echo (echo from main office computer) is in effect, characters appear
on the display as they are typed.
The VT-100 display is 24 rows by 128 columns, of which 32 columns are displayed in a window
at one time. The display window is 13 rows by 32 columns. To move the cursor backward (a
[ CNTL ] [h] also results in a backspace) and up and down in the window use the arrow keys. To
move the cursor forward, press [ shift ) (T) on the HP 4952A keyboard. The window will move
in the screen when you come to the end of a displayed row, this will be reflected in the window
location in the below the softkeys. The cursor cannot be moved any further to the right when
you have reached column 128. The location of the currently displayed portion of the entire
screen is depicted in the lower left corner of the HP 4952A screen. When a line exceeds 128
columns it wraps around to the next line.
Control characters can be sent by simultaneously holding down the Control (CNTL) key and
striking the desired character key. The terminal ignores most control characters and does not
display them. Control characters that the terminal does respond to are as follows:
ASCII
Hex
Response
Keystroke
07
08
09
OA
OD
05
Beep
Backspace
Tab one space
Line feed
Carriage return
Transmit ACK
BELL
I CNTL )[GJ
BS
HT
LF
CR
ENQ
( CNTL ) [Hj
(CNTL)(T)
I CNTL ) {J}
[ CNTL ) (¥)
I CNTL 1 (Tl
When operating in the terminal mode, the HP 4952A functions as a "dumb" terminal, meaning
that when a character is typed, it is immediately transmitted. The terminal is designed to
receive one or more stop bits and to transmit two stop bits, making it compatible with all
asynchronous devices.
Pressing EXIT in the terminal mode returns the HP 4952A to the Terminal Emulate menu
where you can select |||^392SlBI to change any of the parameters.
Pressing i3!BHWg puts the HP 4952A back in the terminal mode of operation and the last
terminal session appears on the display. This arrangement lets you switch to the Terminal
Setup menu for a quick parameter change and then return to the terminal mode to continue
the current terminal mode session.
14-8 Async Terminal Emulator
Pressing EXIT in the Terminal Emulate menu returns the HP 4952A to the Top Level Menu.
All normal HP 4952A menus remain as they were before the terminal session was entered.
VT-100 Terminal Emulation
Special escape codes are used to perform the VT-100 terminal operations. The HP 4952A can
perform the following VT-100 terminal operations:
<ESC>[p1 A
<ESC>[p1 B
<ESC>[p1 C
<ESC>[p1 D
<ESC>tp1;p2 H
<ESC>[pl J
<ESC>[p1 K
<ESC>[p1;p2 f
<ESC>[p1;...;pn m
<ESC>7
<ESC>8
<ESC>D
<ESC>E
<ESC>M
<ESC>C
move up by pi lines (no scroll)
move down by pi lines (no scroll)
move right by pi spaces (no wrap)
move left by pi spaces (no wrap)
move to row pi and column p2
blank screen according to pi
pi = from cursor to end
pi = 1 from cursor to start
pi = 2 entire screen
blank line according to pi
pi = from cursor to end
p1 = 1 from cursor to start
pi = 2 entire line
same as <ESC>[p1;p2 H
set graphic parameters according to:
p = all attributes off
p = 1 bold
p = 4 underline
p = 5 blink
p = 7 inverse video
save position, graphic parameters, and character set
restore parameters saved by <ESC>7
move down 1 line with scroll
move to the left margin, down 1 line with scroll
move up 1 line with scroll
reset to saved/ power -on state and self test
For example: <ESC> tO; 1 ;4;5;7 m will turn on all the graphic parameters.
Async Terminal Emulator 14-9
Lead Control
The leads (lines) which are controlled by the terminal emulator are summarized below.
Lead Pin Mode = DTE Mode = DCE
TD 2 output = data input = data
RD 3 input = data output = data
RTS 4 output = on input
CTS 5 input output - On
DSR 6 input output = On
CD 8 input output = On
DTR 20 output = On input
Once the leads are set, they are not dropped until the user exits from the Terminal Emulator
menu, or the Mode is changed in the Terminal Setup Menu (DCE to DTE or DTE to DCE),
The leads are set the first time the user either executes the terminal emulator mode or runs
the Simulate menu from the Terminal Emulator Setup menu. The leads that are set depend
on what the Mode is selected as in the Terminal Setup menu (either DCE or DTE).
While running the Simulate menu from the Terminal Emulator menu, the leads will be in the
state Usted abovee unless the Simulate menu executes a Set Lead command. Upon exiting
from the run or by encountering a Stop Test command, the leads will be restored to the state
Usted.
The Simulate menu must be DTE if the Terminal Setup menu is selected as a DTE and the
Simulate menu must be DCE if the Terminal Setup menu is selected as a DCE.
All parameters except the Mode parameter in the Terminal Setup menu can be changed
without dropping the leads. This is handy for changing the parity or data code parameters, as
well as echo and display functions.
14-10 Async Terminal Emulator
Hardware Handshake
The hardware handshake is the electronic handshake that occurs at the physical level (Level 1)
of the communications link before data is transferred across the link.
When using the application m DTE mode, the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) and the Request
To Send (RTS) leads are set ON to ensure commimications, however, the terminal emulator
application will transmit despite the state of Data Set Ready (DSR), Clear To Send (CTS),
and Carrier Detect (CD) from the other device. When using the application in DCE mode,
the DSR, CTS, and CD leads are set ON but the terminal emulator application will transmit
despite the state of DTR and RTS from the other device.
Software Handshake
The software handshake is different than the hardware handshake. It controls the flow of data
between devices so that overflows do not occur. Although very few dumb terminals are
designed to handle software handshaking, the terminal emulator application supports
ENQ/ACK (for HP Computers).
ENQ/ACK Handshake
ENQ/ACK is initiated by the main office computer in the system. The computer is set up to
send a specified number of characters (e.g., 80) followed by an ENQ character (usually 05H).
When the terminal has processed all the received characters and is ready to receive more, it
sends an ACK character (usually 06H), To handle this type of software handshake choose
ENQ/ACK in the Terminal Setup menu.
Manual Flow Control
In the terminal mode of operation, if a main office computer downloads a file of data which is
larger than can be displayed on the HP 4952A, you czm manually control the data flow using
the Xon and Xoff characters. To stop the flow of data, transmit an Xoff signal (usually press
CNTL S). To resume the flow of data, transmit an Xon signal (usually press CNTL Q). This
method of flow control can be used with either ENQ/ACK or NONE handshaking.
Note The Manual Flow Control is provided by the central CPU, and may not be
provided by all CPU's.
Async Terminal Emulator 14-11
14-12 Async Terminal Emulator
Interface Pods
15
Introduction
Interface Pod Installation
The HP 18179A Interface
The HP 18180A Interface
The HP 18260A Interface
The HP 18174A Interface
The HP 18177A/G Interface
The HP 18160A Interface
The HP 18270A Interface Module
Interface Pods 15-1
Introduction
An interface pod is required to connect the HP 4952A to the data line. The interface pod also
forms the cover of the instrument. Interface pods are available for the RS-232C/V.24, RS-
449, and V.35 interfaces.
RS-232C/V.24 Interfaces
HP 18179A
HP 18180A
This interface pod uses LEDs for showing all three
conditions of the line: marks, spaces, and high impedance.
Because it has a complete breakout box, this pod is useful
for level 1 troubleshooting.
This interface pod contains both a EIA RS-232C/CCITT
V.24 interface and an RS-449/422A/423A interface.
The RS-232C is compatible with MIL-188C. Ten switches
are provided for line isolation. LCD indicators indicate only
Une activity on: TD, RD, TC, RC, DTR, DSR, RTS,
CTS, CD. A manually connected.MARK/SPACE monitor
is available.
HP 18260A
The RS-449 interface utilizes balanced RS-422A drivers.
LCD indicators indicate only line activity on: SD, RD, ST,
RT, RS, CS, TR, DM, RR.
This interface pod contains both an RS-232C/V.24 interface
and an X.21 interface. The RS-232C portion of the
interface is the same as the HP 18180A. The X.21 portion
lets you monitor and simulate all phases of the CCITT X.21
protocol.
15-2 Interface Pods
RS-449 Interfaces
HP 18174A
HP 18180A
This interface pod contains a RS-449/422A/423A interface.
The RS-449 interface utilizes balanced RS-422A drivers.
LCD indicators indicate only line activity on: SD, RD, ST,
RT, RS, CS, TR, DM, RR,
This interface pod contains both a EIA RS-232C / CCITT
V.24 interface and an RS-449/422A/423A interface.
The RS-449 interface utilizes balanced RS-422A drivers.
LCD indicators indicate only line activity on: SD, RD, ST,
RT, RS, CS, TR, DM, RR.
The RS-232C is compatible with MIL-188C. Ten switches
are provided for line isolation. LCD indicators indicate only
line activity on: TD, RD, TC, RC, DTR, DSR, RTS,
CTS, CD. A manually connected MARK/SPACE
monitor is available.
V.35 Interfaces
HP 18177A/G
HP 18160A
This pod contains hardware for the V.35 interface. This
interface pod uses LEDs for showing all three conditions of
the hne: marks, spaces, and high impedance. The lines
monitored are: DTE, DCE, SCE, SCT, SCR, RS, DTR,
CS, DSR, CD.
This pod contains hardware for both the V.35 and RS-
232C/V.24 interfaces. This interface pod uses LEDs for
showing all three conditions of the line: marks, spaces, and
high impedance.
Interface Pods 15-3
Interface Pod Installation
To connect the Interface Pod to the HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer, set the power switch on the
HP 4954A to OFF and attach the interface pod cable to the Interface Pod connector on the
rear panel. Tighten the connector screws to ensure that the cable will not pull off during
operation
CdUtiOn Turn OFF the Protocol Analyzer before connecting or disconnecting any
Interface Pod.
The pod can be secured to the top of the analyzer's pouch by using the strap provided on the
pouch.
HP 4952 (rear view)
o^°
V J 1
1
c^
Interface Pod
Figure 15-1. Interface Pod Connection
15-4 Interface Pods
The HP 18179A Interface
RS-232C/V.24
The HP 18179A is an RS-232C/V.24 interface pod which connects the HP 4952A to the DTE
or DCE. The HP 18179A is compatible with CCITT V.24 and EIA RS-232C electrical,
mechanical, functional, and procedural specifications.
The HP 18179A can be used for complete level 1 troubleshooting on RS-232C/V.24 interfaces.
It contains 10 pciirs of real-time LEDs which monitor data, clocks, and major control line
activity.
The LEDs show all three possible line states. The green LEDs indicate "on" states, or valid
spaces. The red LEDs indicate "OFF' states, or vahd marks. The high impedance state is
indicated when both the red and the green LEDs on a line are not lit. The LEDs also indicate
real-time activity; that is they show actual transitions.
o
o
MARK SPACE
O ODTE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
OFF
O DCE
O TC
O RC
O RTS
O CTS
O DTR
ODSR
O CD
O ETC
ON
18179A INTERFACE
HEWLETT * PACKARD
RS-232C/V.24
DTEO
DCE O
TC O
RC O
RTS O
CTS O
DTR O
DSR O
CD O
ETCO
O MARK
X o
O SPACE
SOURCE
00
oL
^°
•|4 0o oooo oooo oo25
■JOOO oooo oooo 00 13
1 10 20 25
25 DIP SWITCHES
•|000 oooo oooo GO -13
14 oo oooo oooo oo25
oY
o
Figure 15-2. The HP 18179A Interface
Interface Pods 15-5
The HP 18179A also contains a complete breakout with switches for interrupting each of the
25 conductors. Access to all 25 pins is provided by a complete set of 25 pins on each side of
the switches, allowing you to connect any interface pin to any other.
In the DTE and DCE simulate modes RS-232C/V.24 drivers are switched into the appropriate
lead by latching relays. If monitor mode is selected all RS-232C/V.24 drivers are disconnected
from the line.
LEDs
The 3-state indicators indicate activity on the interface pins. The high impedance state is
indicated when both LEDs are OFF.
Green: Space (logic '0', positive voltage) turns on at > 2.75 V, turns OFF at < 0.25 V
Red: Mark (logic '1', negative voltage) turns on at < -3.0 V, turns OFF at > -3.0 V
Disconnect Switches
Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17, 20, and 24 may be individually disconnected from the data link
by switches. This lets you isolate non-driven interface lines from the HP 4952A. Non-driven
lines may develop cross talk noise which can be mistaken by the analyzer for trjinsitions.
Connectors For RS-232C/V.24 Y-Cabie
These connectors connect the Interface Pod to the line for monitoring or simulation. Connect
the Y-cable to the top connector to include the breakout box in series with the line. Connect
the Y-cable to the bottom connector to by-pass the breakout box.
Full Breakout Box
The Breakout Box provides cross-patching, line-forcing, and monitoring capabilities for all of
the RS-232C/V.24 lines. The miniature switches isolate lines. Connect the Y-cable to the top
connector to use the breakout box.
Jumper Pins
All 25 pins of the RS-232C/V.24 connector are brought out for jumpering on both sides of the
breakout switches. If your network cable has different pin assignments from the interface
standard, you can use the supplied jvmiper wires to connect the interface lines to the desired
pin on your cable.
15-6 Interface Pods
+/-12V Source Pins
The Source Pins supply + 12 volts and - 12 volts. You may set any signal line ON or OFF by
jumpering that line to the Source Pins.
Mark/Space Indicator
The Mark/Space Indicator lets you check the level of any signal line. Jumper any pin to this
indicator to find its state.
Instrument Cable Connector
This connector connects the Interface Pod to the HP 4952A via the Pod-Instrument cable
supplied with the instrument.
Table 15-1. The RS-232/V.24 Interface (HP18179A, and 18180A)
Pin
Circuit
Function
EIA
CCITT
1
GND
Protective Ground
AA
101 .
2
TD
Transmitted Data
BA
103 DTE
3
RD
Received Data
BB
104 DCE
4
RTS
Request To Send
CA
105 DTE
5
CTS
Clear To Send CD
106
DCE
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
CC
107 DCE
7
GND
Ground Signal
AB
102 ..
8
CD
Carrier Detect
CF
109 DCE
9-11
unassigned
12
SCD
Sec Carrier Detect
SCF
122 DCE
13
SCS
Sec Clear To Send
SCB
121 DCE
14
STX
Sec Transmitted Data
SBA
118 DTE
15
TC
Transmit Clock.
DB
114 DCE
16
SRD
Sec Received Data
SBB
119 DCE
17
RC
Received Clock
DD
115 DCE
18
unassigned
19
SRS
Sec Request to Send
SCA
120 DTE
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
CD
108.2 DTE
21
SQ
Signal Quality
CG
110 DCE
22
RI
Ring Indicator
CE
125 DCE
23
DRS
Data Rate Selector
CH
111 DTE
C1 DCE
24
ETC
Ext Transmit Clock
DA
113 DTE
25 ...
unassigned ... .
Source
Interface Pods 15-7
The HP 1 81 80A Interface
(Combination RS-232C/V.24 and RS-449 Interface)
The HP 18180A is an RS-232C/V.24 interface pod as weU as RS-449/422A/423A. The HP
18180A has slightly less capability than the HP 18179A pod. Its LCD indicators show only
"on" or space states. Also, unlike the HP 18179A, the HP 18180A does not contain a full
breakout box.
Connectors
The top connector, labeled PROTOCOL ANALYZER, connects the interface pod to the HP
4952A via the Pod-Instrument cable suppUed with the instrmnent. The bottom connector,
labeled RS-232C/V.24 connects the Interface to the line for monitoring or simulation.
Jumper Pins
All 25 pins of the bottom connector are brought out for jumpering. If your network cable has
different pin assignments from the interface standard, you can use the supplied jumper wires
to connect the interface lines to the desired pin on your cable. Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17,
20, and 24 £ire also brought out on the other side of the breakout switches for jumpering.
LCD Indicators
The LCD indicator for a signal line is dark when that Une is On or Spacing. The LCD
indicator is blank when a Une is OFF, Marking, or in tri-state. For the indicator to be dark
the voltage on that line must be greater than +2.75 volts. Once the indicator is dark, it will
not go blank until the voltage becomes less than +0.25 volts. Therefore, the LCD for
individual lines do not distinguish Marking and tri-state. Use the Mark/Space Monitor to do
this.
LCD Indicator Interface Line
Dark Logical "0" (Space, On, positive voltage)
Blank Logical "1" (Mark, Off, negative voltage, tri-state)
15-8 Interface Pods
Source Pins
The six Source Pins supply + 12 volts and -12 volts. You may set any signal line ON or OFF by
jumpering that line to the Source Pins.
Disconnect (brealcout) Switches
Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17, 20, and 24 may be individually disconnected from the data link
by means of switches. This lets you isolate non-driven interface lines from the HP 4952A.
i\/larl(/Space Monitor
Use Mark/Space Monitor Pin to check the level of any signal line. Jumper this line to any
signal pin and observe the ON/OFF LCD indicators. The ON indicator is darkened for levels
greater than +3 volts; the OFF indicator is darkened for levels less than -3 volts. The other
LCD indicators do not distinguish between Marking and tri-state conditions (they are blank
below +0.25 volts). The Mark/Space Monitor lets you check these lines, or any other signal
lines for Mark/Space levels.
4952A
oz:
otr _ DCfto _
Fl- OOCKOl-l-QQ
ujQ tr I- o Q o tr tri-
OOOOOOOOOO
:xo
18180A INTERFACE
HEWLETT * PACKARD
4952A
oz:
:\o
IINTERFACE
TD
RD
TC
RC
DTH
DSR
HTS
CTS
--
CD
ON
OFF
>=t.
W <
»-3V
o
■ INTERFACE ■
SD
RD
ST
RT
RS
bs
TR
DM
RR
^^^^
^^^
moOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1
»oooooooooooo v.
o\:
RS-232/V.24
7°
o\:
RS-449
7o
Figure 15-3. The HP 18180A Interface
Interface Pods 15-9
The HP 18260A Interface
(Combination RS-232C/V.24 and X.21 interface)
This interface pod contains both an RS-232C/V,24 interface and an X.21 interface.
RS-232C Portion
Connectors
The top connector, labeled PROTOCOL ANALYZER, connects the interface pod to the
HP 4952A via the Pod-Instrument cable supplied with the instrument. The bottom connector,
labeled RS-232C/V.24 connects the Interface to the line for monitoring or simulation.
Jumper Pins
All 25 pins of the bottom connector are brought out for jumpering. If your network cable has
different pin assignments from the interface standard, you can use the supplied jumper wires
to connect the interface lines to the desired pin on your cable. Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17,
20, and 24 are also brought out on the other side of the breakout switches for jumpering.
Source Pins
The six Source Pins supply + 12 volts and -12 volts. You may set any signal line ON or OFF by
jumpering that line to the Source Pins.
Disconnect (breakout) Switches
Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17, 20, and 24 may be individually disconnected from the data link
by means of switches. This lets you isolate non-driven interface lines from the HP 4952A.
15-10 interface Pods
LCD Indicators
The LCD indicator for a signal line is dark when that line is On or Spacing. The LCD
indicator is blank when a line is OFF, Marking, or in tri-state. For the indicator to be dark
the voltage on that line must be greater than +2.75 volts. Once the indicator is dcirk, it will
not go blank until the voltage becomes less than +0.25 volts. Therefore, the LCD for
individual lines do not distinguish Marking and tri-state. Use the Mark/Space Monitor to do
this.
LCD Indicator Interface Line
Dark Logical "0" (Space, On, positive voltage)
Blank Logical "1" (Mark, Off, negative voltage, tri-state)
Mark/Space Monitor
Use the Mark/Space Monitor Pin to check the level of any signal line. Jumper this pin to any
signal pin and observe the ON/OFF LCD indicators. The On indicator is darkened for levels
greater than + 3 volts; the Off indicator is darkened for levels less than -3 volts. The other
LCD indicators do not distinguish between Marking and tri-state conditions (they are blank
below +0.25 volts). The Mark/Space Monitor lets you check these lines, or any other signal
lines for mark/space levels.
X.21 Portion
Connectors
The top connector labeled PROTOCOL ANALYZER connects the interface pod to the HP
4952A via the Pod-Instrument cable supplied with the instrument. The bottom connector
labeled X.21 connects the X.21 Y-cable to the X.21 network.
LED Indicators
The LED indicators show the conditions of the R, T, C, I, and S circuits. A red LED is lit
when a circuit is a logical 1 or Off. A green LED is Ut when a circuit is a logical or On.
Interface Pods 15-11
The HP 1 81 74A Interface (RS-449)
The HP 18174A foUows the EIA RS-449/422A/423A standard. The RS-449 was intended by
the StEindards Committees as a replacement and enhancement for the RS-232C/V.24 interface
and can be used for both low and high-speed appUcations. RS-449 is made up of two electrical
standards, RS-423A and RS-422A.
The RS-422A uses a balanced signal lead configuration for data and clocks to enable high
speed operation. RS-423A uses an unbalanced signal lead configuration. Because the HP
4952A implements RS-422A electrical standards for all category I circuits, it can also support
RS-423A circuits.
The 18174A interface does not have an integral breakout box for disconnecting and jumpering
Unes. Selected pins are, however, monitored by LCD indicators. For the LCD indicators to
transition, the unbalanced or differential A-B voltage must be greater than 0.2 volts.
18174A INTERFACE
HEWLETT » PACKARD
■■ PIN
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
PIN
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION H
1
SHIELD
21
RC
Receive Common
SI
Signaling Rate Indicator
21
Spare
Spare
22
SDb
Send Data(b)
SDa
Send Data (a)
23
STb
Send Timing (b)
6
ST«
Send Timing (a)
24
RDb
Receive DataOo)
ROa
Receive Data (a)
25
RSb
Request Send(b)
RSa
Request to Send (a)
26
RTb
Receive Timing (b)
8
HTa
Receive Timing (a)
27
CSb
Clear to Send (b)
9
CSa
Clear to Send la)
28
IS
Terminal In Sorvloe
10
a
Logical Loopback
29
0Mb
Data Modeb)
11
OMa
Data Mode (a)
30
TRb
Terminal Ready (b)
12
TRa
Terminal Ready (a)
31
RRb
Receher Ready (b)
13
RRa
Receiver Ready (a)
32
SS
Select Standby
14
RL
Remote Loopback
33
SO
Signal Quality
15
IC
Incoming Call
34
NS
New Signal
16
SF/SR
Select Frequency/rate
35
TT
Terminal Timing (b)
17
TTa
Terminal Timing (a)
36
SB
Standby Indicator
18
TM
Test Mode
37
SC
Send Common
19
SG
Signal Ground
PROTOCOL ANALYZER
oZ
o
■1 INTERFACE H
SD
RD
ST
RT
RS
CS
TR
DM
RR
^^
RS-449
O
7o
Figure 15-4. The HP 18174A Interface
15-12 Interface Pods
Table 15-2. The RS-449 Interface
Pin
Circuit
Function
Pin
Circuit
Funct i on
1
SHIELD
20
RC
Receive Common
2
SI
Signal Rate Indie.
21
Spare
3
Spare
22
SD
b Send Data (b)
4
SDa
Send Data (a)
23
STb
Send Timing (b)
5
STa
Send Timing (a)
24
RDb
Receive Data (b)
6
RDa
Receive Data (a)
25
RSb
Request Send (b)
7
RSa
Request to Send (a)
26
RTb
Receive Timing
8
RTa
Receive Timing (a)
27
CSb
Clear to Send
9
CSa
Clear to Send (a)
28
IS
Terminal in
10
LL
Local Loopback
Service
11
DMa
Data Mode (a)
29
DMb
Data Mode (b)
12
TRa
Terminal Ready (a)
30
TRb
Terminal Ready (b)
13
RRa
Receiver Ready (a)
31
RRb
Receiver Ready (b>
14
RL
Remote Loopback
32
SS
Select Standby
15
IC
Incoming Call
33
SQ
Signal Quality
16
SF/SR
Select Frequency/rate
34
NS
New Signal
17
TTa
Terminal Timing (a)
35
TT
Terminal Timing
18
TM
Test Mode
36
SB
Standby Indicator
19
SG
Signal Ground
37
SC
Send Common
Interface Pods 15-13
The HP 18177A/G Interface (V.35 Interface)
This pod is a V.35 interface. The HP 18177A/G follows V.28/V.35 electrical specifications,
V.24 functional specifications, and ISO 2593 mechanical specifications.
The mark/space LEDS can indicate a Mark or a Space. If both are Off at the same time the
indication is that no signal is present on the line. The HP 18177A/G specifies a differential
voltage resolution on Mark/Space detect of .55 volts + -30% for Data and Clock lines.
The V.28 control lines are specified as follows:
OFF LED on indicates <-2.8 volts on that line.
ON LED on indicates > .25 volts on the line.
Neither LED on indicates -2,8 < volts < .25 on the line.
The outputs of the control lines RS, DTR, CS, DSR, RLSD conform to the CCITT V.28
electrical standard meaning -12 volts for a mark (1, OFF) and + 12 volts for a space (0, on).
18177A INTERFACE
HEWLETT * PACKARD
■■■DTE H
P^bDCE^m
MARK SPACE
MARK SPACE
DTEO O
DCE O O
SCE O O
SCT O O
SCR O O
OFF ON
OFF ON
RS O O
CS O O
DTR O O
DSR O O
CD O O
PROTOCOL ANALYZER
O
O
|B CIRCUIT
^ DESCRIPTION
■^
CCITT ■
DTE
Transmit Data
103
DCE
Receive Data
104
SCE
Serial Clock Transmit External
113
SCT
Serial Clock Transmit
114
SCR
Serial Clock Receive
115
RS
Request To Send
105
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
108/2
CS
Clear To Send
106
DSR
Data Set Ready
107
CD
Carrier Detect
109
V.35
oV
yo
Figure 15-5. The HP 18177A Interface.
15-14 Interface Pods
The HP 1 81 60A (V.35 and RS 232c interface)
The HP 18160A is a combination RS 232C and V.35 interface pod. The HP 18160A lets you
monitor and send data to V.35 and RS-232C/V.24 equipment.
The interface contains 10 pairs of real-time LEDs which monitor data, clocks, and major
control line activity.
The LEDs show three possible line states. The green LEDs indicate "on" states, or spaces.
The red LEDs indicate "off states, or marks. The undefined state is indicated when both the
red and green LEDs on a line are not lit. The LEDs also indicate real-time activity; that is,
they show actual transitions.
Either the RS-232C/V.24 or V.35 portion of the interface must be selected with the select
switch located on the right-side of the pod front panel.
NotG Only connect one type of network (either RS-232C or V.35) at a time,
because the lines on the unused (unselected) interface connector(s) are still
driven in Simulate mode.
Monitor, DCE Simulate, and DTE Simulate IVIodes
The pod can be configured to one of three desired modes of operation: either monitor, DCE
simulation, or DTE simulation mode. You can select these three modes from the HP 4952A
Monitor and Simulate menus.
LEDs
The 3-state indicators indicate activity on the interface pins. The undefined state is indicated
when both LEDs are off.
During V35 operation, these LEDs indicate the following condition on the V.35 data and
clock lines:
Red (mark) is ON when a logic 1 is present at the V.35 interface.
Green (space)is ON when a logic is present at the V.35 interface.
Interface Pods 15-15
During RS-232C/VJ4 operation, these LEDs indicate the following condition on the RS-
232C/V.24 data and clock lines:
Red (mark) is ON when a logic 1 is present at the RS-232C/V.24 interface.
Green (space) is ON when a logic is present at the RS-232C/V.24 interface.
Jumper Pins
All 25 pins of the RS-232C/V.24 connector are brought out for jumpering to 10 pins (above 25
jumper pins). The HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer displays 4 control leads along with the data
leads in Data and State display format. These are RTS, CTS, DSR, and CD.
The HP 18160A Interface Pod has LED displays for 10 of the interface leads. In order to
display different leads other than the 4 in the Data and State display, or the 10 LEDs, or to
reassign pins in a non-standard interface, use the supplied jumper wires to connect interface
lines from your network to the desired pin that will be displayed on the protocol analyzer.
When jumpering pins to new pin assignments, remember to open the corresponding
disconnect switch.
Source Pins
The six Source Pins supply + 12 volts and -12 volts. You may set any line on or off by
jumpering that line to the Source Pins.
Disconnect (brealcout) Switches
Pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 15, 17, 20, and 24 may be individually disconnected from the data link
by means of switches. This lets you isolate non-driven interface Unes from the protocol
analyzer.
Mark/Space Indicator
The Mark/Space Indicator lets you check the level of any signal line. Jumper any pin to this
indicator to find its state.
15-16 Interface Pods
B3 pac^'rd' 18160A
RS-232C/V.24
Interface Select Switch
(R$-232C/V.24 or V.35)
Figure 15-6. The HP 18160A Interface
To Protocol Analyzer
\
RS-232C/V.24 Connector
\
1
\
1 DOE
1 1
*^
1 _L
HP 18160A
1 ^
>^ 1
Interface Pod
^
v.35 Connector
^
■ DTE
Figure 15-7. RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Monitor Mode
Interface Pods 15-17
To Protocol Analyzer
\
1=]
HP 18160A
Interface Pod
IZZ3-
,zi
RS-232C/V.24 Connector
i
DCE
V.35 Connector
DTE
Figure 15-8 RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DTE
To Protocol Analyzer
\
HP 18160A
Interface Pod
H^
RS-232C/V.24 Connector
^
DTE
v.35 Connector
DCE
Figure 15-9 RS-232C/V.24 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DCE
15-18 Interface Pods
To Protocol Analyzer
RS-232C/V.24 Connector
\
DCE
\
1 1
1 1
HP 18160A
Interface Pod
■
*»
DTE
^
V.35 Connector
Figure 15-10. V.35 Pod Configuration - Monitor Mode
To Protocol Analyzer
RS-232C/V.24 Connector
\
i DCE
\
^ 1
1 1
^
1 1
HP 18160A
Interface Pod
,
■ DTE
^
v.35 Connector
^T
Figure 15-1 1 V.35 Pod Configuration - Simulating a DCE
Interface Pods 15-19
The HP 18270A ISDN Interface and Analysis
The HP 18270A ISDN Interface Module, in conjunction with the HP 18268A software, makes
ISDN troubleshooting easier.
The ISDN product can be used where ISDN data travels over a LAPD Unk using the Basic
Rate S/T physical interface. In addition, the HP 18268A ISDN software can be used with any
of the HP interface pods covered in this chapter and provide Q.921/Q.931 analysis in cases
where the D channel has already been broken out from the S/T interface.
The major enhancements to the standard HP 4952A Protocol Analyzer made by the ISDN
products are included below.
HP 18270A ISDN Interface Module Hardware Only
■ Basic Rate S/T Interface Access
■ INFO State LEDs
■ TEI and SAPI filtering
■ Handset support
HP 18268A ISDN Software Only
■ Q.921 (LAPD) softkey assisted entry
■ Q.921/Q.931 monitor /decode and simulate
■ X.25 monitor/decode and simulate on D channel
■ User definable display formats
■ Expand decode of Information elements
1 5 - 20 Interface Pods
16
Examples
Examples 16-1
Example 1 : Measuring a Single RTS-CTS Delay
This test measures the time from when RTS goes on until CTS goes on. Use the |2QjSQ
menu for this example.
To view the timers and counters, press IBBuBElCT during run-time, or |QQ^QQQ| in the
Examine Data Menu after run-time.
Note that timer measurements must be referenced to a preceding trigger for accurate
measurements.
Program
Description
Block 1;
When Lead RJS goes On
then goto Block 2
Timer 1 indicates RTS-CTS delay.
Block 2:
Start Timer 1
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 3
Note that Start and Stop statements must be preceded by
When statements for accurate timing.
Block 3;
Stop Tests
16-2 Examples
Example 2: Monitoring a DCE
In this example, you monitor a DCE by simulating the DTE through the QQ3S3 menu.
When simulating a DTE, the HP 4952A suppUes the ETC clock. Upon receiving the proper
clocks and lead commands, the DCE begins sending data, which the HP 4952A automatically
stores and displays while in the simulate mode.
Simulate DTE
Block 1:
Set Lead DTR
On
and then
Set Lead RTS
On
Examples 16-3
Example 3: Monitoring a DTE
In this example, you monitor a DTE by simulating a DCE. When simulating a DCE, the HP
4952A automatically supphes both the TC and RC clocks. Upon receiving the proper clocks
and lead commands, the DTE begins sending data, which the HP 4952A automatically stores
and displays while in the simulate mode.
Simulate DCE
Block 1:
Set Lead DSR On
and then
Set Lead CD On
and then
Set Lead CTS On
16-4 Examples
Example 4: FOX Message
This test checks the abiUty of asynchronous termin£Js and printers to receive and display data.
The "FOX" message is transmitted to the terminal using the Q^QQg| menu and then the
echo from the terminal is checked for parity errors.
Simulate DCE
Block 1:
Send THE QUICK BROWN FOX
JUMPS OVER A LAZY DOG 012
3456789.
Block 2;
When Error Parity on DTE
then goto Block 3
When DCE
then goto Block 1
Block 3:
Increment Counter 1
and then
Goto Block 2
Examples 16-5
Example 5: Counting Parity Errors
This program uses the |2Q||^^3 menu to count the number of parity errors on both the DTE
and DCE lines and keep track of the number of minutes of the test.
Program
Description
Block 1:
When DTE X
or
When DCE X
then goto Block 2
Block 2:
Start Timer 5
Timer 5 starts when any character is sent on the DTE or
DCE line. ("X" = don't care.)
Block 3;
When Error Parity on DTE
then goto Block 4
When Error Parity on DCE
then goto Block 5
When Timer 5 is > 59999
then goto Block 6
Timer 5 counts milliseconds up to one minute.
Block 4:
Increment Counter 1_
and then
Goto Block 3
Counter 1 indicates DTE errors.
Block 5;
Increment Counter 2
and then
Goto Block 3
Counter 2 indicates DCE errors.
16-6 Examples
Block 6;
Increment Counter 5 Counter 5 keeps track of the number of minutes into the
and then test.
Reset Timer 5
and then
Goto Block 2
Examples 16-7
Example 6: Measuring More than One RTS-CTS Delay
This test measures RTS-CTS delays until stopped. Use the KBBIHiM Menu for this example.
Timer 1 and Timer 2 measure alternate delays. If only one timer were used, you would not
have had enough time to see the timer before it was reset.
To view the timers and counters press EWMB^ in the Run Menu during run-time. After run-
Timer & Counter
time press
Program
Block 1;
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
I in the Examine Data Menu.
Description
Block 2:
Reset Timer 1_
and then
Start Timer 1
Timer 1 measures the first RTS-CTS delay.
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 3
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 6
The two *When' statements are ORed together.
You can now view timer 1 while the analyzer finds the
next delay.
Block 3:
stop Timer 1
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 4
Block 4:
Reset Timer 2
and then
Start Timer 2
Blocks 3-5 duplicate blocks 1-2.
Timer 2 now measures the next RTS-CTS delay. Thus, the
user has time to view timer 1 before it is reset.
16-8 Examples
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 5
The two "When" statements are ORed.
When Lead RTS goes Off
then goto Block 6
Block 5;
Stop Timer 2
and then
Goto Block 1
Control is looped back to Block 1,
Block 6;
Reset Timer 1
and then
Reset Timer 2
and then
Beep
and then
Goto Block 1
If RTS goes off before CTS goes on the timers are reset
and an alarm "beep" occurs.
Examples 16-9
Example 7: Simulating RTS-CTS Delay
In this test, you substitute the HP 4952A for the DTE. Thus, you can test the modem in
isolation.
Timer 1 measures the time it takes for the modem to respond with CTS on.
Program
Simulate DTE
Block 1:
Set Lead RTS On
When Lead RTS goes On
then goto Block 2
Description
Block 2:
Reset Timer 1_
and then
Start Timer 1
and then
Start Timer 5
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 3
When Timer 5 > 2000
then goto Block 4
Timer 1 is reset because the program later loops back to
this block.
Timer 1 shows CTS response time.
Timer 5 causes the instrument to beep if CTS does not go
on within 2 seconds
Block 3:
Reset Timer 5
and then
Stop Timer J[
and then
Set Lead RTS Off
and then
Wait 29999
and then
Goto Block 1
RTS is now turned off and the test begun again after 30
seconds. (You can change this delay.)
16-10 Examples
Block 4;
Reset Timer 5 Block 4 is the error block. If CTS does not go on two
and then seconds after RTS goes on, the analyzer beeps and restarts
Reset Timer 1. the test.
and then
Beep
and then
Set Lead RTS Off
and then
Wait 250
and then
Goto Block 1
Examples 16-11
Example 8: Loopback
In this test, the local modem is looped back. The HP 4952A is substituted for the DTE and
sends the "Quick Brown Fox" message 100 times. The modem is checked for proper
handshaking and echo response.
Program
Description
Simulate DTE
Block 1:
Set Lead RTS On
and then
Start Timer 5
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 2
The modem is checked for correct handshaking response.
When Timer 5 is > 2000
then goto Block 8
Timer 5 indicates whether the modem responds within 2
seconds .
Block 2;
Reset Timer 5
and then
Send THE QUICK BROWN FOX
JUMPS OVER A LAZY DOG
0123456789.
and then
Set lead RTS Off
Timer 5 is reset for the next loop.
The message is sent to the modem.
Block 3:
When DCE THE QUICK BROWN
FOX JUMPS OVER A LAZY DOG
0123456789
then goto Block 5
When Lead CTS goes Off
then goto Block 4
The modem is checked to see whether it echoes back each
character.
Because the two *when' statements are ORed, every
character must be received before CTS goes off.
16-12 Examples
Block 4:
Increment Counter 2
Counter 2 indicates the number of times this does not
happen.
Block 5:
Increment Counter 1.
If Counter 1 is > 99
then goto Block 7
Counter 1 shows the number of transactions up to 100.
Block 6;
Goto Block 1
The test starts over.
Block 7;
Stop Tests
Block 8:
Reset Timer 5
and then
Beep
and then
Goto Block 1
An alarm ^beep' indicates a lack of modem response.
Examples 16-13
Example 9: END-TO-END: Transmit First (HP 4925B Compatible)
The End-to-End test consists of the two programs described in Examples 9 and 10.
In the End-to-End Test, two HP 4952's (or an HP 4952A and an HP 4925B) are substituted
for the DTEs at both ends of a Une. Handshaking and messages are performed and checked
100 times. Except for the fact that one DTE transmits first, and the other DTE receives first,
both programs are identical. There are two sections to this program: In blocks 5-6 this DTE
is transmitting; in blocks 1-4 this DTE is receiving. Counter 1 indicates how many times the
test failed. Counter 2 indicates the total number of transactions.
Note
The 'receive first' unit must be started first.
The proper setup is necessary for this test. Use the Char Async/Sync Menu with all the
default selections (Chapter 12) except the following:
Data Code Hex 8
Sync on Fp 93
Program
simulate DTE
Drop sync 4 chrs after 13 Is 18 IS 18 18 18
Description
Block 1;
Goto Block 6
Block 2;
Set Lead DTR On
If Lead CD is On
then goto Block 3
When Lead CD goes On
then goto Block 3
The program immediately jumps to the transmit section.
The If and When statements are ORed.
16-14 Examples
Block 3;
When Lead CD goes Off
then goto Block 4
When DCE 76 B3 Fa 4i
then goto Block 5
The two When statements are ORed: If CD goes off before
the message is received, then the error counter is
incretnented. The DCE characters are the same as those
sent by the HP 4925B
Block 4:
Beep
and then
Increment Counter 1
Block 5:
Increment Counter 2
Counter 2 tells total transactions.
Block 6;
Wait 100 msec
and then
Set Lead RTS On
If Lead CTS is On
then goto Block 7
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 7
The transmit section of the program begins.
Block 7:
Send Ff 93 76 B3 Fa 4i Is
When DTE J8
then goto Block 8
This is the same message sent by a HP 4925B
Block 8;
Set Lead RJS Off
If Counter 2 > 99
then goto Block 10
When Counter 2 reaches 100, the test is ended.
Block 9:
Goto Block 2
Block 10:
Stop Tests
Examples 16-15
Example 10: END-TO-END: Receive First (HP 4925B Compatible)
This is the part of the END-TO-END TEST for the DTE which receives first. There are two
sections to the program: In blocks 1-4 the DTE is transmitting; in blocks 5-6 the DTE is
receiving. Counter 2 tells how many times the test failed. Counter 1 keeps track of the total
number of tremsactions.
Note
The 'receive first' unit must be started first.
Use the Char Async/Sync Menu for the setup. Use all the default selections except the
following:
Data Code Hex 8 Drop sync 4 chrs after Is 18 ^B IS 18 l8 18
Sync on Fp 93
Program Description
Simulate DTE
Block 1:
Set Lead DTR On
If Lead CD is On
then goto Block 2
When Lead CD goes On
then goto Block 2
This is the Receive portion of the End-to-End test.
Block 2:
When Lead CD goes Off
then goto Block 3
When DCE 7^ B3 Fa 4i
then goto Block 4
These two When statements are Ored. If CD goes off before
this DTE has received the message. Counter 1 will
indicate another failure.
Block 3:
Beep
and then
Increment Counter J.
16-16 Examples
Block 4:
Increment Counter 2
Counter 2 indicates another transaction.
Block 5;
Wait 100 msec
and then
Set Lead RTS On
If Lead CIS is On
then goto Block 6
When Lead CTS goes On
then goto Block 6
The transmit section of the program begins.
Block 6;
Send Fp 93 76 B3 Fa 4i la
When DTE Is
then goto Block 7
Block 7:
Set Lead RTS Off
If Counter 2 > £9
then goto Block 9
When the total transactions = 100 the test is ended.
Block 8:
Goto Block 1
Block 9:
Stop Tests
Examples 16-17
16-18 Examples
Error Messages
Error Messages A - 1
Application Denied
Cause
Action
This occurs when an attempt is made to load or rename an
illegal application. This might be an application copied on
another device other than another HP 4952A.
Check the appUcation and ensure that it is correct.
Application Not Compatible
Cause
Action
This occurs when an attempt is made to store an application
that is not compatible.
Check the application and ensure that it is not copy
protected.
Bad Data - Cannot Sync
Cause
Action
Indicates that incoming data does not match selected
pattern.
Check for Une errors, wrong speed selected, or wrong
pattern selected.
Bad Disc
Cause
Action
The disc will not format due to having too many bad tracks.
A disc having one or more bad tracks is considered not
usable.
A - 2 Error Messages
Buffer Empty
Cause
Action
The slave buffer is empty.
Check the content of the slave buffer with examine data.
Retry the upload.
Buffer Overflow
Cause
Action
Not processing data as fast as it comes in. Caused by disc
or monitor program which have triggers found too often.
Decrease number of triggers in setup.
Can't Configure Within the Time Limit
Cause
Action
For synchronous protocols the time limit is 15 seconds; for
asynchronous or NRZI protocols the time limit is 45
seconds.
After the time limit, Auto Configure resets and starts over.
Checksum Error
Cause
Action
Bit errors have occurred. A bad CRC check occurred when
attempting to read or write a file on the disc. Data is
assumed to be corrupt when this error occurs.
Retry the operation. Disc may no longer be usable. Try
another disc to help isolate the problem.
Error Messages A - 3
Clock Slipped During Run
Cause
Action
Corrupt data received. A portion of the bit stream was lost.
Either BERT detected error in Hne indicating bad Hne, or
the line is configured wrong.
Controller Error
Cause
Action
The disc controller is not working properly.
Run disc self test to verify disc controller error.
Conversion Error: Menus Reset
Cause
Action
This might occur if the menus being transferred are invalid
on the destination analyzer.
Check menu compatibility. Retry menu transfer.
Data Error - Sync Lost
Cause
Action
Indicates that sync was lost after start of test.
Check either line going bad, or if tester was changed on the
other end of line.
A- 4 Error Messages
Drive Error
Cause
Action
The disc drive is not working properly, a hardware failure
has occurred.
Run disc self test to verify disc controller error.
Directory Full
Cause
Action
The directory on the disc is full, and no other files can be
written onto the disc. The directory can contain eighty files
maximum.
Reduce the number of file names.
Disc Full
Cause
Action
The disc is full of data and no more will fit. This error
occurs during write operations.
You can "pack" the disc using the IJsMMilW softkey to
possibly make enough space for the new file to fit.
Disc Not Formatted
Cause
Action
The disc has not been formatted.
The disc must be formatted before you can use it in the HP
4952A.
Error Messages A- 5
Disc Out
Cause
Action
The disc is out at the beginning of a disc operation, or the
disc is taken out during a disc operation.
Make sure a disc is properly installed in the disc drive.
Press El
Disc Removed During a Read Operation
Cause
Action
When you remove the disc during a load operation, the
buffer data is invalid.
Use the EXIT key to exit. Try loading the data again.
Disc Read Error: Buffer Data Invalid
Cause
Action
This may be caused by, checksum error, a record not
found, a corrupt file on disc, a broken disc controller, or by
a worn out disc.
Use the EXIT key to exit. Try another disc to help isolate
the problem.
Directory too Large
Cause
Action
The disc has a directory that is too large. We format ten
sectors for 80 entries for the directory.
Reduce the number of files by deleting files not needed.
A - 6 Error Messages
DLC Error
Cause
Action
HP 4952A hardware problem.
Contact HP for service.
End of Data Segment
Cause
Action
End of the current 16 blocks (32 Kbytes) of data.
Use next data segment key.
EOF error
Cause
Action
An attempt was made to read more records than exist in the
file. The End Of File was found before the read completed.
RETRY, if it fails again - retry on a different disc. If the
error persists, suspect a disc controller failure.
End of Disc File
Cause
Action
When you specify a block number beyond the last block on
disc.
Correct the block number specified so as to specify a block
number on the disc.
Error Messages A- 7
End of Valid Data
Cause
Action
When you scroll to the end of buffer data.
Scroll backward.
File Does Not Exist
Cause
Action
Attempt to load a file that does not exist or has been
deleted.
Recheck the directory for the file name or use the |^Q3
function of mass store menu to try to replace the file into
the directory so that it may be accessed.
File is Not Recoverable
Cause
Action
Attempt to recover a file that is not recoverable. Probably a
file created on an instrument other than an HP 4952A.
Recheck the file and ensure it's compatibility to the HP
4952A.
File Already Exists
Cause
Action
Attempt to store a file with a name and type that already
exists.
Recheck the name and/or type to ensure either the name or
the type is different from existing files.
A- 8 Error Messages
File Not Compatible
Cause
Action
Attempt to load a file that is not compatible with the HP
4951. This file could have the correct type but perhaps
might be an application not compatible with the HP 4952A.
Recheck the file and ensure it's compatibility to the HP
4952A.
Framing Error
Cause
Action
Could not find a "1" stop bit in an asynchronous pro tocol
during autoconfigure. This error may occur because a
transmit clock (TC or ETC) is missing in a synchronous
protocol. The HP 4952A assumes an asynchronous
protocol, but cannot then find the stop bit.
Check transmit clock indicators on the pod. Check protocol
setup. Retry the transmission.
Handshake Error
Cause
Action
The proper handshake responses were not present during
printer operation.
Check handshake Une for correct responses.
Error Messages A - 9
Improper Format
Cause
Action
The disc format is not compatible with the HP 4952A for
runtime use. The disc format is LIF but not formatted on
an HP 4952A and will not work at runtime for writing to the
disc.
Format the disc in an HP 4952A or an HP 4951C.
Insufficient Data to Configure
Cause The analyzer cannot detect a clock or idles
Action
Check the data stream. Go to the setup menu and check
for non-standard protocols or data codes.
Invalid Async Framing
Cause
Action
The analyzer cannot determine the async data code.
Go to the setup menu and check for a non-standard data
code.
Invalid File Name
Cause
Action
Attempt to enter an invalid file name.
Correct the file name. Allowable cheiracters are A - Z,
numbers, and the underscore character. The file name
must start with a capitol alpha-muneric character.
A - 10 Error Messages
Invalid File Type
Cause Attempt to load of store a file with a file type that is not
valid on an HP 4952A.
Action Correct the file type to match with a compatible file type on
the HP 4952A.
Invalid Mon/Sim menu
Cause This may occur if you enter "When DTE/DCE" without
completing the trigger branching instruction, or if there are
other incomplete program statements.
Action Examine monitor/simulate menu for incorrect parameter.
Correct the error and retry
Invalid Sync Characters
Cause Could not find any of the standard sync characters (ASCII
= 1616; EBCDIC = 3232; IPARS = 3F3E).
Action Try syncing on different characters. The Auto Configure
syncs on a selected set of sync characters. The data stream
does not contain one of these sync characters.
Invalid asynchronous speed / Invalid synchronous speed
Cause The bit rate is not within 5% of those listed under
"Assumptions".
Error Messages A - 1 1
Issue ID Request to Enable Slave
Cause Failure to issue ID request to enable an HP 4951 slave.
Action
You must always |SgQS33 this operation immediately after
establishing phone communication in order to synchronize
remote transfers. Required by the HP 4951A as a slave.
Max Length
Cause
Action
This message appears if you attempt to specify more than
255 characters in a single string.
Reduce the number of characters in the string.
Max Strings
Cause
Action
Appears if the Monitor and Simulate Menus combined
contain strings which have a total of more than 2750
characters.
Reduce the number of characters in the string.
Media Wear Protected
Cause
Action
The disc is write protected because of excess wear on the
disc. This prevents you from writing on a disc surface that
is marginal.
Use another disc and copy this to that new disc as soon as
possible.
A - 12 Error Messages
Menu Full
Cause Appears if the Monitor and Simulate Menus combined
contain more than 143 steps.
Action Reduce the number of steps.
Menus Incompatible with HP 4952A
Cause This might occur for certain menus created by a HP 4955A
or HP 4953A.
Action It may be possible to modify the existing menu to run on the
HP 4952A. Examine the menu for any illegal parameters,
correct and retry.
New Name Already Exists
Cause Attempt to rename a file with a name and type that already
exists.
Action Recheck the name and/or type to ensure either the name or
the type is different from existing files.
No Application Loaded
Cause Attempt to store an application when no application was
loaded in the appUcation portion of ram.
Action Load the application desired into the HP 4952A before
trying to store it.
Error Messages A - 1 3
No Data in Buffer - Use EXIT Key to Exit
Cause This occurs if the buffer is empty when you go to the
Examine Data Menu.
Action Monitor On-Line, or load from the disc to fill the buffer.
No Data in Capture Buffer
Cause This occurs if the buffer is empty when you try to store a
menus & data file or a data file.
Action Monitor On-Line, or load from the disc to fill the buffer.
No displayable data in buffer for the selected display format
Cause This indicates that the buffer contains non-displayable data,
such as lead transitions, or if in the Packet display there are
no packets.
Action Use Data & State display format to see the lead transitions,
and all other data, if any.
No Data Present
Cause There is no hne data.
Action Both data and idle conditions must be present.
A - 1 4 Error Messages
No File; Run Aborted
Cause
Action
The menu requesting the run-time disc data file was exited
prior to being executed.
None - Message informs you that the run-time disc data file
was exited prior to being executed.
No Idles
Cause
Action
There £ire insufficient idles on the line.
Both data and idles must be present. Asynchronous
protocols must have a minimum of two idle characters
between messages.
No Pod Attached
Cause
Action
The pod is not attached or the connection has come loose.
Be sure to turn off the power before connecting the
interface pod.
No Sync Characters
Cause
Action
Could not find £my sync characters.
Try to sync on idles to capture aU the data on the Une and
then check the data with exzimine data menu for the
presence of sync characters.
Error Messages A - 15
Non LIF Format
Cause
Action
The disc has been formatted, but the format is not the LIF
format used by the HP 4952A.
Format the disc in/on a HP 4952A.
Nonstandard Baud Rate
Cause
Action
The bit rate is not within 5% of the selected value.
Adjust bit rate of system the HP 4952A is attached to
monitoring/simulating.
No More Highlights
Cause
Action
When you press the BSQEflflB key and there are no more
highlights.
View highlights again by returning to start of buffer (use
■J.yjiH.U«) and then mgnKmni. For fram e packet
displays, try |>14a#i4'lllHlii then |HlSflDBI •
Operation Not Valid for HP 4952A
Cause
Action
The remote operation is one that only an HP 4955A or HP
4953A can perform.
Amend operation to comply with HP 4952A capabilities.
A - 16 Error Messages
Printer Error
Cause
Action
Other printer problems.
Verify connections and printer setup.
Receiver Overrun
Cause
Action
Line data too fast.
Check configuration of line. May be noise on data or clock.
Record Not Found
Cause
Action
A track or sector was not found during a disc operation
which could indicate a corrupt format on the disc or a worn
disc.
Re-try the read or write operation.
Remote Timeout
Cause
Action
The print operation timed out.
If persistent, contact your HP Sales/Service Office.
Single Sided Disc
Cause
Action
The disc has been formatted as a single-sided disc.
The HP 4952A uses a double-sided format. Use a double-
sided disc.
Error Messages A - 17
Seek Error
Cause
Action
The disc controller can not find a location on the disc that it
expects to find.
Retry the operation. Retry the operation on another disc.
Start of Valid Data
Cause
Action
When you scroll to the beginning of buffer data.
Scroll forward.
Sync Lost One or More Times
Cause A "Data Error - Sync Lost" error has occurred at least once.
Action
Check either line going bad, or if tester was changed on
the other end of the line. Waiting for data.
Trying Again to Capture Data
Cause The analyzer does not capture data and cannot find a clock.
Action
Press lilHJ»ltliW^ again. If that does not work go to the
Setup Menu and manually set up the instrument.
A- 18 Error Messages
Waiting for Data
Cause
Action
Either there is no line data, or the analyzer is still collecting
sufficient data to make a determination.
Both data and idle conditions must be present.
Waiting for Frames
Cause
Action
The analyzer has detected a bit-oriented protocol but
cannot caputre frames.
Press liUU^iDm and try to capture frames or go to the
setup menu and manually configure the analyzer.
Waiting for Idles
Cause
Action
There are insufficient idles on the line. Both data and idles
must be present.
Character oriented protocols must have a minimum of ten
idle characters between messages, and bit oriented
protocols must have ten flags between frames
Waiting for Messages
Cause
Action
The analyzer has detected a character-oriented protocol but
cannot find the sync characters.
Press lilSmiiim or go to the Setup Menu and manually
configure the analyzer.
Error Messages A - 19
Write Protected
Cause The disc "write protect" tab is in the "protect" position. The
tab will not be visible £ind a physical hole will exist in that
portion of the disc case.
Action To store information on a write protected disc, slide the
protect tab to the opposite position.
A - 20 Error Messages
B
Specifications and Accessories
■ Specifications
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Accessories
■ Options
■ Interface Accessories
Specifications and Accessories B - 1
Specifications
Weight (including interface pod and cabies)
Net Wt: 7.0 kg. (15.4 lbs.)
Shipping: 12.5 kg. (27.6 lbs.)
Size
Height: 16.0 cm, width 27.9 cm, depth 34.3 cm. (6.3 x 11.0 x 13.5 in.)
Temperature
Operating: ^C to + 40 ^C ( + 32 ^F to + 104 Op ) * *
Storage: -40 ^C to + 75 ^C (-40 ^F to + 167 ^F)
** The disc drive and optional extended memory should only be operated at
temperatures of +5 °C to +40 °C (+41 ^F to + 104 ^F) and stored at +4 ^C to
+ 530C( + 390Fto + 127 OF).
Power Requirements
90 to 264 Vac: 48 to 66 Hz single phase, or 125 to 375 VDC.
Typical less than 20 VA, maximum less than 35 VA.
Electromagnetic Capability
Complies with VDE 0871/6.78 Limit B, and is licensed per FTZ 1046/84.
B - 2 Specifications and Accessories
Operating Characteristics
Operating characteristics are features and capabilities that the protocol analyzer exhibits. They
are not specifications.
Protocols
X.25, SNA (opt.), SDLC, BSC, HDLC, IPARS, X.21 (opt), DDCMP and most
character asynchronous or synchronous protocols.
Data Transmission Modes
Synchronous, asynchronous, NRZI, and externally clocked NRZI.
Data Transfer Rates (bps)
50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 400, 3200, 3600, 4800, 7200,
9600, 12000, 14400, 16000, 19200, 38400, 48000, 56000, 64000 and EXTERNAL for
synchronous data lines.
COPs will have different maximum transfer rates depending on the protocol.
Not Supported: Asynchronous (bps): 12000, 14000, 16000, > NRZI (bps): 50, 12000,
16000 Async BERT (bps): 12000, 16000, teletext 1200/75
Data Codes
ASCII, EBCDIC, Baudot, Six Bit Transcode, IPARS, EBCD, and Hex. Also JIS-7,
JIS-8, and EBCDIK (with Katakana option).
Capture Memory
32 Kbytes of nonvolatile RAM (768K Kbytes of optional volatile extended memory)
for storing data characters, timing and lead status.
Mass Storage
Microfloppy disc stores 613 Kbytes of data, timing information, setups, and
programs.
specifications and Accessories B - 3
Lead Status
The status of five control leads are stored for each interface. They are RTS, CTS,
DTR, DSR, and CD for RS-232C/V.24 and V.35 interfaces; CS, RS, RR, TR, and
DM for RS-449 interface; T, R, I, and C for X.21 interface.
Highlights
Most recent 63 trigger events.
Character Framing
5, 6, 7, or 8 information bits, plus parity. For asynchronous systems select 1, 1.5, or 2
stop bits per character.
Error Checking
CRC-CCITT, CRC-CCITT preset 0, CRC-16, CRC-12, CRC-6, LRC, and parity.
Triggers
63 triggers for characters, errors, interface lead transitions and softkeys.
Timers
Five, each with a maximum count of 65535 msec. Resolution 1 msec.
Counters
Five, maximum count 65535.
Keyboard
Full ASCII keyboard with six softkeys and cursor control.
Parity
Odd, even, none, ignore.
Display
High resolution 13 cm (5 in) diagonal with 16 lines and 32 characters per line.
B - 4 Specifications and Accessories
Display Formats
DTE data over DCE data, Data and Lead Status, DTE data only, DCE data only,
Frame and Packet decode. Packet only decode, and X.21 data and state.
Send Strings
255 characters per string maximum, 1750 characters total.
Remote Capability
Complete unattended remote control. Can be controlled by another HP protocol
analyzer or computer to transfer data, setups, and test programs.
Bit Error Rate Testing
Simultaneously measures bit errors, block errors, errored seconds, and percent
error free seconds for synchronous, asynchronous or isochronous data links.
Block Size: 511, 1000, 2047.
Patterns: 63, 511, 2047 or 4095 pseudo random sequence.
Character Framing: Select 5,6,7, or 8 bit per character and parity.
Inject Errors Function: Single errors or bursts of errors.
Clock Speed Accuracy
For BERT operation, clocks provided on the physical interface are accurate to
0.01%.
For other operations, the following clock speeds provided on the physical interface
are accurate to 0.01%: 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3200,
3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 48000, 56000, and 64000.
For your convenience, the following additional clock speeds have been provided,
however the clock accuracy is not specified: 50, 2000, 12000, and 16000.
Specifications and Accessories B - 5
Accessories
Accessories Supplied
Power Cord
Pod-Instrument Cable (for all pods)
Operating Manual
Getting Started
Transportation Disc
Extra Fuse
Utility Disc
Accessories Available
See Appendix D
HP 5062-2144
HP 04952-90082
HP 04952-90083
HP 5060-7177
HP 2110-0758
Data tracker breakout box
Soft vinyl carrying case
Hard cover transit case
ThinkJet printer for ASCII printouts
(does not include interface cable)
Box of 10 3.5-inch double-sided discs
Extended memory plus retrofit kit
Rack mount for 4952A instrument (7" vert)
Rack mount for 4952A pod (7" vert)
Video Print Interface
Extra HP 4952A Operating Manual
Extra HP 4952A Getting Started Manual
Disc Drive Cleaning Kit
HP 92204N
HP 18 190 A
HP 9211-1291
HP 2225D
HP 921 92A
HP 04952-69501
HP 18195A
HP 18196A
HP 18340A
HP 04952-90082
HP 04952-90083
HP 09122-89415
B - 6 Specifications and Accessories
Problem Solving Accessories:
HP 18160A: Combination RS-232/V.24 and V.35 Interface Pod
HP 18174A: RS-449/422A/423A Interface Pod
HP 18177A/G: V.35 Interface Pod
HP 18179A: RS-232/V.24 Interface Pod with complete breakout box
HP 18180A: Combination RS-232/V.24 and RS-449/422A/423A Interface Pod
HP 18260A: X.21 and RS-232/V.24 Interface Kit
HP 18261A: SNA Analysis software
HP 18263A: 3270 Installation and Maintenance Software
HP 18264A: X.25 and SNA Level Link Level Statistics
HP 18265A: DDCMP Analysis
HP 18266A: Enhanced X.25 Analysis
HP 18267A: X.25 Test Library and Emulator
HP 18268A: ISDN Basic Rate Analysis
HP18269A: G.821 BERT
HP 18270A: ISDN Basic Rate Channel Access and Analysis
One of the cables Usted below is included in the appropriate interface pod.
RS-232/V.24 Y-ribbon cable HP 18173-61602
RS-449 Y-ribbon cable HP 18174-61601
V.35 Y-ribbon cable HP 18177-61601
Specifications and Accessories B - 7
Options
Option 002 Extended Memory Plus
3/4 Mbyte extended capture buffer
128 Kbyte non-volatile program RAM
Option 101 Adds accessory 18174A (RS-449/422A/423A)
Option 102 Adds accessory 18180A (Combination RS-232C/V.24 and
RS-449/422A/423A).
Option 103 Adds accessory 18179A (RS232C/V.24 with complete
breakout box)
Option 104 Adds HP 18260A (Combination X.21 and RS-232C/V.24).
Option 105 Adds HP 18177A/G (V.35).
Option 106 Adds HP 18160A (V.35 and RS-232C/V.24
Option 107 Adds HP 18270A ISDN Basic Rate Channel Access and
Analysis
Option 501 French Manual
Option 502 German Manual
Option 908 Rack Mount Kit (14" vert.)
Option W30 3 year extended hardware support. Provides 2 additional
years of return-to-HP hardware support (for 2nd and 3rd
years).
B - 8 Specifications and Accessories
Interface Accessories
HP18160A (RS-232C/V.24 and V.35)
Interface contains both RS-232C/V.24 and V.35 interfaces.
HP 18174A (RS-449/422A/423A)
Balanced RS-422A drivers. Interface activity indicators: DS, RD, ST, RT, RS, CS, TR, DM,
and RR.
HP18177A/G(V.35)
Interface activity indicators: DTE, DCE. SCE, SCT, SCR, RS, DTR, CS, DSR, and CD.
HP 18179A (RS-232C/V.24)
Full breakout box with 25 switches. Interface Activity Indicators: DTE, DCE, TC, RC, RTS,
CTS, DTR, DSR, CD, ETC.
HP 18180A (RS-232/V.24 and RS-449/422A/423A)
Activity indicators are the same leads as HP 18179A and HP 18174A.
HP 18260A (RS-232/V.24 and X.21)
Interface activity indicators: DTE, DCE, TC, RC, RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, CD for the RS-232
portion, and R, T, C and I for the X.21 portion.
HP 18270A ISDN Basic Rate Channel Access and Analysis
Interface kit includes HP 18268A ISDN software as well as the Interface Module.
Specifications and Accessories B - 9
B - 10 Specifications and Accessories
OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables
Level 2: The Data Link Interface
Level 3
OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables C - 1
Level 2: The Data Link Interface
Character Oriented Protocols: BSC
ITB
I SYN I SYN I SOH | Header | STX | Text | ETX | BCC | BCC |
ETB
Bit Oriented Protocols
I Flag I Address | Control | Data | FCS | PCS | Flag |
Flags: Flags (7e) act as frame delimiters
Address Field: Command frames contain receiving station's address. Response frames
contain sending station's address.
Control Field: Identifies function and purpose of the frame. Contains commands, responses,
and sequence numbers.
Information Field: Any number of bits, typically in multiples of 8 (octets).
FCS: Frame Checking Sequence for Error Detection.
C - 2 OSi Level 2 and 3 Tables
Types Of BOP Frames (Indicated by the following control fields)
1. Information (I) Frames: For transferring information.
I NCR) I P/F I N(S) I I
2. Supervisory (S) Frames: To acknowledge I frames, request re-transmission of I
frames, and to communicate status (busy, ready).
Receive Ready (RR)
I N(R) I P/F I I 1 I
Reject (REJ)
I N(R) I P/F I 1 I 1 I
Receive Not Ready (RNR)
I N(R) I P/F I 1 I 1 I
Selective Reject (SREJ)
I N(R) I P/F I 1 1 I 1 I
3. Unnumbered (U) Frames: To issue commands and responses.
I Type I P/F | Type | 1 1 |
OS! Level 2 and 3 Tables C - 3
Unnumbered Format Commands (P = Poll, F= Final)
Control
Fi
eld Bits
Mnemonic
msb
Isb
1
P
1 1
SNRM
P
SARM
1
P
SABM
1 1
P
SNRME
1
P
SARME
1 1
P
SABME
P
SIM
1
P
1 1
DISC
P
1 1
UI
1
P
1 1
UP
1
P
1
1 1 1
RSET
1 1
P
1
1 1 1
XID
Name
Set Normal Response Mode
Set Asynchronous Response Mode
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode
Set Normal Response Mode Extended
Set Asynchronous Response Mode Extended
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended
Set Initialization Mode
Disconnect
Unnumbered Information
Unnumbered Poll
Reset
Exchange Identification
Unnumbered Format Responses
1 1 F 1 '
UA
Unnumbered Acknowledgement
F 1 1 1
DM
Disconnected Mode
F 1 1 '
RIM
Request Initialization Mode
F 1 '
UI
Unnumbered Information
1 F 1 1
1 FRMR
Frame Reject
1 1 F 1 1 1
XID
Exchange Identification
1 F 1
RD
Request Disconnect
C - 4 OSi Level 2 and 3 Tables
Sample Monitor Menu Triggers ("x" = don't care)
When DTE
When DTE (flag) 0^
When DTE (flag) 0]^ xxxxxxxx
When DTE (flag) 0^ xxxxxxll
When DTE (flag) Oi 100x0011
When DTE (flag) Oi 10010011
When DTE (flag) O3 xxxxOOOl
When DTE (flag) O3 10110001
When DTE (flag) O3 00100010
Trigger on data from the DTE
Address (second byte)
Control Field, don't cares (3rd byte)
U-Frame
Type of U-Frame = SNRM
Poll bit set to 1
S-Frame
S-Frame, Type=RR, N(R)=5, P/F=l
I-Frame, N(R) = 1, N(S) = 1, P/F=
(This is an I-Frame)
OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables C - 5
Level 3
Packet Construction (MODULO 8)
msb
Isb
GFI
Q D 1
LCGN
LCN
P(R)
M
PCS)
User Data
Packet Types rrr=n(r), sss=n(S)
Data
Call Request
Call Accepted
Clear Request
Clear Confirmation
Interrupt
Interrupt Conf.
Receive Ready
Receive Not Ready
Reject
Reset Request
Reset Confirmation
Restart Request
Restart Conf.
Diagnostic
Registration Request
Registration Conf.
msb Isb
RRRMSSSO
00001011
00001111
00010011
00010111
00100011
00100111
RRR00001
RRR00101
RRR01001
00011011
00011111
11111011
11111111
11110001
11110011
11110111
LCGN = Logical Channel Group Number
LCN = Logical Channel Number
Logical Channel Identifier = LCN + LCGN
P(R) = Next Receive Packet Expected
P(S) = Packet Send Sequence Number
M-bit = More Data Bit
Q-bit = Data Qualifier Bit
D-bit = Delivery Confirmation Bit
C - 6 OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables
Data Packets
Modulo 8
msb Isb
GFI
Q D 1
LCGN
LCN
P(R)
M
P(S)
User Data
Modulo 128
msb
Isb
Octet 1
GFI
Q D 1
LCGfi
Octet 2
LCN
Octet 3
P(S)
Octet 4
P(R)
M
User Data
OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables C - 7
Call Request/
Incoming Call Packet
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Octet 4
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
Call Accepted/
Call Connected Packet
GFI
LCGN
GFI
LCGN
LCN
LCN
10 11
1111
Calling
DTE
Address
Length
Called
DTE
Address
Length
Calling
DTE
Address
Length
Called
DTE
Address
Length
Called DTE Address
Called DTE Address
Calling DTE Address
Calling DTE Address
Facility
Field Length
Facility
Field Length
Faci lity Codes
and Parameters
Faci I i ties
Call User Data
C - 8 OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables
D
Service Information
■ Power Requirements
■ Adjustments
■ Performance Verification
■ Packaging
Service Information D - 1
Power Requirements
Warning Before connecting the HP 4952A to any line voltage, be sure the proper fuse
is installed. Damage to the instrument may occur if the wrong fuse is
installed. See procedures which follow to replace the fuse.
Warning Before connecting the HP 4952A to any line voltage, the protective earth
terminal of the instrument must be connected to the protective conductor of
the line power cable. The line plug must be inserted in an outlet provided
with a protective earth contact. The protective conductor must not be
negated by the use of an extension cord without a protective grounding
conductor. Grounding one conductor of a two-conductor outlet does not
provide an instrument ground.
Power Cable
The HP 4952A power cable has three wires. When connected to an appropriate power
receptacle, this cable grounds the instrument chassis. The type of power cable shipped with
each instrument depends on the country of destination (see Table D-1). If the appropriate
power cable is not included with the instrument, notify the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and
Service office for a replacement.
Line Voltage Selection
The line voltage selector is not available on the HP 4952A as the line voltage is not selectable.
D-2 Service Information
Changing Fuses
The fuse is located behind the cover that surrounds the power switch. The fuse (HP #2110-
0758) is rated at .6A, 250V.
To change the fuse:
1. Unplug the instrument and remove the line cord from the instrument.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot at the top of the cover. Pry out the cover from
the top.
3. Pull out the light gray fuse holder located under the line switch. Replace the fuse.
4. Re-insert the fuse holder with the arrow facing in the same direction as the two
arrows on the cover.
5. Close the cover.
Adjustnnents
There are no operator adjustments for the HP 4952A. Any internal adjustments must be
made by a quaUfied service person.
Service Information D - 3
Table D-1. Power Cable Part Numbers
Plug Typo
Cable
HP Part
Number
Plug
Description
Cable
Length
(inches)
Cable
Color
For Use
In Country
8120-1351
8120-1703
Straight 'BSneSA
90°
Mint Gray
Mint Gray
United Kingdom,
Cyprus. Nigeria,
Rhodesia,
Singapore
8120-1369
8120-0696
Straight "NZSSISS/ASC1 12
90°
Gray
Gray
Australia,
New Zealand
8120 1689
8120-1692
Straight 'CEET-YII
Mint Gray
Mint Gray
East and West
Europe, Saudi
Arabia, Egypt,
So Africa, India
lunpolarized in
many nations)
8120-1348
8120-1398
8120-1754
8120-1378
8120-1521
8120-1676
Straight •NEMA5-15P
90°
Straight •NEMA5-15P
Straight •NEMA5-15P
90°
Straight •NEMA5-15P
Black
Black
Black
Jade Gray
Jade Gray
Jade Gray
United States,
Canada,
Japan ilOOV or
200V I,
Mexico,
Philippines,
Taiwan
Straight -SEVIOI!
1959-24507
Type 12
Switzerland
8120-0698
Straight 'NEMAe-ISP
United States
Canada
3120-1957
3120-2956
Straight -DHCK 107
90°
Gray
Gray
Straight •CEE22-VI
iSyStems Cabinet usei
8120-4600
8120-4211
Straight BS 546/SABS 164
90°
Black
Black
So Africa,
India
•Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for <
including plug
E = Earth Ground; L = Line; N = Neutral ^
D - 4 Service Information
Performance Verification
When you turn the instrument on, self tests are automatically performed. These tests are
completed in about 10 seconds. When the self tests are complete, the Top Level Menu is
displayed. If the instrument comes up in the Top Level Menu, the basic operation of the
analyzer is verified. If there is a failure, the instrimient does not come up in the Top Level
Menu; instead it displays the failures that occurred during the self-test sequence.
Besides the automatic turn-on self test checks, use the following procedures to test your HP
4952A more completely.
CdUtiOn All data and menus will be lost if you execute the Loop Tests. This includes
the contents of the Option 002 Memory.
Loop Tests
Note An interface pod MUST be attached before executing the Loop Test. If the
pod is not attached, the DLC field will indicate an error, and display the
status message FF.
The loop tests do more in depth testing of the HP 4952A. The loop tests run the basic power-
on PV tests plus expanded versions of these tests. You do not need to have a disc installed in
the disc drive.
To run the loop tests, press Q^BBESI i^ the Top Level Menu and then press HffiQI . A test
display appears listing the tests that are performed. Press QK^QQ to start the loop tests.
Press EXIT to stop the tests. The disc drive indicator lights once during each loop so you can
tell that the tests are being performed. Errors are recorded on the display. In most cases, an
error means that repair is necessary.
DLC errors can possibly indicate problems with the interface pod instead of the main
instrument. If DLC errors are indicated, try another interface pod to isolate the problem.
Service Information D - 5
Disc Drive Checks
If files can be loaded and stored correctly, the proper operation of the disc mechanism is
verified. To detect a disc failure, merely store data or menus onto disc, press |^^3 to re-
initialize the menus and clear memory, and then load the same file back into the instrument.
The menus and data should be the same as when they were stored. A typical procedure would
be like the following two checks.
Disc Format Check
1. Insert a blank disc into the disc slot.
2. Press iSHSEBSHSffil on the Top Level Menu
3. You should be using a blank disc, or one that does not contain files you wish to keep.
In the mass store menu, press MSSSHfTM and then 13!B8fBgl .
4. The disc should initialize properly. Use this disc for the next check.
Disc Read/Write Check
To check the disc read/ write circuits, install a blank, formatted disc in the disc drive and
follow the procedure below.
1. In the Setup menu, use the default conditions, except set the bits/sec to 64 k and set
the display mode to DCE.
2. In the simulate menu, simulate a DCE, and enter the following program.
Block 1;
Start Display
and then
Start Disc
Press Next Block
Block 2;
Send DISC TEST GG
and then
GOTO Block 2
D - 6 Service Information
Press EXIT to return to the Top Level Menu.
3. In the Run menu, press ^^Q^Q , type in the file name "DTEST", and press
QSQ^3 • When the disc is full, a "Disc Full" message is displayed.
4. Next, read the file that you just stored on disc. In the mass store menu, press |
type in the file name you used when storing, and press i^BBWn . Notice that the file
size should be 2449 sectors.
5. EXIT the Mass Store menu and press I^^^Q^Qj to view the data.
Keyboard Test
The keyboard test verifies that the HP 4952A correctly identifies each key pressed.
1. Turn on the HP 4952A
2. Press MORE
3. Press the j^QQI^Q softkey in the Top Level Menu.
4. Press any key on the keyboard.
5. The display should read: LAST KEY PRESSED: "(name of key is displayed)". The
RETURN key effectively performs the same operation as "cursor down".
6. Press EXIT to end the test and display the self-test menu.
Service Information D - 7
Display Test
Press mWJHli in the Top Level Menu and then select Q39DalE9 - There are five
different display patterns you can select to verify your display.
Align Pattern
Use this pattern to check all display attributes.
i:iS£iSti^i^3i^iiii±^^^!2!i!s^!z^^^!Eki!E!E
? e is il i£ K; k1 iS H t^ b'
ji:ajejEj;j»:£:E
,. ,. .. ,. ,. ,. ,. ^ ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,^5,D^p,c^qj^^^^^^^5.9tiii
. F. F . f;.. F-. F„ F^ F. F-, F... F. F.
^6^^.:;^.::'=F»Vh.%2i'=k^i'v^S::^.^'^L^'i'^:i^'=:'=k^^^S.^,S:'=i'=s<V^^
±a b c d e + g h i ^^^iiiili v,.i K 1 m n o p q r ^i^iii
^-s t u ..... ...I ;:-.: y z i^3;3jii^!i!£^5t^^^^^^^^5j^i
y ^-.f^^.^.^r-. .- ,- „.- , , .- , ... J ^. [_ f,, ^,^ |-| p Q p ^^^5j^^
Figure D-1,
Test Pattern
Video Pattern
Gives you alternating character cells of inverse video, blank, and half-bright video. The
following pattern is repeated over the entire display.
Inv Video
This pattern is a full, inverse-video display.
D - 8 Service Information
:••;&:■• ■:: ::■*+..-. ••• 0123456789: ;<
; H I J K L M N P Q R S T U U W X Y " "
' >n b c d e t '3 h i j K 1 m n o p q r s t u '■.' w x y
finj *<>oc::::: : ■© ii if ". I .T A
fjiiE VA S I U '^:D R J N F C K T Z L W H Y P Q B G %M X U Sj
nij3 V- ' S 7 •:;;.* 4 ^, ! ■ <. '5 " > 2 » b Q 1 9 ? & sj^ . / ; Sj
- i5 i: S q y h-i 4 m u d fj^jFkEtr'VS k s b 'viVbib o w + W%\
1 j ■• • .3 9 r 2 i 5 n v e "^S: V*V3 1 t c # * .. . 7 p x g ev\^c55;
_ it + * G! Y H : M U D Frj^E^'V < K S B ::■ '^iVb: ' W F %^^Sj
= J ? H ■:: R z I ;•: n u e ^'^ V4- ,; l t c ■• ! .. . > P X G ^\^^y.
' ' ^FGHI5,..< E^%%S. JKLMNOPQR $* "iS-R.
- / S T U IJ W X Y Z E; .. ;•: ^i^.::Hr0 1 2 3 4 5 fc 7 3 9 S^# (5 \^<^y.
"• ■ :Ei= 'i^j.-- S T U U W X Y Z - # ^L ,
e J K L M H P Q R : < + ^j:j < $ A B C D E F G H I ? . ^ S\h
Figure D-2.
Test Pattern
Extended Tests
The IJQQ^SI softkey is used by trained service personnel when servicing or repairing your
mstrument. Do not use the ■wnwatiw , ■ilMJrldr^a or BaaMcwM softkeys.
Packaging
If the instrument is returned to Hewlett-Packard for service, complete one of the blue repair
tags located in the pouch and attach it to the instrument.
CdUtion Always install the transportation disc in the disc drive when transporting or
shippmg the HP 4952A.
Service Information D - 9
Original Pacicaging
Containers and materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through
Hewlett-Packard offices. If the instrument is being returned to Hewlett-Packard for service,
attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model number, and full
serial number. Mark the container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. In correspondence,
refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number.
Other Paclcaging
Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or plastic. Use a strong shipping container: a double-
walled carton made of 350-pound test material is suitable. Use a layer of shock-absorbing
material 70-to 100mm (3 to 4 inches) thick Eiround the sides of the instrument to provide firm
cushioning and to prevent movement inside the container. Seal the container securely. Mark
shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. In any correspondence, refer to the
instrument by model number and full serial number.
D - 10 Service Information
External Video Output
External Video Output E - 1
Introduction
The external video output is located on the rear panel of the HP 4952A. It is used for
displaying the internal CRT monitor on an external monitor.
RS-170 is the electrical characteristic for the video signal on monochrome video monitors.
The HP 4952A utilizes this specification to display the internal CRT monitor on an external
monitor. An example monitor is the HP 82913A which utilizes this standard.
RS-170 specifies the following: 525 lines per frame, 60 Hz refresh rate, a horizontal scan rate
of 15.75 kHz.
Usage
The HP 4952A does not work well with standard television monitors because standard
television monitors are designed to overscan the picture/frame displayed. This means that
standard television monitors are not designed to display the edges of the frame received
(approximately 10% of the frame is not shown). The HP 4952A does display 100% of the
frame zmd therefore the frame displayed on a standard television would not show the 10% of
the edges of the frame shown on the internal HP 4952A monitor screen.
The physical connector on the back of the HP 4952A is a 75 ohm BNC type connector.
Recommended Video Monitors
Europe 82913A opt. 1 12" screen & cable 5061-6533
U.S. 82913A 12" screen & cable 8120-4703
E - 2 External Video Output
F-1
F-2
Data Code Tables
ASCII Character Conversion Table
EBCDIC Character Conversion Table
Baudot Character Conversion Table
EBCD Character Conversion Table
Transcode Character Conversion Table
IPARS Character Conversion Table
Data Code Tables G - 1
Table G-1. ASCII Character Conversion Table
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Description
000 0000
00
NU
NUL
Null
1
000 0001
01
SH
SOH
Start of Header
2
000 0010
02
SX
STX
Start of Text
3
000 0011
03
EX
ETX
End of Text
4
000 0100
04
ET
EOT
End of Transmission
5
000 0101
05
EQ
ENQ
Enquiry
6
000 0110
06
AK
ACK
Positive Acknowledge
7
000 0111
07
BL
BEL
Bell
8
000 1000
08
BS
BS
Back Space
9
000 1001
09
HT
HT
Horizontal Tab
10
000 1010
OA
LF
LF
Line Feed
11
000 1011
OB
VT
VT
Vertical Tab
12
000 1100
oc
FF
FF
Form Feed
13
000 1101
OD
CR
CR
Carriage Return
14
000 1110
OE
SO
SO
Shift Out
15
000 1111
OF
SI
SI
Shift In
16
001 0000
10
DL
DLE
Data Link Escape
17
001 0001
11
D1
DC1
Device Control 1
18
001 0010
12
D2
DC2
Device Control 2
19
001 0011
13
D3
DC3
Device Control 3
20
001 0100
14
D4
DC4
Device Control 4
21
001 0101
15
NK
NAK
Negative Acknowledge
22
001 0110
16
SY
SYN
Synchronous Idle
23
001 0111
17
EB
ETB
End of Transmission Block
24
001 1000
18
CN
CAN
Cancel
25
001 1001
19
EM
EM
End of Medium
26
001 1010
1A
SB
SUB
Substitute
27
001 1011
IB
EC
ESC
Escape
28
001 1100
1C
FS
FS
File Separator
29
001 1101
ID
GS
GS
Group Separator
30
001 1110
IE
RS
RS
Record Separator
31
001 1111
IF
US
US
Unit Separator
32
010 0000
20
(space)
33
010 0001
21
!
34
010 0010
22
35
010 0011
23
#
36
010 0100
24
$
37
010 0101
25
%
38
010 0110
26
&
39
010 0111
27
40
010 1000
28
(
41
010 1001
29
)
42
010 1010
2A
*
43
010 1011
2B
+
44
010 1100
2C
>
G-2 Data Code Tables
Table G-1. ASCII Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Description
45
010 1101
2D
_
46
010 1110
2E
47
010 1111
2F
/
48
oil 0000
30
49
oil 0001
31
1
50
oil 0010
32
2
51
oil 0011
33
3
52
oil 0100
34
4
53
oil 0101
35
5
54
oil 0110
36
6
55
oil 0111
37
7
56
oil 1000
38
8
57
oil 1001
39
9
58
oil 1010
3A
59
oil 1011
3B
60
oil 1100
3C
<
61
oil 1101
3D
=
62
oil 1110
3E
>
63
oil 1111
3F
?
64
100 0000
40
@
65
100 0001
41
A
66
100 0010
42
B
67
100 0011
43
c
68
100 0100
44
D
69
100 0101
45
E
70
100 0110
46
F
71
100 0111
47
G
72
100 1000
48
H
73
100 1001
49
1
74
100 1010
4A
J
75
100 1011
4B
K
76
100 1100
4C
L
77
100 1101
4D
M
78
100 1110
4E
N
79
100 1111
4F
80
101 0000
50
P
81
101 0001
51
Q
82
101 0010
52
R
83
101 0011
53
S
84
101 0100
54
T
85
101 0101
55
U
86
101 0110
56
V
87
101 0111
57
w
88
101 1000
58
X
89
101 1001
59
Y
Data Code Tables G - 3
Table G-1. ASCII Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Description
90
101 1010
5A
Z
91
101 1011
5B
[
92
101 1100
5C
\
93
101 1101
5D
]
94
101 1110
5E
A
95
101 1111
5F
96
110 0000
60
*
97
110 0001
61
a
98
110 0010
62
b
99
110 0011
63
c
100
110 0100
64
d
101
110 0101
65
e
102
110 0110
66
f
103
110 0111
67
g
104
110 1000
68
h
105
110 1001
69
i
106
110 1010
6A
J
107
110 1011
6B
k
108
110 1100
6C
1
109
110 1101
6D
m
110
110 1110
6E
n
111
110 1111
6F
112
111 0000
70
P
113
111 0001
71
q
114
111 0010
72
r
115
111 0011
73
s
116
111 0100
74
t
117
111 0101
75
u
118
111 0110
76
V
119
111 0111
77
w
120
111 1000
78
X
121
111 1001
79
y
122
111 1010
7A
z
123
111 1011
7B
{
124
111 1100
7C
125
111 1101
7D
}
126
111 1110
7E
127
111 1111
7F
DEL
Delete
G-4 Data Code Tables
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Conversion Table
Keyboard Entry
Dec
Displayed
Standard
If Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Standard
Description
0000 0000
00
NU
NUL
Null
1
0000 0001
01
SH
SOH
Start of Header
2
0000 0000
02
sx
STX
Start of Text
3
0000 0011
03
EX
ETX
End of Text
4
0000 0100
04
PF
PF
(hex)
Punch Off
5
0000 0101
05
HT
HT
Horizontal Tab
6
0000 0110
06
LC
LC
(hex)
Lower Case
7
0000 0111
07
DEL
Delete
8
0000 1000
08
(hex)
9
0000 1001
09
RF
RLF
(hex)
10
0000 1010
OA
SM
SMM
(hex)
Start Manual Message
11
0000 1011
OB
VT
VT
Vertical Tab
12
0000 1100
OC
FF
FF
Form Feed
13
0000 1101
OD
CR
CR
Carriage Return
14
0000 1110
OE
SO
SO
Shift Out
15
0000 1111
OF
SI
SI
Shift In
16
0001 0000
10
DL
DLE
Data Link Escape
17
0001 0001
11
D1
DC1
Device Control 1
18
0001 0010
12
D2
DC2
Device Control 2
19
0001 0011
13
D3
DC3
Device Control 3
20
0001 0100
14
RE
RES
(hex)
Restore
21
0001 0101
15
NL
NL
(hex)
New Line
22
0001 0110
16
BS
BS
Back Space
23
0001 0111
17
IL
IL
(hex)
Idle
24
0001 1000
18
CN
CAN
Cancel
25
0001 1001
19
EM
EM
End of Medium
26
0001 1010
1A
CC
CC
(hexi
Cursor Control
27
0001 1011
IB
CI
CU1
(hexi
28
0001 1100
1C
FS
IFS
FS
Information File Separator
29
0001 1101
ID
GS
IGS
GS
Information Group Separator
30
0001 1110
IE
RS
IRS
RS
Information Record Separator
31
0001 1111
IF
US
lUS
US
Information Unit Separator
32
0010 0000
20
DS
DS
(hexi
Digit Select
33
0010 0001
21
SS
SOS
(hexi
Start of Significance
34
0010 0010
22
FS
FS
(hex)
Field Separator
35
0010 0011
23
(hexi
36
0010 0100
24
BP
BYP
(hexi
Bypass
37
0010 0101
25
LF
LF
Line Feed
38
0010 0110
26
EB
ETB
End of Transmission Block
39
0010 0111
27
EC
ESC
Escape
40
0010 1000
28
(hexi
41
0010 1001
29
(hexi
42
0010 1010
2A
SM
SM
(hex)
Set Mode
43
0010 1011
2B
C2
CU2
(hex)
44
0010 1100
2C
(hexi
Data Code Tables G - 5
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Dec
Displayed
Standard
Keyboard Entry
If Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Standard
Description
45
0010 1101
2D
EQ
ENQ
Enquiry
46
47
0010 1110
0010 1111
2E
2F
AK
BL
ACK
BEL
Positive Acknowledge
Bell
48
0011 0000
30
(hex)
49
0011 0001
31
(hex)
50
51
0011 0010
0011 0011
32
33
SY
(hex)
SYN
Synchronous Idle
52
0011 0100
34
PN
PN
(hex)
Punch On
53
0011 0101
35
RS
RS
(hex)
Reader Stop
54
0011 0110
36
UC
UC
(hex)
Upper Case
55
0011 0111
37
ET
EOT
End of Transmission
56
0011 1000
38
(hex)
57
0011 1001
39
(hex)
58
0011 1010
3A
(hex)
59
0011 1011
3B
C3
CU3
(hex)
60
0011 1100
3C
D4
DC4
Device Control 4
61
62
0011 1101
0011 1110
3D
3E
NK
(hex)
NAK
Negative Acknowledge
63
0011 1111
3F
SB
SUB
Substitute
64
0100 0000
40
(space)
65
0100 0001
41
(hex)
66
0100 0010
42
(hex)
67
0100 0011
43
(hex)
68
0100 0100
44
(hex)
69
0100 0101
45
(hex)
70
0100 0110
46
(hex)
71
0100 0111
47
(hex)
72
0100 1000
48
(hex)
73
0100 1001
49
(hex)
74
0100 1010
4A
<f
[
75
0100 1011
4B
76
0100 1100
4C
<
77
0100 1101
4D
(
78
0100 1110
4E
+
79
0100 1111
4F
1
]
80
0101 0000
50
&
81
0101 0001
51
(hex)
82
0101 0010
52
(hex)
83
0101 0011
53
(hex)
84
0101 0100
54
(hex)
85
0101 0101
55
(hex)
86
0101 0110
56
(hex)
87
0101 0111
57
(hex)
88
0101 1000
58
(hex)
89
0101 1001
59
(hex)
G - 6 Data Code Tables
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Table G-2. Conversion Table (Continued)
Keyboard Entry
Dec
Displayed
Standard
if Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Mnemonic
Standard
Description
90
0101 1010
5A
!
91
0101 1011
5B
$
92
0101 1100
5C
*
93
0101 1101
5D
)
94
0101 1110
5E
95
0101 1111
5F
1
A
96
0110 0000
60
-
97
0110 0001
61
/
98
0110 0010
62
(hex)
99
0110 0011
63
(hex)
100
0110 0100
64
(hex)
101
0110 0101
65
(hex)
102
0110 0110
66
(hex)
103
0110 0111
67
(hex)
104
0110 1000
68
(hex)
105
0110 1001
69
(hex)
106
0110 1010
6A
.1
107
0110 1011
6B
>
108
0110 1100
6C
%
109
0110 1101
6D
-
110
0110 1110
6E
>
111
0110 1111
6F
?
112
0111 0000
70
(hex)
113
0111 0001
71
(hex)
114
0111 0010
72
(hex)
115
0111 0011
73
(hex)
116
0111 0100
74
(hex)
117
0111 0101
75
(hex)
118
0111 0110
76
(hex)
119
0111 0111
77
(hex)
120
0111 1000
78
(hex)
121
0111 1001
79
'
122
0111 1010
7A
123
0111 1011
7B
#
124
0111 1100
7C
@
125
0111 1101
7D
■
126
0111 1110
7E
=
127
0111 1111
7F
"
128
1000 0000
80
(hex)
129
1000 0001
81
a
130
1000 0010
82
b
131
1000 0011
83
c
132
1000 0100
84
d
133
1000 0101
85
e
134
1000 0110
86
f
Data Code Tables G-7
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Keyboard Entry
Dec
Displayed
Standard
If Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Cliaracter
Mnemonic
Standard
Description
135
1000 0111
87
g
136
1000 1000
88
h
137
1000 1001
89
i
138
1000 1010
8A
(hex)
139
1000 1011
8B
(hexi
140
1000 1100
8C
(hex)
141
1000 1101
8D
(hex)
142
1000 1110
8E
(hex)
143
1000 1111
8F
(hex)
144
1001 0000
90
(hex)
145
1001 0001
91
j
146
1001 0010
92
k
147
1001 0011
93
1
148
1001 0100
94
m
149
1001 0101
95
n
150
1001 0110
96
151
1001 0111
97
P
152
1001 1000
98
q
153
1001 1001
99
r
154
1001 1010
9A
(hex)
155
1001 1011
9B
(hex)
156
1001 1100
9C
(hex)
157
1001 1101
9D
(hex)
158
1001 1110
9E
(hex)
159
1001 1111
9F
(hex)
160
1010 0000
AO
(hex)
161
1010 0001
A1
~
162
1010 0010
A2
s
163
1010 0011
A3
t
164
1010 0100
A4
u
165
1010 0101
A5
V
166
1010 0110
A6
w
167
1010 0111
A7
X
168
1010 1000
A8
y
169
1010 1001
A9
z
170
1010 1010
AA
(hex)
171
1010 1011
AB
(hex)
172
1010 1100
AC
(hex)
173
1010 1101
AD
(hex)
174
1010 1110
AE
(hex)
175
1010 1111
AF
(hex)
176
1011 0000
BO
(hex)
177
1011 0001
B1
(hex)
178
1011 0010
B2
(hex)
179
1011 0101
B3
(hex)
G-8 Data Code Tables
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Keyboard Entry
Dec
Displayed
Standard
If Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
IMnetnonic
Standard
Description
180
1011 0100
B4
(hex)
181
1011 0101
B5
( hexi
182
1011 0110
B6
(hex)
183
1011 0111
87
(hex)
184
1011 1000
88
(hex)
185
1011 1001
89
1 hex)
186
1011 1010
8A
(hex)
187
1011 1011
88
(hex)
188
1011 1100
BC
(hex)
189
1011 1101
BD
(hex)
190
1011 1110
BE
(hex)
191
1011 1111
BF
(hex)
192
1100 0000
CO
{
193
1100 0001
CI
A
194
1100 0010
C2
B
195
1100 0011
C3
C
196
1100 0100
C4
D
197
1100 0101
C5
E
198
1100 0110
C6
F
199
1100 0111
C7
G
200
1100 1000
C8
H
201
1100 1001
C9
1
202
1100 1010
CA
ihexi
203
1100 1011
CB
ihexi
204
1100 1100
CC
s
;*
205
1100 1101
CD
ihexi
206
1100 1110
CE
V
;*
207
1100 1111
CF
ihexi
208
1101 0000
DO
}
209
1101 0001
D1
J
210
1101 0010
D2
K
211
1101 0011
D3
L
212
1101 0100
D4
M
213
1101 0101
D5
N
214
1101 0100
D6
215
1101 0111
D7
P
216
1101 1000
D8
Q
217
1101 1001
D9
R
218
1101 1010
DA
ihexi
219
1101 1011
DB
ihexi
220
1101 1100
DC
ihexi
221
1101 1101
DD
ihexi
222
1101 1110
DE
ihexi
223
1101 1111
DF
ihexi
224
1110 0000
EO
\
*Use CNTL Key in conjunction with symbol.
Data Code Tables G - 9
Table G-2. EBCDIC Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Keyboard Entry
Dec
Displayed
Standard
If Other Than
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
IMnemonic
Standard
Description
225
1110 0001
El
(hex)
226
1110 0010
E2
S
227
1110 0011
E3
T
228
1110 0100
E4
U
229
1110 0101
E5
V
230
1110 0110
E6
w
231
1110 0111
E7
X
232
1110 1000
E8
Y
233
1110 1001
E9
z
234
1110 1010
EA
(hex)
235
1110 1011
EB
(hex)
236
1110 1100
EC
H
-*
237
1110 1101
ED
(hex)
238
1110 1110
EE
(hex)
239
1110 1111
EF
(hex)
240
1111 0000
FO
241
1111 0001
F1
1
242
1111 0010
F2
2
243
1111 0011
F3
3
244
1111 0100
F4
4
245
1111 0101
F5
5
246
1111 0110
F6
6
247
1111 0111
F7
7
248
1111 1000
F8
8
249
1111 1001
F9
9
250
1111 1010
FA
1
/*
251
1111 1011
FB
(hex)
252
1111 1100
FC
(hex)
253
1111 1101
FD
(hex)
254
1111 1110
FE
(hex)
255
1111 1111
FF
(hex)
"Use CNTL Key in conjunction with symbol.
G - 10 Data Code Tables
Table G-3. Baudot Character Conversion Table
UnshiHed
Shifted
Dec
Characters
Characters
Value
Binary
Hex
(letters)
(figures)
0000
00
NU
NU
1
0001
01
E
3
2
0010
02
LF
LF
3
0011
03
A
-
4
0100
04
(space)
(space)
5
0101
05
S
'
6
0110
06
1
8
7
0111
07
U
7
8
0100
08
CR
CR
9
1001
09
D
$
10
1010
OA
R
4
11
1011
OB
J
BL
12
1100
OC
N
13
1101
OD
F
!
14
1110
OE
C
15
1111
OF
K
(
16
1 0000
10
T
5
17
1 0001
11
Z
18
1 0010
12
L
1
19
1 0011
13
W
2
20
1 0100
14
H
#
21
1 0101
15
Y
6
22
1 0110
16
P
23
1 0111
17
Q
1
24
1 1000
18
9
25
1 1001
19
B
9
26
1 1010
1A
G
&
27
1 1011
IB (figs)
SO (Shift outi
SO (Shift out!
28
1 1100
1C
M
29
1 1101
ID
X
/
30
1 1110
IE
V
31
1 1111
IF(LTRS)
SI (Shift in)
SI (Shift in)
Data Code Tables G - 1 1
Table G-4. EBCD Character Conversion Table
Unshifted
Shifted
Dec
Characters
Characters
Value
Binary
Hex
00 0000
00
(space)
(space)
1
00 0001
01
-
—
2
00 0010
02
@
(hex) (<p)
3
00 0011
03
&
+
4
00 0100
04
8
♦
5
00 0101
05
q
Q
6
00 0110
06
y
Y
7
00 0111
07
h
H
8
00 1000
08
4
9
00 1001
09
m
M
10
00 1010
OA
u
U
11
00 1011
OB
d
D
12
00 1100
oc
(hex) (PN)
(hex) (PN)
13
00 1101
OD
(hex) (RES)
(hex) (RES)
14
00 1110
OE
(hex) (BYP)
(hex) (BYP)
15
00 1111
OF
(hex) (PF)
(hex) (PF)
16
01 0000
10
2
<
17
01 0001
11
k
K
18
01 0010
12
s
S
19
01 0011
13
b
B
20
01 0100
14
)
21
01 0101
15
VT
VT
22
01 0110
16
FF
FF
23
01 0111
17
(hex)
(hex)
24
01 1000
18
6
25
01 1001
19
b
26
01 1010
1A
w
w
27
01 1011
IB
f
F
28
01 1100
1C (UC)
SO (Shift out)
SO (Shift out)
29
01 1101
ID
BS
BS
30
01 1110
1E
EB
EB
31
01 1111
IF (LC)
SI (shift in)
SI (Shift in)
32
10 0000
20
1
=
33
10 0001
21
J
J
34
10 0010
22
/
?
35
10 0011
23
a
A
36
10 0100
24
9
(
37
10 0101
25
r
R
38
10 0110
26
2
Z
39
10 0111
27
i
I
40
10 1000
28
5
%
41
10 1001
29
n
N
42
10 1010
2A
V
V
43
10 1011
2B
e
E
G - 12 Data Code Tables
Table G-4. EBCD Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Unshifted
Shifted
Dec
Characters
Characters
Value
Binary
Hex
44
10 1100
2C
RS
RS
45
10 1101
2D
CR
CR
46
10 1110
2E
LF
LF
47
10 1111
2F
HT
HT
48
11 0000
30
3
49
11 0001
31
1
L
50
11 0010
32
t
T
51
11 0011
33
c
C
52
11 0100
34
#
53
11 0101
35
$
!
54
11 0110
36
,
55
11 0111
37
56
11 1000
38
7
>
57
11 1001
39
P
P
58
11 1010
3A
X
X
59
11 1011
3B
g
G
60
11 1100
3C
ET
ET
61
11 1101
3D
(hex) (ID
(hex) (ID
62
11 1110
3E
ESC
ESC
63
11 1111
3F
.■•••/(DEL)
•■•:■••;• (DEL)
Data Code Tables G - 13
Table G-5. Transcode Character Conversion Table
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Characters
Mnemonic
00 0000
00
SH
SOH
1
00 0001
01
A
2
00 0010
02
B
3
00 0011
03
C
4
00 0100
04
D
5
00 0101
05
E
6
00 0110
06
F
7
00 0111
07
G
8
00 1000
08
H
9
00 1001
09
1
10
00 1010
OA
SX
STX
11
00 1011
OB
■
12
00 1100
oc
<
13
00 1101
OD
BL
BEL
14
00 1110
OE
SB
SUB
15
00 1111
OF
EB
ETB
16
01 0000
10
&
17
01 0001
11
J
18
01 0010
12
K
19
01 0011
13
L
20
01 0100
14
M
21
01 0101
15
N
22
01 0110
16
23
01 0111
17
P
24
01 1000
18
Q
25
01 1001
19
R
26
01 1010
1A
(space)
27
01 1011
IB
$
28
01 1100
1C
«
29
01 1101
ID
US
US
30
01 1110
IE
ET
EOT
31
01 1111
IF
DL
DLE
32
10 0000
20
.
33
10 0001
21
/
34
10 0010
22
S
35
10 0011
23
T
36
10 0100
24
U
37
10 0101
25
V
38
10 0110
26
w
39
10 0111
27
X
40
10 1000
28
Y
41
10 1001
29
z
42
10 1010
2A
EC
ESC
43
10 1011
2B
'
G - 14 Data Code Tables
Table G-5. Transcode Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Characters
Mnemonic
44
10 1100
2C
%
45
10 1101
2D
EQ
ENQ
46
10 1110
2E
EX
ETX
47
10 1111
2F
HT
HT
48
11 0000
30
49
11 0001
31
1
50
11 0010
32
2
51
11 0011
33
3
52
11 0100
34
4
53
11 0101
35
5
54
11 0110
36
6
55
11 0111
37
7
56
11 1000
38
8
57
11 1001
39
9
58
11 1010
3A
SY
SYN
59
11 1011
3B
#
60
11 1100
3C
@
61
11 1101
3D
NK
NAK
62
11 1110
3E
EM
EM
63
11 1111
3F
DEL
Data Code Tables G - 15
Table G-6. IPARS Character Conversion Table
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Function
1
00 0000
00 0001
00
01
(hex)
1
2
00 0010
02
2
3
00 0011
03
3
4
00 0100
04
4
5
00 0101
05
5
6
00 0110
06
6
7
00 0111
07
7
8
00 1000
08
8
9
00 1001
09
9
10
00 1010
OA
11
00 1011
OB
*
12
00 1100
OC
CR
Return
13
00 1101
OD
El
End of Medium, Incomplete
14
00 1110
OE
=
Sense
G - 16 Data Code Tables
Table G-6. IPARS Character Conversion Table (Continued)
Dec
Displayed
Keyboard
Value
Binary
Hex
Character
Function
15
00 1111
OF
(hex)
Go-Ahead
16
01 0000
10
(hex)
Write
17
01 0001
11
/
Erase/Write
18
01 0010
12
S
19
01 0011
13
T
20
01 0100
14
U
21
01 0101
15
V
22
01 0110
16
w
23
01 0111
17
X
24
01 1000
18
Y
25
01 1001
19
z
26
01 1010
1A
27
01 1011
IB
#
28
01 1100
1C
(space)
29
01 1101
ID
EC
End of Medium, Complete
30
01 1110
IE
c
Start
31
01 1111
IF
32
1 0000
20
@
33
10 0001
21
J
34
10 0010
22
K
35
10 0011
23
L
36
10 0100
24
M
37
10 0101
25
N
38
10 0110
26
39
10 0111
27
P
40
10 1000
28
Q
41
10 1001
29
R
42
10 1010
2A
UMSG
43
10 1011
2B
<
44
10 1100
2C
+
45
10 1101
2D
EU
End of Medium, Unsolicited
46
10 1110
2E
)
47
10 1111
2F
(
48
11 0000
30
$
49
11 0001
31
A
50
11 0010
32
B
51
11 0011
33
C
52
11 0100
34
D
53
11 0101
35
E
54
11 0110
36
F
55
11 0111
37
G
56
11 1000
38
H
57
11 1001
39
1
58
11 1010
3A
?
59
11 1011
38
60
11 1100
3C
%
61
11 1101
3D
EP
End of Medium, Push Button
62
11 1110
3E
S2
Sync 2
63
11 1111
3F
SI
Sync 1, Reset
N
ote: The SYN keycap
maps to the
Sync 2, hex 3E character.
Data Code Tables G - 17
G - 18 Data Code Tables
Index
ac power source 1-2
Accessing - Setup Menu 3-2
Accessories B-6
Available B-6
Supplied B-6
Address 6-4
Extended 6-4
Field 6-4
Adjustments D-5
Align Pattern D-8
Applications 17-2
Denied A-2
Not Compatible A-2
Archiving 12-22
RAM to Disc 12-22
ASCII? 3-15, 7-13
arrow keys 1-6
ASCII
Character Conversion Table G-2
Control Characters 13-9
Printer 13-2
Printer Output 13-2
Asynchronous Terminal Emulator 14-2
Asynchronous Modems 11-12
Asynchronous Mode 10-9, 10-10
Auto Configure 1-12, 3-2, 3-8, 3-15, F-5
Algorithm 2-3
As a Starting Point 2-5
BOPs 2-5
BSC 2-6
COPs 2-6
Softkey 2-2
Using Auto Configure 2-2
Auto Configure Error Messages
Waiting for Data 2-6
Waiting for Idles 2-6
Waiting for Frames 2-7
Waiting for Messages 2-7
No Pod Attached 2-7
Invalid Sync Characters 2-7
Invalid Asynchronous Speed/Invalid
Synchronous Speed 2-7
Invalid Async Framing 2-7
Can't Configure Within the Time Limit 2-7
Auto Configure Results 2-3
Auto Line Feed 14-5
Autostart FUes 12-8
B
Bad Data - Cannot Sync 10-13, A-2
Bad disc A-2
Basic Rate 15-20
Baudot 3-15
Baudot Character Conversion Table G-11
Beep 4-7, 4-13
BeU Field 14-5
BERT 1-6, 8-5
Menu 1-12, 13-5
Results 13-5
BERTDCE 10-8
BERT Definitions
PRBS 10-2
Bit Error Rate 10-2
Blocks 10-2
Block Error Rate 10-2
Block Sizes 10-2
BERT Menu Selections 10-4
BERT Menu Softkeys
Pattern 10-3
Block Size 10-3
Duration 10-3
Bits/Sec 10-3
Framing 10-3
Parity 10-3
Binary and Hex Characters 4-37, 5-10, 7-12
Bit
Shifting (BSC/Charonly) 4-16, 9-3
Count 10-6
Error Rate Testing (BERT) 1-6, 10-2, B-5
Errors 10-6
Order/Sense (Char) 3-13
Oriented Lines 3-8
Oriented Protocol Setup 3-5
Oriented Protocols 2-5, 9-14, C-2
Oriented Setup Definitions 3-4
Shift 12-6
Shifting 3-17, 12-3
Bits/Sec 10-3, 13-3, 14-5
Blinking Asterisk 2-2
Blinking Characters 4-11, 8-6, 9-10
Index- 1
Block 10-2
Check Characters (BCC) 7-12
Count 10-6
Error Rate 10-2
Errors 10-6
Block Size 10-2, 10-3
Blocks, Program 4-12
Branching
Conditional 4-21
From a Trigger 5-8
Unconditional 4-25
Break 14-7
BOP Menu Selections 3-5, 3-7
Breakout Box 1-10
BCC 3-16, 8-6
BSC and Auto Configure 2-6
BSC Setup Definitions
Definitions 3-9
Selections 3-10
Buf = n 8-7
BuiTer
Loading 4-5
Data 4-5, 12-5
Empty A-3
Overflow 8-8, A-3
Capture
Data On 8-4
Memory B-3
First N Chars 8-5
Unknown Data 3-17
Caps Lock 14-7
Care Of Discs 12-16
Carriage Return Delay 13-3
Change Display 9-7
Changing Fuses D-3
Char
Menu 3-14
Setl D-9
Set 1 Test Pattern D-9
Set 2 D-10
Set 2 Test Pattern D-10
Setup 3-14
Setup Definitions 3-12
Setup Selections 3-13
Character
Code 13-3
Control 5-11
Decoding 9-3
Excluding 5-11
Flags and Frame Check 5-11
Frame Sizes vs Data Code 4-17
Framing B-4
Masking Out 5-11
Oriented Protocols (COPs) 2-6, 3-11, 3-19
Oriented Protocols BSC C-2
Parity 5-11
String 5-10, 7-12
Trigger 4-14, 5-9
Checksum Error A-3
Clear Screen 14-7
Clock 13-8
Slipped During Run 10-13, A-4
Speed Accuracy B-5
Collecting Data From the Line 4-5
Commenting 4-32
Programs 4-33, 10-3
Compatibility 3-23, 4-10, 7-8, 10-4, 10-7
Completion of a Test 13-5
Conditional Branching 4-21, 10-3
Configuring 3-8
Connect For Simulating 7-2
Connecting
Pod 1-4
Printer 16-2
Connectors 18-14
Printer & Remote 1-8
RS232C/V.24 1-10
Control
Extended 6-7
Characters 5-10, 7-11
InHDLC 2-5
Key 1-6, 7-11
Lead Hand Shaking 13-4
Interface ~ SetLead 10-4
Controller 14-3
Configuration 11-11
Download 11-5, 11-6
Controlling Interface Leads ~ SetLead 7-16
Conversion Error; Menus Reset A-4
Copy Disc Utility 12-20
Copying Discs 12-219
Cord - Power 1-2
Countable Events 4-19
Index - 2
Counter 4-20, 9-3, 9-5, 10-3, 12-5, B-4
Inc Ctr 4-7
Counting
Parity Errors 4-20
Positive Lead Changes 4-20
cross patching, breakout boxes 1-10
Cursor 1-6
Memory 9-4
Timing 4-18, 9-3, 9-13
Timing Limits 9-15
Dbit 6-3, 6-8
Data
Buffer 4-5
Capturing 3-18
Code Field 14-4
Code Tables G-1
Codes B-3
Error - Sync Lost 10-13, A-4
Filter 4-8, 4-18, 8-3, 8-4
Link Interface C-2
Only 12-2
Packet Fields 6-9
Packets C-7
Rates 2-3, 3-2
Screen 10-5
Screen Definitions 10-6
Superfluous 3-17
Transfer 11-4
Transfer Rates (bps) B-3
Transmission Modes B-3
Data Filter Menu 13-5
Data Filter Menu Deflnitions 8-4
Data Filter Setup Menu 8-3
Data and State Format 4-15, 8-6, 9-8, 9-11
DCEBERT 10-8
Setup 10-9
DCE Only 8-6, 9-8, 9-11
Decoding 12-4
Characters 9-3
Packets In X.25 3-5
High Level Protocols 9-4
Decrementing Counters 4-20
Deflnitions
Bit Oriented Setup 3^
BSC Setup 4-7
Char Oriented Setup 3-12
DEL 15-9
Delay 4-26
Output 10-4
Output -Wait 104
Delaying
Characters or Leads 7-18
Output 4-26
Output -Wait 7-18
Delete 12-5, 12-23
Application 11-10
Block 4-9, 4-12, 7-7
File 12-5
Line 4-9, 4-12, 7-7
Prg 5-10, 7-7
Deleting
Characters 4-12
Lines and Blocks 4-12
Directory
Dir 12-3, 12-23
Full A-5
Listing 15-8
Too Large A-6
Disc based analyzer 14-10
Disc Drive 1-6, 12-2,12-16
Checks D-6
Cleaning 12-17
Disc
Format Check D-6
Full A-5
Not Formatted A-5
Out A-6
Read Error; Buffer Data Invalid A-6
Read/Write Check D-7
Removed During a Read Operation A-6
Sectors 12-15
STORAGE 3-3
Transportation 1-2
Disconnect Switches 1-10, 18-8, 18-10, 18-13, 18-
21
Display B-4
Formats 3-8, 8-6, B-5
Functions Field 14-5
Message 4-33
Mode 5-4
Test D-8
Index - 3
Display Format
DTE 8-6
DCE 8-6
Two Line 8-6
Data and State 8-6
Packet 8-6
Frame 8-6
Display Bottom 14-7
Display Top 14-7
Displaying Data 8-6, 9-8
DLC Error 4-36, 7-19, A-7
Download 11-4
Application 11-5, 11-10
Data 11-6, 11-10
Menus 11-6, 11-10
Drive Error A-5
Drop Sync
Error Checking 3-13
Characters (Synchronous mode only) 3-13
DTE Only 8-6, 9-8, 9-10
Duplicate Trigger 5-6
Duration 10-3
EBCD Character Conversion Table G-12
EBCDIC Character Conversion Table G-5
EBCDIK F-4
Character Conversion Table F-13
ECB 12-2, 12-13
Echo Field 14-5
Edit Character String 7-12
Elapsed Seconds 10-6
Electromagnetic Capability B-2
Eliminating Superfluous Data 3-18
Eliminating Idles 3-18
Emulator, Terminal 1-5, 14-2
Specifications 14-3
Enable Keyboard 11-8
End Frame 4-37, 7-13
End of Data Segment 12-20, A-7
End of
Disc File 12-19, A-7
Valid Data 12-19, A-8
End Time 9-7
End-to-End Testing 10-14
Ending Remote Operations 11-3
ENQ/ACK Handshake 13-4, 14-11
EOF error A-7
Equipment Supplied 17-2
Error
Checking 3-16, 7-12, B-4
Trigger 4-14,5-12
Error Messages A-1
Auto Configure 2-7
Monitor 4-36
Simulate 7-19
Examine Data 9-17
BERT 10-13
Remote 11-14
Print 13-10
Error-free Seconds 10-5, 10-6
Errored Seconds 10-6
Evaluate Data 1-14
Examine Data 1-12, 1-14, 12-1, 12-3, 12-5, F-4
Examine Data Menu 13-5
Examine Data Error Messages 9-17
No Data in Buffer 9-17
No displayable data in buffer 9-17
Disc Removed During Read 9-17
Disc Read Error 9-17
End of Valid Data 9-17
Start of Valid Data 9-17
No More Highlights 9-17
End of Disc File 9-17
End of Data Segment 9-18
Start of Data Segment 9-18
Examine Data Menu Features 9-3
Viewing Timers and Counters 9-3
Bit Shifting 9-3
Decoding Characters 9-3
Cursor Timing 9-3
Decoding High Level Protocols 9-4
Cursor Memory 9-4
Extended Memory Board 9-4
Examine Data Menu Softkeys 9-5
Hex/Text 9-5
Roll Up/Roll Down 9-5
Next Page/Prev Page 9-5
Timer/Cntr 9-5
Spec Block 9-5
NextHilit 9-6
Next Segment/Prev Segment 9-6
Bit Shift 9-6
Start Time/End Time 9-6
Change Display 9-7
Print Summary/Data
Index - 4
Examples
1: Measuring a Single RTS-CTS Delay 16-2
2: Monitoring a DCE 13-3
3: Monitoring a DTE 16-3
4: FOX Message 16-5
5: Counting Parity Errors 16-6
6: Measuring Many RTS-CTS Delays 16-8
7: Simulating RTS-CTS Delay 16-10
8: Loopback 16-12
9: END-TO-END (Transmit First) 16-14
10: END-TO-END (Receive First) 16-16
Counting Errors 7-14
Excluding Characters 5-11
Execute 17-7
Execute Run 11-8
Execute Key 12-4, 12-5, 12-6, 12-9, 14-7
Executing 4-12
Monitor Programs ~ The Run Menu 4-12
Exit Key 10-5
Exploding Diamond (<>) 8-8
ETX
Addr (HDLC) 3-4
Ctri (HDLC) 3-4
Video 1-8
EXT 3-16
Extended
Address 3-5, 6-7
Address and Control In HDLC 3-5
Addressing 6-4
Asynchronous Baud Rates 3-22
Capture Buffer 12-2, 12-13
Control 3-5, 6-7
Memory Board (Option 002) 9-4, 12-2, 12-11
Menus Only 12-2
Tests D-11
External Video Output E-1
F= Final C-4
Failed Error Check 8-6
Fan 1-8
FCS 8-6
Features - Major 1-5
Filtering 4-28
nags 7-13
Check Characters 5-11, 7-13
Frame Check Characters 5-11, 7-13
Format 12-4, 12-5, 12-24
Frame 8-3
Frame
Bits 8^
Check Characters 10-8
Display Format 8-6
Only 8-6
Type 6-5
Framing 3-17, 10-3
Framing error 8-6, A-9
Frequency 1-2
Front Panel 1-7
Full Breakout Box 18-8
Full Duplex Data 8-6
Fuse Holder 1-8
Getting Started Guide 1-2
GFI 6-3
GFI Field 6-7, 6-8
Gosub Block 4-8, 7-6
Goto Block 4-8, 7-6
Grounding Requirements 1-2
H
Half Duplex Data 8-6
Handling Of Discs 12-16
Handshake 13-3
Error A-9
Field 14-5
Handshaking Requirements 7-10
Hardware Handshake 14-11
HDLC Setup 3-6
Hex 4-37, 12-5
Hex Entry 14-7
Hex/Text 8-7, 9-5
Hexadecimal
Characters 13-8
Entry and Parity 3-14, 3-15
Equivalent 5-10
Highlight 4-8, 4-13, 4-15, 7-6, B-4
Hookup 4-3
Hookup - Printer 13-2
HP 18160A (VJ5 and RS 232CInterface) 15-2, 15-
3, 15-15, 15-17, B-9
Index - 5
HP 18174A (RS-449/422A/423A) 15-3, 15-12, B-9
HP 18177A/G Interface (VJ5 Interface) 15-3, 15-
14, B-9
HP 18179A (RS-232C/V^) 1-11, 15-5, 15-21, B-9
HP 18180A (RS-232/VJ14 and RS-449/422A/423A)
15-2, 15-3, 15-8, B-9
HP 18260A (RS-232/V^ and X^l) 15-2, 15-10, B-9
HP 18268A ISDN Sofhvare 15-20
HP 18270A ISDN Interface Module 15-20
Issue ID Request to Enable Slave A-11
JIS Option F-1
JIS-7 F-3
JIS-8 F-3
Jumper Pins 18-8, 18-10, 18-13, 18-21
I
I-Frame Fields 6-5
ID Slave 11-8
Identify slave 14-2
Idles 2-7, 3-18, 7-12
If 4-7, 7-5
Counter 4-22
Lead 4-21
Improper Format A-10
Inc Cntr by n 4-7, 7-5
Initial Inspection 1-2
Iiyect 10 Errors 10-7
Iiyect Error 10-7
Insert Block 4-9, 7-7
Insert Line 4-8, 7-7
Inserting
Characters 4-12
Blocks 4-12
Discs 12-18
Lines and Blocks 4-12
Instrument Connector 1-10, 18-9
Instrument Hook-up 1-13
Interface
Accessories B-9
Pod 1-8, 15-2
Pod Installation 15-4
Inv Video D-10
Invalid
File Name A-10
File Type A-10
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu 6-31, 8-8, A-10
Invalid Sync Characters 2-7, A-11
IPARS 2-3
Character Conversion Table G-16
Setup 3-19
ISDN Interface Module 15-20
Isochronous Mode 10-9, 10-12
K
Keyboard 1-6, B-4
Test D-8
LAPD 15-20
Latching Relays 18-7
LCD Indicators 18-11, 18-14
LCGN Field 6-8
LCN 6-3
Field 6-7, 6-8
Lead
Changes 8-4, 9-13
Control 7-16, 14-10
Handshake 7-3
Levels 13-9
Status 7-16, B-4
Trigger 4-14, 4-21, 5-12
LEDs 1-10, 18-7, 18-14, 18-20
Level 2 6-2
and 3 Assisted Mode 5-11, 7-14
Softkeys 6-4
Levels 6-2, C-6
Softkeys 6-7
Line
Data 4-5
Switch 1-8
Terminators 13-3
Voltage Selection 1-2, D-3
Line Forcing, breakout box 1-10
Load 12^
Buffer 9-2
Load From Disc 12-7
Load Files Larger than Buffer 12-7
Lock Keyboard 11-3
Index - 6
Lockout Slave's Keyboard 11-3
Loop Tests D-S
Loopback Testing 10-15
M
Major Features 1-5
Manual Flow Control 14-11
Masking Characters 5-11
Mark/Space Indicator 1-10, 18-8, 18-11, 18-14,
18-21
Marking Triggers 4-15
Beep and Highlight 4-15
Mass Storage 15-1, B-3
Mass Store 1-12
Device 12-3
Menu 12-3, 13-5
Max Length 4-36, A-11
Max Strings 4-36, A-12
Maximum Count 4-19
Maximum Cursor Time 12-17
Measuring Time 4-16, 6-9, 10-3
Media Wear Protected A-12
Memory Blocks 12-15
Menu & Data 12-8, 12-9, 12-14
Menu - Top Level 1-12
Menu Full 4-36, A-12
Menus Incompatible with HP 4952A A-12
Menus Only 12-2
Message 4-8, 4-33, 7-6
Message Statements 4-10, 4-32
Microfloppy Disc Drive 1-5
Mod 6-8
Mode Field 14-5
Modem
Handshaking 11-12
Operations 11-12
String 11-12
Modified Error Check (MEC) 3-21
Mon Menu 1-12, 4-6
Monitor Error Messages 4-36
Max Length 4-36
Max Strings 4-36
Menu Full 4-36
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu 4-36
No File; Run Aborted 4-36
File Already Exists 4-36
DLC Error 4-36
Monitor Status Messages
Text 4-37
Not Text 4-37
Hex 4-37
Not Hex 4-37
Binary 4-37
End Frame 4-37
Start Flag 4-37
Monitor Menu 4-6, 13-5, F-3
Monitor Menu Softkey Commands 4-7
Monitor
Line 4-2, 8-2
Buffer 4-2, 8-2
Programs 5-12
Monitoring 1-5
Buffer 4-2, 4-5
Line 4-2, 4-3
Monosync Mode 11-4
MORE key 1-6, 1-12, 4-11, 4-32
Move Cursor 4-9, 4-11, 7-7
Multiple Triggers 5-5
MSD=Disc 12-2, 12-3, 12-11
MSD=RAM 12-2, 12-3, 12-11
N
N(R) 6-5
N(S) 6-5
NAK 5-9
Next Page 9-5
NextHilit 9-5
Next Segment 9-4, 9-5, 9-6
No Application Loaded A-13
No Data in BuflPer 12-19
No Data in Capture Bulger A-13
No Data Present 10-13, A-14
No File 6-31, A-14
No Idles A-14
No More Highlights 12-19, A-16
No Pod Attached 3-7, 8-8, A-15
No Sync Characters A-15
Non LIE format A-15
Nonstandard
Baud Rate A-15
Protocols 3-19
NONVOLATILE MEMORY 3-3
Not Text 4-37
NRZI 2-3, 12-9
Index - 7
Off - Turning the HP 4952A Off 1-4
On -Turning the HP 4952A 1-4
Operating Characteristics B-3
Option 002 12-4
Optional Memory Board 15-7
Options B-8
ORing Triggers 5-5
Original Packaging D-11
OSI Level 2 and 3 Tables C-1
Other Packaging D-11
Other Packet Types 8-9
Other Tests 13-11
Output
Printer 1-6
EXT Video 1-8
Overlapping Triggers 5-6
P/F 6-3
P=Poll C4
Pack Disc 12-5, 12-24
Packaging D-11
Packet Construction (MODULO 8) C-6
Packet Display Format 8-6, 9-8, 9-12
Packet-Type Field 6-7, 6-9
Panel
Front 1-6
Rear 1-8
Parity 4-12, 5-6, 8-6, 10-3, 13-3, B-4
Bits 7-13
Field 14-5
Pattern 13-3
Pause, Program 4-26
Performance Verification D-5
Pod 1-10
Cable 1-10
Connecting 1-4
Hookup 1-13
Interface 15-2
Installation 15-4
Poll/Final bits 6-4
Post-processing 4-5
Power Cable D-2
Part Numbers D-4
Power
Cord 1-2
Requirements D-2
Power Up and Power Down 1-4
PRBS 10-2
PrevPage 9-4, 9-5
Prev Segment 9-4, 9-5, 9-6
Prg = n 8-7
Print
Data 9-7
Dir 12-6, 12-24
ECB 13-7
Prog 4-9, 7-7
Summary 9-7
Output 13-6
RAM 12-14
Print Error Messages 13-10
Handshake Error 13-10
Printer Error 13-10
Remote Timeout 13-10
Print Keys
Setup Menu 13-6
Monitor Menu 13-6
Simulate Menu 13-6
Data Filter Menu 13-6
BERT Menu 13-6
BERT Results 13-6
Remote Menu 13-6
Mass Store Menu 13-6
Printer
Display 13-8
Output 1-6, 13-6
Error 16-6, A-16
Hookup 13-2
Setup 13-3
Problem Solving Accessories B-7
Program Blocks 4-12
Program Pauses 4-26
Programmability 5-2
Prompt 4-33
Protocol 3-2, B-3
Unusual Settings 3-19
Pseudo Random Bit Sequence 10-2
Q
Q.921/Q.931 15-20
Q and D bit 6-3
Quick Brown Fox Tests 10-16
Index - 8
RAMDisc 12-12
Rear Panel 1-8, 1-9
Receive
First 19-14
COPs 12-15
Receiver Overrun 8-8, A-16
Record not found A-17
Recover 12-5
Reference Trigger 4-13, 4-28
Following a Trigger 5-3
REJ Packet 6-9
Start of Execution 5-2
Stop Execution 5-3
Remote & Print 1-12
Remote
BERT 11-10
Capability B-5
Data Transfer 11-4
Menu 11-11, 13-5
Operations 11-3
Restrictions 11-3
Setup 11-2
Testing 1-5
Timeout 11-4, A-17
Remote Controller Soft keys 11-9
ID Slave 11-9
Slave Status 11-9
Execute Run 11-9
Reset Slave 11-9
Timers and Counter 11-9
Lock Keyboard 11-9
Enable Keyboard 11-9
Run Application 11-10
Download Application 11-10
Upload Application 11-10
Download Menu 11-10
Delete Application 11-10
Download Data 11-10
Upload Data 11-10
Remote BERT 11-10
Remote Controller Configuration 11-11
Remote Data Transfer 11-4
Remote Operations 11-3
Resetting to Top Level 11-3
Lockout Slave's Keyboard 11-3
Ending Remote Operations 11-3
Remote Restrictions 11-3
Data Transfer 11-4
Remote Slave Configuration 11-11
Remote Status Messages 11-14
Application Cannot Be Run on 4952 11-14
Application Already Loaded 11-14
Invalid Application for 4952 11-14
Menus Incompatible with 4952 11-14
Must Reset Slave First 11-14
No Data in Buffer 11-14
No Application Resident 11-14
Reset Slave and Retry Operation 11-14
Remote/Printer 1-8
Removing a Disc 12-18
Rename 12-6
Requirements 13-7
Grounding 1-2
Reset 1-5, 1-12, 4-8, 7-6
Application 1-5
Menus 1-5
Slave 11-3, 11-9
Timer 4-17
Resetting Counters 4-20
Resetting To Top Level 11-3
Restoring 12-23
Return 4-8, 6-29, 7-7
RNR Packet 6-9
Roll Up and Roll Down 9-5, 12-11
RR Packet 6-9
RS-232/V^ 15-2
Connectors 1-10
Interfaces 15-2
Pod Configuration - Monitor Mode 15-17
Pod Configuration - Simulating a DCE 15-18
Pod Configuration - Simulating a DTE 15-18
RS-449 Interfaces 15-3
Rules For Hexadecimal Entry and Parity 3-15
Run Application 11-8
Run Menu 1-12, 8-2, 13-5, F-4
Executing 5-13
Run Menu Softkeys 8-2
Monitor Line 8-2
Monitor Buffer 8-2
Simulate 8-3
Data Filter 8-3
Index -9
Run-Time Messages 8-7
Hex/Text 8-7
Stop Display/Start Display 8-7
Buf = n 8-7
Prg = n 8-7
Summary/Data Display 8-7
Exploding Diamond 8-8
No Pod Attached 8-8
Buffer Overflow 8-8
Receiver Overrun 8-8
Invalid Monitor/Simulate Menu
Running a BERT Test 10-5
S-Frame Fields 6-5
Saving Setups 3-3
SDLC Setup 3-6
Seek Error A-17
Selecting LevI3 Before LevI2 6-7
Selection - Line Voltage 1-2
Selections
BOP Menu 3-7
BSC 3-10
Char Menu 3-13
Self Test 1-12
Send 5-8, 7-9
Strings 9-13, B-5
'When' Strings 6-2
Sending Characters 7-9, 7-10
Sending Idles 7-12
Sequencing Triggers 5-6
Service Information D-1
Set Lead 5-9, 7-6, 7-9
Setup 1-12
Setting Leads 6-2, 7-6
Setup 2-2, 3-2, 4-4, 5-5
Printer 13-3
Definitions - Bit Oriented 4-5
Menu 1-14, 2-3, 13-5, F-2
Softkey 3-2
Setup Summary 10-5
Setup = Simulate 14-6
Shifted JIS-7 F-8
Shipment 1-2
Shutter 15-3
Sim Menu 1-12
Simulate Menu 8-2, 13-5, 14-6
Simulate Error Messages
Max Length 7-19
Max Strings 7-19
Menu Full 7-19
Invalid Mon/Sim Menu 7-19
No File; Run Aborted 7-19
File Already Exists 7-19
DLC Error 7-19
Simulate Functions
Send 7-9
Set Lead 7-9
Wait 7-9
Simulate Softkeys 7-5
Start 7-5
Stop 7-5
Inc Ctr 7-5
If 7-5
When Trig 7-5
Send 7-5
Highlight 7-6
Beep 7-6
Reset 7-6
Goto Blk 7-6
Set Lead 7-6
Wait 7-6
Message 7-6
Gosub Block 7-6
Return 7-7
Insert Line 7-7
Insert Block 7-7
Delete Line 7-7
Delete Block 7-7
Delete Prg 7-7
Print Prog 7-7
MoveCrsr 7-7
Simulate Status Messages
Text 7-20
Not Text 7-20
Hex 7-20
Not Hex 7-20
Binary 7-20
End Frame 7-20
Start Flag 7-20
Functions 10-4
Menu 9-5
Simulating 1-5
Connecting 7-2
Measurements 10-1
Requirements 9-4
Index- 10
Single Sided Disc A-17
Skip the First N Chars 8-5
Slave
Configuration 11-11
ID 11-9
Status 11-9
Slave Upload 11-7
Application 11-8
Data 11-8
Menu 11-8
Softkey Programming 4-11
Software Handshake 14-11
Softkey Trigger 4-14, 5-15
Source Pins 1-10
Special Characters 13-9
Specifications 17-3
Specify Block 9-5
Speed 2-7
Stamps - Time 4-18
Start 4-29
Start Time 9-3, 9-7
Start and Stop Timer 4-28
Start
Flag 4-37, 5-11, 9-14
Flag Time Stamp 12-16
Data Segment 12-20
Valid Data 12-19, A-18
Timer 4-7
Disc 4-7, 4-29
Display 4-7
Start of Execution 5-2
Start/Stop Display 4-28
Startup Tests 10-16
Stop 7-5
Stop Execution 5-3
Stop Time 9-3
Stop
Disc 4-7, 4-29
Display/Start Display 4-7, 8-7
Tests 4-7, 4-17, 4-31
Timer 4-17
Store 12-4, 12-9
Storing To Disc 12-9
Directly from Line 12-10
FromECB 12-14
Strings 10-7
STX 3-16
Subprograms 4-34, 10-4
Gosub Block and Return 4-34
Summary/Data Display 8-7
Summary Softkey 2-2
Superfluous Data 4-17
Suppress character 3-9
Switch
Disconnect 1-10
Line 1-8
Sync Characters 3-15
Invalid 2-7
Lost 13-8
Lost one or more times 10-13, A-18
On (ESC) 3-15
Synchronization 13-7
Synchronous Mode 10-9, 10-11
Tape To Disc File Transfer 11-13
Temperature B-2
Terminal
Emulation 1-5, 14-2
Operation 14-8
Setup 14-4
Testing
Bit Error Rate (BERT) 1-6
Remote 1-5
Text 4-37, 12-5
Three-state activity 1-10
Time
Interval 12-7
Limit 2-7
Stamps 4-18, 8-4, 9-14
Timer and Counter 4-26, 9-5, 11-8
Timers 4-16, 5-14, 7-15, 9-3, 9-5, B-4
Timing
Information 4-18, 8^, 9-13, 9-16
Resolution 9-14
Top Level Menu 1-12
Track 15-9
Transcode Character Conversion Table G-14
Transmit
Characters ~ Send 7-10
First 19-12
Transmitted COPs 12-15
Transmitting Characters - Send 7-10
Transparent Text (Char) 3-12
Transportation Disc 1-2, 15-3, 15-3
Trigger Events 5-2
Index- 11
Triggering 4-13
On Errors 4-14, 5-2
On Leads 4-14, 5-2
OnSoftkeys 4-14, 5-2
On Timers 4-14, 5-2
Triggering on Characters
Binary 5-9
Control 5-9
Don't Care 5-10
Hex 5-9
Not 5-10
Text 5-9
Triggers 4-13, B-4
Types 4-14
Multiple 5-5
Overlapping 5-6
Sequencing 5-6
Trigger Types 4-14, 5-4
Two Line Format 8-6, 9-8, 9-9
Types Of BOP Frames C-3
IVpes of Triggers 4-14
u
U-frame 6-6
Unconditional Branching 4-25
Unknown Data - Capturing 3-17
Unnumbered Format
Commands (P = Poll, F= Final) C-4
Format Responses C-4
Unusual Protocol Settings 3-19
Upload to Controller 1-4
Application 11-8
Data 11-8
Usage E-2
Using a Delay Repeatedly 4-35
Using the JIS Option F-2
Using the HP 4952A 1-13
Using the Setup Menu 3-2
Using Timers \^ith Send 7-15
Utility Disc 12-20
Simulating a DCE 15-19
Value for N 11-5
Video
EXT 1-6, 1-8
Monitors E-2
Output 1-6
Pattern D-10
Viewing the Buffer 9-2, 9-3
Viewing Timers and Counters 9-3
VT-100 Terminal Emulation 14-9
w
Wait 4-27, 7-9, 7-18
Waiting
For Data 2-6, A-18
For Idles 2-6, A-18
Weight B-2
When Trig 4-7
Softkey Triggers 4-11
Statement 4-13, 5-2
Wraparound 11-8
Write
Protected A-19
Protecting a Disc 12-19
X.21 3-5, 12-9
X.21 Portion 15-11
X.25 Packet Switched Network 11-13
X.25 Setup 3-6, 15-20
X.75 3-21
XOn/XOff Hand Shaking 13-4
Y-cable 1-10, 1-13, 4-3, 7-2
VJ5 Interfaces 15-3
V35 Pod Configuration
Monitor Mode 15-19
Zero Bit Insertion 3-5, 3-11, 7-14
Zero Bit Extraction 3-5, 3-11
index- 12
SALES OFFICES
Arranged alphabetically by country
Q
HEADQUARTERS OFFICES
If there is no sales office listed for your area, contact one of these
headquarters offices.
ASIA
Hewlett-Paclcard Asia Ltd.
22/F Bond Centre, West Tower
89 Queensway, Central
HONGKONG
6.P.O. Box 863, Hong Kong
Tel: 5-8487777
Telex: 76793 HPAHX
Cable: HPASIALTD
CANADA
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
6877 Goreway Drive
MISSISSAUGA, Ontario L4V 1M8
Tel: (416) 678-9430
Telex: 069-8644
EASTERN EUROPE
Hewlett-Pacl(ard Ges.m.b.h.
Lleblgasse 1
P.0.B0X 72
A-1222 VIENNA, Austria
Tel: (222) 2500-0
Telex: 13 4425 HEPA A
NORTHERN EUROPE
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
V. D. Hooplaan 241
P.O.Box 999
NL-118LN15AMSTELVEEN
The Netherlands
Tel: 20 5479999
Telex: 18919 hpner
SOUTH EAST EUROPE
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
World Trade Center
1 10 Avenue Louis-Casai
1215 Cointrin, GENEVA, Switeerland
Tel: (022) 98 96 51
Telex: 27225 hpser
Mail Address:
P.O. Box
CH-1217 Meyrin 1
GENEVA
Switzerland
MIDDLE EAST
AND CENTRAL AFRICA
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
Middle East/Central
Africa Sales H.Q.
7, rue du Bols-du-Lan
P.O. Box 364
CH-1217 Meyrin 1
GENEVA
Switzerland
Tel: (022) 83 12 12
Telex: 27835 hmeach
Telefax: (022) 83 IS 35
European Operations
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
150, Route duNantd'Avril
1217 Meyrin 2
GENEVA, Switzerland
Tel: 41 22/838111
UNITED KINGDOM
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Nine Mile Ride
WOKINGHAM
Berkshire, RG113LL
Tel: 0344 773100
Telex: 848805/848814/848912
UNITED STATES OF
AMERICA
Customer Information Center
(800)752-0900
6:00 AM to 5 PM Pacific Time
EASTERN USA
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4 Choke Cherry Road
ROCKVILLE,MD 20850
Tel: (301) 670-4300
MIDWESTERN USA
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5201 Tollview Drive
ROLLING MEADOWS, IL 60008
Tel: (312) 255-9800
SOUTHERN USA
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2015 South Park Place
ATLANTA, GA 30339
Tel: (404) 955-1500
WESTERN USA
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5161 Lankershim Blvd.
NORTH HOLLYWOOD, CA 91601
Tel: (818) 505-5600
OTHER
INTERNATIONAL
AREAS
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Intercontinental Headquarters
3495 Deer Creek Road
PALO ALTO, CA 94304
Tel: (415) 857-5027
Telex: 034-8300
Cable: HEWPACK
ALGERIA
Hewlett-Packard Trading S.A.
Bureau de Liaison Alger
Villa des Lions
9, Hal Galloul
DZ-BORDJELBAHRI
Tel: 76 03 36
Telex: 63343 dliondz
ANGOLA
Telectra Angola LDA
Empresa Ticnica de Equlpamentos
16 rue Cons. Julio de Vilhema
LUANDA
Tel: 35515,35516
Telex: 3134
ARGENTINA
Hewlett-Packard Argentina S.A.
Montaneses 2140/50
1428 BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 541-11-1441
Telex: 22796 HEW PAC-AR
BiotronS.A.C.I.M.e.l.
Av. Paso Colon 221, Piso 9
1399 BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 541-333-490,
541-322-587
Telex: 17595 BIONAR
Laboratorlo Rodriguez
Corswant S.R.L.
Misiones, 1156-1876
Bernal, Oeste
BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 252-3958, 252-4991
Intermaco S.R.L.
Florida 537/71
Galeria Jardin - Local 28
1005 BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 393-4471/1928
Telex: 22796 HEW PAC-AR
Argentina Esanco S.R.L.
A/ASCO 2328
1416 BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 541-58-1981, 641-59-2767
Telex: 22796 HEW PAC-AR
All Computers S.A.
Montaneses 2140/50 5 Piso
1428 BUENOS AIRES
Tel: 781-4030/4039/783-4886
Telex: 18148 Ocme
AUSTRALIA
Customer Information Centre
Tel: (008)033821
Adelaide, South
Australia Office
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
153 Greenhill Road
PARKSIDE,S.A.5063
Tel: 61-8-272-5911
Telex: 82536
Cable: HEWPARD Adelaide
Brisbane, Queensland
Office
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
10 Payne Road
THE GAP, Queensland 4061
Tel: 61-7-300-4133
Telex: 42133
Cable: HEWPARD Brisbane
Canberra, Australia
Capital Territory
Office
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
Thynne Street, Fern Hill Park
BRUCE, ACT. 2617
P.O. Box 257,
JAMISON, A.C.T. 2614
Tel: 61-62-80-4244
Telex: 62650
Cable: HEWPARD Canberra
Melbourne, Victoria
Office
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
P.O. Box 221
BUCKBURN, Victoria 3130
Tel: (03) 895-2895
Telex: 31-024
Cable: HEWPARD Melbourne
Perth,
Western Australia
OHice
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
Herdsman Business Park
CUREMONT,W.A.6010
Tel: 61-9-383-2188
Telex: 93859
Cable: HEWPARD Perth
Sydney, New South
Wales Office
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
17-23 Talavera Road
P.O. Box 308
NORTHRYDE,N.S.W.2113
Tel: 61-2-888-4444
Telex: 21561
Cable: HEWPARD Sydney
AUSTRIA
Hewlett-Packard Ges.m.b.h.
Verkaufsbuero Graz
Grottenhofstrasse 94
A-8052 GRAZ
Tel: 43-316-291-5660
Telex: 312375
Hewlett-Packard Ges.m.b.h.
Lleblgasse 1
P.O. Box 72
A-1222 VIENNA
Tel: 43-222-2500
Telex: 134425 HEPA A
BAHRAIN
Green Salon
P.O. Box 557
MANAMA
Tel: 255503-250950
Telex: 84419
Wael Pharmacy
P.O. Box 648
MANAMA
Tel: 256123
Telex: 8550 WAEL BN
Zayani Computer Systems
218 Shaik Mubarak Building
Government Avenue
P.O. Box 5918
MANAMA
Tel; 276278
Telex: 9015 plans bn
BELGIUM
Hewlett-Packard Belgium S.A./N.V.
BlvddelaWoluwe, 100
Woluwedal
B-1200 BRUSSELS
Tel: (02) 32-2-761-31-11
Telex: 23494 hewpac
BERMUDA
Applied Computer Technologies
Atlantic House Building
P.O. Box HM 2091
Par-La-Ville Road
HAMILTON 5
Tel: 295-1616
Telex: 380 3589/ACTBA
BOLIVIA
Arrellano Ltda
Av.20deOctubre#2125
Casilla 1383
LA PAZ
Tel: 368541
BRAZIL
Tesis Informatica S.A.
Alameda RIo Negro, 750-1. AND.
ALPHAVHIE
06400 BaruerISP
Tel: (Oil) 421.1311
Telex: (011) 71351 HPBR BR
Cable: HEWPACK Sao Paulo
Hewlett-Packard do Brasll S.A.
Praia de Botafago 228-A-614
6.AND.-CONJ.601
Ediflcio Argentina -Ala A
22250 RIODE JANEIRO, RJ
Tel: (021) 552-6422
Telex: 21905 HPBR BR
Cable: HEWPACK Rio de Janeiro
Van Den Cientlfica Ltda.
Rua Jose Bonifacio, 458
Todos OS Santos
20771 RIODE JANEIRO, RJ
Tel: (021) 593-8223
Telex: 33487 EGLB BR
ANAIulEDI.C.E.i.Ltda.
Rua Vergueiro, 360
04012 SAO PAULO, SP
Tel: (01 1)572-1 106
Telex: 1 124740 AMED BR
BRUNEI
Komputer Wisman Sdn Bhd
G6, Chandrawaseh Cmplx,
Jalan Tutong
P.O. Box 1297,
BANDAR 8ERIBEGAWAN
NEGARABRUNIDARUSSAUUI
Tel: 673-2-2000-70/26711
CAMEROON
Beriac
B. P. 23
DOUALA
Tel: 420153
Telex: 5351
CANADA
Alberta
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
3030 3rd Avenue N.E.
CALGARY, Alberta T2A6T7
Tel: (403) 235-3100
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
11120-178th Street
EDMONTON, Alberta T5S1P2
Tel: (403) 486-6666
British Columbia
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
10691 Shelibridge Way
RICHMOND,
British Columbia VOX 2W8
Tel: (604) 270-2277
Telex: 610-922-5059
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
121 -3350 Douglas Street
VICTORIA, British Columbia V8Z 3L1
Tel: (604) 381-6616
Manitoba
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
1825 Inkster Blvd.
WINNIPEG, Manitoba R2X1R3
Tel: (204) 694-2777
SALES OFFICES
Arranged alphabetically by country (cont'd)
CANADA (Cont'd)
New Brunswick
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
814 Main Street
MONCTON, New Brunswick E1C 1E6
Tel: (506) 855-2841
Nova Scotia
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
Suite 111
900 Windmill Road
DARTMOUTH, Nova Scotia B3B 1P7
Tel: (902) 469-7820
Ontario
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
3325 N. Service Rd., Unit W03
BURLINGTON, Ontario L7N3G2
Tel: (416) 335-8644
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
552 Newbold Street
LONDON, Ontario N6E2S5
Tel: (519) 686-9181
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
6877 Goreway Drive
MISSISSAUGA, Ontario L4V 1M8
Tel: (416) 678-9430
Telex: 069-83644
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
2670 Queensview Dr.
OHAWA, Ontario K2B 8K1
Tel: (613) 820-6483
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
3790 Victoria Park Ave.
WILLOWDALE, Ontario M2H3H7
Tel: (416) 499-2550
Quebec
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
17500 Trans Canada Higliway
South Service Road
KIRKLAND, Quebec H9J 2X8
Tel: (514) 697-4232
Telex: 058-21521
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
1150 rue Claire Fontaine
QUEBEC CITY, Quebec G1R 5G4
Tel: (418) 648-0726
Olympla (Chile) Ltda.
Av. Rodrlgo de Araya 1045
Casllla2S6-V
SANTIAGO 21
Tel: 225-5044
Telex: 340892 OLYMP
Cable: Olympiacliile Santiagochlle
CHINA, People's
Republic of
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
22/F Bond Centre, West Tower
89 Queensway, Central
HONGKONG
Tel: 5-8487777
Telex: 76793 HPA HX
Cable: HP ASIA LTD
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
P.O. 80x9610, Beijing
4th Floor, 2nd Watch Factory Main
Shuang Yu Shou, Bel San Huan Road
Hal Dian District
BEIJING
Tel: 33-1947 33-7426
Telex: 22601 CTSHP CN
Cable: 1920 Beijing
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
CHP Shanghai Branch
23/F Shanghai Union Building
100 Yan An Rd. East
SHANG-HAI
Tel: 265550
Telex: 33571 CHPSB CN
Cable: 3416 Shanghai
COLOMBIA
Instrumentaclon
H. A. Langebaek & Kier S.A.
Carrerra 4A No. 52A-26
Apartado Aereo 6287
BOGOTA 1, D.E.
Tel: 212-1466
Telex: 44400 INST CO
Cable: AARIS Bogota
Nefromedicas Ltda.
Calle 123 No. 9B-31
Apartado Aereo 100-958
BOGOTA D.E., 10
Tel: 213-5267, 213-1615
Telex: 43415 HEGAS CO
Saskatchewan Compumundo
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd. Avenida 15 # 107-80
130 Robin Crescent BOGOTA D.E.
SASKATOON, Saskatchewan S7L 6M7 Tel: 57-214-4458
Tel: (306) 242-3702 Telex: 39642450 COMPU CO
CHILE
ASC Ltda.
Austria 2041
SANTIAGO
Tel: 223-5946, 223-6148
Telex: 392-340192 ASC CK
Jorge Calcagni y Cia
Av. Italia 634 Santiago
Casilla 16475
SANTIAGO 9
Tel: 9-011-562-222-0222
Telex: 392440283 JCYCL CZ
Metrolab S.A.
Monjitas 454 of. 206
SANTIAGO
Tel: 395752, 398296
Telex: 340866 METLAB CK
Carvajal, S.A.
Calle 29 Norte No. 6A-40
Apartado Aereo 46
CALI
Tel: 9-01 1-57-3-621888
Telex: 39655650 CUJCL CO
CONGO
Seric-Congo
B. P. 2105
BRAZZAVILLE
Tel: 815034
Telex: 5262
COSTA RICA
Clentlflca Costarrlcense S.A.
Avenida 2, Calle 5
San Pedro de Monies de Oca
Apartado 10159
SAN JOSE
Tel: 9-011-506-243-820
Telex: 3032367 GALGUR CR
0. Fischel R. Y. Cia. S.A.
Apartados 434-10174
SAN JOSE
Tel: 23-72-44
Telex: 2379
Cable: OFIR
CYPRUS
Telerexa Ltd.
P.O. Box 1152
Valentine House
8 Stassandrou St.
NICOSIA
Tel: 45 628, 62 698
Telex: 5845 tirx cy
DENMARK
Hewlett-Packard A/S
Kongevejen 25
DK-3460 BIRKEROD
Tel: 45-02-81-6640
Telex: 37409 hpas dk
Hewlett-Packard A/S
Rolighedsvej 32
DK-8240RISSKOV,Aarhus
Tel: 45-06-17-6000
Telex: 37409 hpas dk
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Microprog S.A.
Juan Tomas Mejia y Cotes No. 60
Arroyo Hondo
SANTO DOMINGO
Tel: 565-6268
Telex: 4510 ARENTA DR (RCA)
ECUADOR
CYEDE Cia. Ltda.
Avenida Eloy Alfaro 1749
y Belgica
Casilla 6423 CCI
QUITO
Tel: 9-01 1-593-2-450975
Telex: 39322548 CYEDE ED
Medtronics
Valladolid 524 Madrid
P.O. 9171, QUITO
Tel: 2-238-951
Telex: 2298 ECUAME ED
Hospitaler S.A.
Robles 625
Casilla 3590
QUITO
Tel: 545-250, 545-122
Telex: 2485 HOSPTL ED
Cable: HOSPITAUR-Quito
Ecuador Overseas Agencies C.A.
Calle9deOctubre#818
P.O. Box 1296, Guayaquil
QUITO
Tel: 39343873 ECUOVE ED
Telex: 3361 PBCGYE ED
EGYPT
Sakrco Enterprises
P.O. Box 259
ALEXANDRIA
Tel: 802908, 808020, 805302
Telex: 54333
International Engineering
6 El Gamea Street
Agouza
CAIRO
Tel: 71-21-68134-80-940
Telex: 93830 lEA UN
Cable: INTEGASSO
Sakrco Enterprises
70 Mossadak Street
Dokki, Giza
CAIRO
Tel: 706 440, 701 087
Telex: 9337
S.S.C. Medical
40 Gezerat El Arab Street
Mohandessin
CAIRO
Tel: 803844, 805998, 810263
Telex: 20503 SSC UN
EL SALVADOR
IPESAde El Salvador S.A.
29 Avenida Norte 1223
SAN SALVADOR
Tel: 9-011-503-266-858
Telex: 301 20539 IPESA SAL
ETHIOPIA
Seric-Ethiopia
P.O. Box 2764
ADDIS ABABA
Tel: 185114
Telex: 21150
FINLAND
Hewlett-Packard Finland
Field Oy
Niittylanpoiku 10
00620 HELSINKI
Tel: (90) 757-1011
Telex: 122022 Field SF
Hewlett-Packard Oy
Piispankalliontie 17
02200 ESPOO
Tel: (90) 887-21
Telex: 121563 HEWPA SF
FRANCE
Hewlett-Packard France
Z.I. Mercure B
Rue Berthelot
13763 Les Milles Cedex
AIX-EN-PROVENCE
Tel: 33-42-59-4102
Telex: 410770F
Hewlett-Packard France
64, Rue Marchand Saillant
F-61000 ALENCON
Tel: (33) 29 04 42
Hewlett-Packard France
Batiment Levitan
2585, route de Grasse
Bretelle Autoroute
06600 ANTIBES
Tel: (93) 74-59-19
Hewlett-Packard France
28 Rue de la R^publique
Boite Postale 503
25026 BESANPON CEDEX, FRANCE
Tel: (81) 83-16-22
Telex: 361157
Hewlett-Packard France
ZA Kergaradec
Rue Fernand Forest
F-29239GOUEESNOU
Tel: (98) 41-87-90
Hewlett-Packard France
Chemin des Moullles
Boite Postale 162
69131 ECULLY Cedex (Lyon)
Tel: 33-78-33-8125
Telex: 310617F
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare d'activit^s du Bois Briard
2 Avenue du Lac
F-91040EVRY Cedex
Tel: 01/60 77-83-83
Telex: 692315F
Hewlett-Packard France
Application Center
5, avenue Raymond Chanas
38320 EYBENS (Grenoble)
Tel: (76) 62-57-98
Telex: 980124 HP GRENOB EYBE
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare Club des Tanneries
Batiment B4
4, Rue de la Faisanderie
67381 LINCOLSHEIM
(Strasbourg)
Tel: (88) 76-15-00
Telex: 890141F
Hewlett-Packard France
Centre d'affaires Paris-Nord
Batiment Ampere
Rue de la Commune de Paris
Boite Postale 300
93153 LE BLANC-MESNIL
Tel: (1) 865-44-52
Telex: 21 1032F
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare d'activites Cadera
Quartier Jean-Mermoz
Avenue du President JF Kennedy
33700 MERIGNAC (Bordeaux)
Tel: 33-56-34-0084
Telex: 550105F
Hewlett-Packard France
3, Rue Graham Bell
BP5149
57074 MEH Cedex
Tel: (87) 36-13-31
Telex: 860602F
Hewlett-Packard France
Miniparc-ZIRST
Chemin du Vieux Chine
38240 MEYLAN (Grenoble)
Tel: (76) 90-38-40
980124 HP Grenobe
Hewlett-Packard France
Bureau vert du Bois Briand
Cheman de la Garde
-CP 212 212
44085 NANTES Cedex
Tel: (40) 50-32-22
Telex: 71 1085F
Q
Hewlett-Packard France
125, Rue du Faut)ourg Bannler
45000 ORliANS
Tel: 33-38-62-2031
Hewlett-Packard France
Zone Industrlelle de Courtaboeuf
Avenue des Troplques
91947 LES ULIS Cedex (Orsay)
Tel: 33-6-907 7825
Telex: 600048F
Hewlett-Packard France
15, Avenue de L'Amlral-Brulx
75782 PARIS Cedex 16
Tel: 33-15-02-1220
Telex: 613663F
Hewlett-Packard France
242 Ter, Ave J Mermoz
64000 PAU
Tel; 33-59-80-3802
Telex: 550365F
Hewlett-Packard France
6, Place Sainte Croix
86000 POITIERS
Tel: 33-49-41-2707
Telex: 792335F
Hewlett-Packard France
47, Rue de Chativesle
51 100 REIMS
Tel: 33-26-88-6919
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare d'activltes de la Poterie
Rue Louis Kerautel-Botmel
35000 RENNES
Tel: 33-99-51-4244
Telex: 740912F
Hewlett-Packard France
98 Avenue de Bretagne
76100 ROUEN
Tel: 33-35-63-5766
Telex: 770035F
Hewlett-Packard France
4, Rue Thomas-Mann
Boite Postale 56
67033 STRASBOURG Cedex
Tel: (88) 28-56-46
Telex: 890141F
Hewlett-Packard France
Le Peripole III
3, Chemin du Pigeonnier de la Cepiere
31081 TOULOUSE Cedex
Tel: 33-61-40-1112
Telex: 531639F
Hewlett-Packard France
l.es Cardoullnes
Batlment B2
Route des Dolines
Pare d'activite de Valbonne
Sophia Antlpolls
06560 VALBONNE (Nice)
Tel: (93) 66-39-40
Hewlett-Packard France
9, Rue Baudin
26000 VALENCE
Tel: 33-75-42-7616
Hewlett-Packard France
Carolor
ZAC de Bois Briand
57640 VIGY(Metz)
Tel: (8) 771 20 22
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare d'activite des Prte
1, Rue Papin Cedex
59658 VILLENEUVED'ASCQ
Tel: 33-20-91-4125
Telex: 160124F
Hewlett-Packard France
Pare d'activitfe Parls-Nord 11
Boite Postale 60020
95971 Roissy Charles de Gaulle
VILLEPINTE
Tel: (1)48 63 80 80
Telex: 21 1032F
GABON
Sho Gabon
P.O. Box 89
UBREVILLE
Tel: 721 484
Telex: 5230
GERMAN FEDERAL
REPUBLIC
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertrlebzentrale Deutschland
Hewlett-Packard-Strasse
Postfach 1641
D-6380BADHOMBURGv.d.H
Tel: (06172) 400-0
Telex: 410 844 hpbhg
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
Keithstrasse 2-4
D-1000 BERLIN 30
Tel: (030) 21 99 04-0
Telex: 018 3405 hpbind
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Verblndungsstelle Bonn
Friedrieh-Ebert-Allee 26
5300 BONN
Tel: (0228) 234001
Telex: 8869421
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertriebszentrun Siidwest
Schlckardstrasse 2
D-7030 BOBUNGEN
Postfach 1427
Tel: (07031) 645-0
Telex: 7265 743 hep
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Zeneralberelch Mktg
Herrenberger Strasse 130
D-7030 BOBLINGEN
Tel: (07031) 14-0
Telex: 7265739 hep
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
Schleefstr. 28a
D-4600 DORTMUND-41
Tel: (0231) 45001
Telex: 822858 hepdod
Hewlett-Packard gmbH
Reparaturzentrum Frankfurt
Berner Strasse 117
6000 FRANKFURT/MAIN 60
Tel: (069) 500001-0
Telex: 413249 hpffm
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertriebszentrum Nord
Kapstadtring 5
D-2000 HAMBURG 60
Tel: 49-40-63-804-0
Telex: 021 63 032 hphhd
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
Heldering 37-39
D-3000 HANNOVER 61
Tel: (0511) 5706-0
Telex: 092 3259 hphan
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
RosslauerWeg2-4
D-6800 MANNHEIM
Tel: 49-0621-70-05-0
Telex: 0462105 hpmhm
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Messerschmittstrasse 7
D-7910NEUULM
Tel: 49-0731-70-73-0
Telex: 0712816 HP ULM-D
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
Emmerlcher Strasse 13
D-8500 NURNBERG 10
Tel: (0911) 5205-0
Telex: 0623 860 hpnbg
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertriebszentrum Ratingen
Berliner Strasse 111
D-4030 RATINGEN 4
Postfach 3112
Tel: (02102) 494-0
Telex: 589 070 hprad
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertriebszentrum Muchen
D-8028TAUFKIRCHEN
Tel: 49-89-61-2070
Telex: 0524985 hpmch
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Geschaftsstelle
Ermlisallee
7517WALDBRONN2
Postfach 1251
Tel: (07243) 602-0
Telex: 782 838 hepk
GREAT BRITAIN
See United Kingdom
GREECE
Hewlett-Packard A.E.
178, Kifisslas Avenue
6th Floor
Halandrl-ATHENS
Greece
Tel: 301 1 16473 360, 301 1 16726 090
Telex: 221 286 HPHLGR
Kostas Karaynnis S.A.
8, Omirou Street
ATHENS 133
Tel: 32 SO 303, 32 37 371
Telex: 215962 RKAR GR
Impexin
Intelect Div.
209 Mesoglon
11 525 ATHENS
Tel: 6474481/2
Telex: 216286
Harll Company
38, Mlhalakopoulou
ATHENS 612
Tel: 7236071
Telex: 218767
Hellamco
P.O. Box 87528
18507 PIRAEUS
Tel: 4827049
Telex: 241441
GUATEMALA
IPESADE GUATEMALA
Avenlda Reforma 3-48, Zona 9
GUATEMALA CITY
Tel: 316627, 317853,66471/5
9-011-502-2-316627
Telex: 3055765 IPESA GU
HONG KONG
Hewlett-Packard Asia, Ltd.
22/F Bond Centre, West Tower
89 Queensway Central
HONGKONG
Tel: 5 848 7777
Telex: 76793 HPA HX
Cable: HEWPACK HONG KONG
CET Ltd.
10th Floor, Hua Asia BIdg.
64-66 Gloucester Road
HONGKONG
Tel: (5) 200922
Telex: 85148 CET HX
Schmidt & Co. (Hong Kong) Ltd.
18th Floor, Great Eagle Centre
23 Harbour Road, Wanchai
HONG KONG
Tel: 5-8330222
Telex: 74766 SCHMC HX
ICELAND
Hewlett-Packard Iceland
Hoefdabakka 9
112 REYKJAVIK
Tel: 354-1-67-1000
Telex: 37409
INDIA
Computer products are sold through
Blue Star Ltd. All computer repairs
and maintenance service Is done
through Computer Maintenance Corp.
Blue Star Ltd.
B. D. Patel House
Near Sardar Patel Colony
AHMEDABAD380 014
Tel: 403531, 403532
Telex: 0121-234
Cable: BLUE FROST
Blue Star Ltd.
40/4 Lavelle Road
BANGALORE 560 001
Tel: 57881, 867780
Telex: 0845-430 BSLBIN
Cable: BLUESTAR
Blue Star Ltd.
Band Box House
Prabhadevi
BOMBAY 400 025
Tel: 4933101, 4933222
Telex: 011-71051
Cable: BLUESTAR
Blue Star Ltd.
Sahas
414/2 VIr Savarkar Marg
Prabhadevi
BOMBAY 400 025
Tel: 422-6155
Telex: 011-71193 BSSS IN
Cable: FROSTBLUE
Blue Star Ltd.
Kalyan, 19 Vishwas Colony
Alkapurl,BARODA,39000S
Tel: 65235, 65236
Cable: BLUE STAR
Blue Star Ltd.
7 Hare Street
P.O. Box 506
CALCUnA700 001
Tel: 230131, 230132
Telex: 031-61120 BSNF IN
Cable: BLUESTAR
Blue Star Ltd.
133 Kodambakkam High Road
MADRAS 600 034
Tel: 472056, 470238
Telex: 041-379
Cable: BLUESTAR
Blue Star Ltd.
13 Community Center
New Friends Colony
NEW DELH1 110 065
Tel: 682547
Telex: 031-2463
Cable: BLUEFROST
Blue Star Ltd.
15/16 C Wellesley Rd.
PUNE411011
Tel: 22775
Cable: BLUE STAR
Blue Star Ltd.
2-2-47/1108 BolarumRd.
SECUNDERABAD 500 003
Tel: 72057, 72058
Telex: 0155-459
Cable: BLUEFROST
Blue Star Ltd.
T.C. 7/603 Poornima
Maruthunkuzhi
TRIVANDRUM695 013
Tel: 65799, 65820
Telex: 0884-259
Cable: BLUESTAR
Computer Maintenance Corporation
Ltd.
115, Sarojini Devi Road
SECUNDERABAD 500 003
Tel: 310-184, 345-774
Telex: 031-2960
Hewlett-Packard India
Meridian Commercial Complex
6th Floor
8 V^lndsor Place
Janpath
NEW DELH1 110 001
INDIA
Tel: 91-11384911
Telex: 31-4935 HPNDIN
Q
SALES OFFICES
Arranged alphabetically by country (cont'd)
INDONESIA
BERCA Indonesia P.T.
P.O.Box 496/Jkt.
Jl. Abdul Muls 62
JAKARTA
Tel: 21-373009
Telex: 46748 BERSAL lA
Cable: BERSAL JAKARTA
BERCA Indonesia P.T.
P.O.Box 2497/Jkt
Antara BIdg., 12th Floor
Jl. Medan Merdeka Selatan 17
JAKARTA-PUSAT
Tel: 21-340417
Telex: 46748 BERSAL lA
BERCA Indonesia P.T.
Jalan Kutai 24
SURABAYA
Tel: 671 18
Telex: 31 146 BERSAL SB
Cable: BERSAL-SURABAYA
IRAQ
Hewlett-Packard Trading S.A.
Service Operation
Al Mansoor City 9B/3/7
BAGHDAD
Tel: 551-49-73
Telex: 212-455 HEPAIRAQ IK
IRELAND
Hewlett-Packard Ireland Ltd.
Temple House, Temple Road
Blackrock, Co. DUBLIN
Tel: 88/333/99
Telex: 30439
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
75 Belfast Rd, Carrickfergus
Belfast BT38 8PH
NORTHERN IRELAND
Tel: 09603-67333
Telex: 747626
ISRAEL
Eldan Electronic Instrument Ltd.
P.O.Box 1270
JERUSALEM 91000
16,0haliavSt.
JERUSALEM 94467
Tel: 533 221, 553 242
Telex: 25231 AB/PAKRD IL
Computation and Measurement
Systems (CMS) Ltd.
UMasad Street
67060
TEL-AVIV
Tel: 388 388
Telex: 33569 MotillL
ITALY
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A
Traversa 99C
Via Giulio Petroni, 19
1-70124 BARI
Tel: (080)41-07-44
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Emilia, 51/C
1-4001 1 BOLOGNA Anzda Dell'Emilia
Tel: 39-051-731061
Telex: 511630
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Principe Nicola 43G/C
1-95126 CATANIA
Tel: (095) 37-10-87
Telex: 970291
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
ViaG.diVittoriolO
20094 CORSICO(Mllano)
Tel: 39-02-4408351
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Viale Brigata Bisagno 2
16129 GENOVA
Tel: 39-10-541141
Telex: 215238
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Viale G. Modugno 33
1-16156 GENOVA PEGU
Tel: (010) 68-37-07
Telex: 215238
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via G. di Vittorio 9
20063 Cernusco Sul
Naviglio
MILANO
Tel: (02) 923691
Telex: 334632
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Nuova Rivoltana 95
20090 UMITO(Milano)
Tel: 02-92761
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Nuova San Rocco a
Capodimonte, 62/A
1-80131 NAPOLI
Tel: (081) 7413544
Telex: 710698
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
ViaOrazio16
80122 NAPOLI
Tel: (081) 761 1444
Telex: 710698
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Pellizzo 15
35128 PADOVA
Tel: 39-49-664-888
Telex: 430315
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Viale C. Pavese 340
1-00144 ROMA EUR
Tel: 39-65-48-31
Telex: 610514
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via di Casellina 57/C
500518 SCANDICCI-FIRENZE
Tel: 39-55-753863
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Corso Svizzera, 185
1-10144 TORINO
Tel: 39-11-74-4044
Telex: 221079
IVORY COAST
S.I.T.E.L.
Societe Ivoirlenne de
Telecommunications
Bd. Giscard d'Estaing
Carrefour Marcory
Zone 4.A.
Bolte postale 2580
ABIDJAN 01
Tel: 353600
Telex: 43175
S.I.T.I.
Immeuble "Le General"
Av. du General de Gaulle
01 BP 161
ABIDJAN 01
Tel: 321227
Telex: 22149
JAPAN
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
152-1, Onna
ATSUGI,Kanagawa,243
Tel: (0462) 25-0031
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Meiji-Seimei BIdg. 6F
3-1 Motochiba-Clio
CHIBA, 280
Tel: (0472) 25 7701
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Yasuda-Seimei Hiroshima BIdg.
6-11,Hon-dori, Naka-ku
HIROSHIMA, 730
Tel: (082)241-0611
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Towa Building
2-2-3 Kaigan-dori, Chuo-ku
KOBE, 650
Tel: (078) 392-4791
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Kumagaya Asahi 82 BIdg.
3-4 Tsukuba
KUMAGAYA, Saltama 360
Tel: (0485) 24-6563
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Asahi Shinbun Daiichi Seimei BIdg.
4-7, Hanabata-cho
KUMAMOTO, 860
Tel: 96-354-7311
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Shin-Kyoto Center BIdg.
614, HIgashi-Shiokoji-cho
Karasuma-Nishiiru
KYOTO, 600
Tel: 075-343-0921
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Mito Mitsui BIdg.
1-4-73, Sanno-maru
MITO, Ibaraki 310
Tel: (0292) 25-7470
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Meiji-Seimei Kokubun BIdg.
7-8 Kokubun, 1 Chome, Sendai
MIYAGL980
Tel: (0222) 25-1011
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Gohda BIdg. 2F
1-2-10 Gohda Okaya-Shi
Okaya-Shi
NAGANO, 394
Tel: (0266) 23 0851
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Nagoya Kokusal Center Building
1-47-1, Nagono, Nakamura-ku
NAGOYA, AICHI 450
Tel: (052) 571-5171
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Sai-Kyo-Ren Building
1-2 Dote-cho
OOMIYA-SHISAn'AMA330
Tel: (0486)45-8031
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Chuo BIdg., 5-4-20 Nishi-Nakajima
4-20 Nishinakajima, 5 Chome,
Yodogawa-ku
OSAKA, 532
Tel: (06) 304-6021
Telex: YHPOSA 523-3624
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
1-27-15, Yabe
SAGAMIHARA Kanagawa, 229
Tel: 0427 59-1311
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Hamamtsu Motoshiro-Cho Daichi
Seimei BIdg 219-21, Motoshiro-Cho
Hamamatsu-shi
SHIZUOKA,430
Tel: (0534) 56 1771
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Shinjuku Daiichi Seimei BIdg.
2-7-1, Nishi Shinjuku
Shinjuku-ku,TOKYO 163
Tel: 03-348-4611
Yokogawa Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
9-1, Takakura-cho
Hachioji-shi, TOKYO, 192
Tel: 81-426-42-1231
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
29-21 Takaido-Higashi, 3-chome
Suginami-ku TOKY0 168
Tel: (03) 331-6111
Telex: 232-2024 YHPTOK
Yokogawa Hokushin Electric Corp.
(YEW)
Shinjuku-NS BIdg. 10F
9-32 Nokacho 2 Chome
Shinjuku-ku
TOKYO, 163
Tel: (03) 349-1859
Telex: J27584
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Meiji-Seimei '
Utsunomiya Odori Building
1-5 Odori, 2 Chome
UTSUNOMIYA, Tochigi 320
Tel: (0286) 33-1153
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Yasuda Seimei Nishiguchi BIdg.
30-4 Tsuruya-cho, 3 Chome
Kanagawa-ku, YOKOHAMA 221
Tel: (045) 312-1252
JORDAN
Scientific and Medical Supplies Co.
P.O. Box 1387
AMMAN
Tel: 24907, 39907
Telex: 21456 SABCO JO
KENYA
ADCOM Ltd., Inc., Kenya
P.O.Box 30070
NAIROBI
Tel: 331955
Telex: 22639
KOREA
Samsung Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.
Dongbang Yeoeuido Building
12-16th Floors
36-1 Yeoeuldo-Dong
Youngdeungpo-Ku
SEOUL
Tel: 784-4666, 784-2666
Telex: 25166 SAMSANK
Young In Scientific Co., Ltd.
Youngwha Building
547 Shinsa Dong, Kangnam-Ku
SEOUL 135
Tel: 546-7771
Telex: K23457 GINSCO
Dongbang Healthcare
Products Co. Ltd.
Suite 301 Medical Supply Center
BIdg. 1-31 Dongsungdong
Jong Ro-gu, SEOUL
Tel: 764-1171, 741-1641
Telex: K25706TKBKO
Cable: TKBEEPKO
KUWAIT
Al-Khaldiya Trading & Contracting
P.O. Box 830
SAFAT
Tel: 424910, 411726
Telex: 22481 AREEG KT
Cable: VISCOUNT
Gulf Computing Systems
P.O. Box 25125
SAFAT
Tel: 435969
Telex: 23648
Photo & Cine Equipment
P.O. Box 270
SAFAT
Tel: 2445111
Telex: 22247 MATIN KT
Cable: MATIN KUWAIT
W.J. Towell Computer Services
P.O. Box 5897
SAFAT
Tel: 2462640/1
Telex: 30336 TOWELL KT
LEBANON
Computer information Systems S A.L.
Chammas Building
P.O. Box 11-6274 Dora
BEIRUT
Tel: 89 40 73
Telex: 42309 chads le
LIBERIA
Unichemicals Inc.
P.O. Box 4509
MONROVIA
Tel: 224282
Telex: 4509
Q
LUXEMBOURG
Hewlett-Packard Belgium S.A./N.V.
Blvd de la Woluwe, 100
Woluwedal
B-1200 BRUSSELS
Tel: (02) 762-32-00
Telex: 23-494 paloben bru
MADAGASCAR
Technique et Precision
12, rue de Nice
P.O. Box 1227
101 ANTANANARIVO
Tei: 22090
Telex: 22255
MALAYSIA
Hewlett-Paci(ard Sales (Malaysia)
Sdn. Bhd.
9th Floor
Chung Khiaw Bank Building
46, Jaian Raja Laut
50736 KUALA LUMPUR, MALAYSIA
Tel: 03-2986555
Telex: 31011 HPSM MA
Protel Engineering
P.O.Box 1917
Lot 6624, Section 64
23/4 Pending Road
Kuching, SARAWAK
Tel: 36299
Telex: 70904 PROMAL MA
Cable: PROTELENG
MALTA
Philip Toledo Ltd.
KirklrkaraP.O. Boxll
Notablle Rd.
MRIEHEL
Tel: 447 47, 455 66, 4915 25
Telex: Media MW 649
MAURITIUS
Blanche Birger Co. Ltd.
18, Jules Koenig Street
PORT LOUIS
Tel: 20828
Telex: 4296
MEXICO
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A.deC.V.
Rio NIo No. 4049 Desp. 12
Fracc. Cordoba
JUAREZ, Mexico
Tel: 161-3-15-62
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A. de C.V.
Condomlnio Kadereyta
Circuito del Mezon No. 186 Desp. 6
CoL Del Prado- 76030
QRO, Mexico
Tel: 463-6-02-71
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A.deC.V.
Monti Morelos No. 299
Fraccionamiento Loma Bonita 45060
GUADALAJARA, Jalisco
Tel: 36-31-48-00
Telex: 0684 186 ECOME
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A.deC.V.
Monte Pelvoux No. Ill
Lomas de Chapultepec
11000 MEXICO, D.F.
Tel: (905) 596-79-33
Telex: 17-74-507 HEWPACK MEX
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A.deC.V.
Czda.delValle
409 Ote. 4th Piso
Colonia del Valle
Munteipio de Garcia
66220 NUEVO LEON
Tel: 83-78-42-40
Telex: 382410 HPMY
Infograficas y SIstemas
del Noreste, S.A.
Rio Orinoco #171 Oriente
Despacho 2001
Colonia Del Valle
MONTERREY
Tel: 559-4415, 575-3837
Telex: 483164
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico,
S.A. de C.V.
Blvd. Independencia No. 2000 Ote.
Col. Estrella
TORREON,COAH.
Tel: 171-8 2201
MOROCCO
Etablissement Hubert Dolbeau & Fils
81 rue Karatchi
B.P. 11133
CASABLANCA
Tel: 3041-82, 3068-38
Telex: 23051, 22822
Gerep
2, rue Agadir
Boite Postale 156
CASABUNCA01
Tel: 272093, 272095
Telex: 23 739
Sema-Maroc
Dept. Seric
6, rue Lapebie
CASABLANCA
Tel: 260980
Telex: 21641
NETHERLANDS
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Startbaan 16
NL-1187XRAMSTELVEEN
P.O. Box 667
NL-1180ARAMSTELVEEN
Tel: (020) 547-6911
Telex: 13 216 HEPANL
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Bongerd 2
P.O. Box 41
NL 2900AA CAPELLE A/D USSEL
Tel: 31-20-51-6444
Telex: 21261 HEPAC NL
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Pastoor Petersstraat 134-136
P.O. Box 2342
NL 5600 OH EINDHOVEN
Tel: 31-40-32-6911
Telex: 51484 hepae nl
NEW ZEALAND
Hewlett-Packard (N.Z.) Ltd.
5 Owens Road
P.O. Box 26-189
Epsom, AUCKLAND
Tel: 64-9-687-159
Cable: HEWPAK Auckland
Hewlett-Packard (N.Z.) Ltd.
184-190 Willis Street
WELLINGTON
P.O. Box 9443
Courtenay Place, WELLINGTON 3
Tel: 877 199
Cable: HEWPACK Wellington
Northrop Instruments & Systems Ltd.
131 Khyber Pass Road
Northrup House - 2nd Floor
Private Bag
Newmarket, AUCKLAND
Tel: 794-091
Telex: 60605
Northrop Instruments & Systems Ltd.
IIOMandevllleSt.
P.O. Box 8388
CHRISTCHURCH
Tel: 488-873
Telex: 4203
Northrop Instruments & Systems Ltd.
Sturdee House
85-87 Ghuznee Street
P.O. Box 2406
WELLINGTON
Tel: 850-091
Telex: NZ 3380
NIGERIA
Elmeco Nigeria Ltd.
45SakaTlrubuSt.
Victoria Island
UGOS
Tel: 61-98-94
Telex; 20-1 17
NORTHERN IRELAND
See United Kingdom
NORWAY
Hewlett-Packard Norway A/S
Oesterndalen 16-18
P.O. Box 34
N-1345 OESTERAAS
Tel: 47-2-24-6090
Telex: 7662 Ihpnasn
Hewlett-Packard Norway A/S
Boemergt. 42
Box 2470
N-5037SOLHEIMSVIK
Tel: 0047/5/29 00 90
Hewlett-Packard Norway A/S
Baadegt. 2
N-4006STAVANGER
Tel: 47-4-52-29-03
Telex: 47-4-52-09-39
Hewlett-Packard Norway A/S
Sluppenvn. 5
P.O. Box 1508, NIdarvoll
N-7002TRONDHEIM
Tel: 47-7-96-47-75
Telex: 47-7-96-47-76
OMAN
Khimjil Ramdas
P.O. Box 19
MUSCAT/SULTANATE OF OMAN
Tel: 795 901
Telex: 3489 BROKER MB MUSCAT
Suhail & Saud Bahwan
P.O.Box 169
MUSCAT/SULTANATE OF OMAN
Tel: 734 201-3
Telex: 5274 BAHWAN MB
Imtac LLC
P.O. Box 9196
MINAALFAHAL/SULTANATE
OF OMAN
Tel: 70-77-27, 70-77-23
Telex: 3865 Tawoos On
PAKISTAN
Mushko & Company Ltd.
House No. 16, Street No. 16
Sector F-6/3
ISLAMABAD
Tel: 824545
Telex: 54001 Muski Pk
Cable: FEMUS Islamabad
Mushko & Company Ltd.
Oosman Chambers
Abdullah Haroon Road
KARACHI 0302
Tel: 524131, 524li32
Telex: 2894 MUSKO PK
Cable: COOPERATOR Karachi
PANAMA
Electronlco Balboa, S.A.
Calle Samuel Lewis, Ed. Alfa
Apartado 4929
PANAMA CITY
Tel: 9-011-507-636613
Telex: 368 3483 ELECTRON PG
PERU
Ola Electro M6dica S.A. (ERMED)
Los Ramencos 145, Ofc. 301/2
San Isidro
Casilla 1030
LIMA 1 Peru
Tel; 9-011-511-4-414325, 41-3705
Telex: 39425257 PEPB SIS
SAMSS.A.
Arenida Republica de Panama 3534
San Isidro, UMA
Tel; 9-011-511-4-229332/413984/
413226
Telex: 39420450 PE LIBERTAD
PHILIPPINES
The Online Advanced Systems Corp.
2nd Floor, Electra House
115-117 Esteban Street
P.O. Box 1510
Legaspi Village, MakatI
Metro MANILA
Tel; 815-38-10 (up to 16)
Telex; 63274 ONLINE PN
PORTUGAL
Mundlnter Intercamblo
Mundial de Comircio S.A.R.L.
Av. Antonio Augusto Agular 138
Apartado 2761
USBON
Tel: (19) 53-21-31, 53-21-37
Telex; 16691 munterp
Soquimica
Av. da Liberdade, 220-2
1298 LISBOA Codex
Tel; 56-21-82
Telex; 13316 SABASA
Telectra-Empresa Ttenica de
Equipmentos Eltetrlcos S.A.R.L.
Rua Rodrlgo da Fonseca 103
P.O. Box 2531
LISBON 1
Tel: (19) 68-60-72
Telex: 12598
C.P.C.S.I.
Rua de Costa Cabral 575
4200 PORTO
Tel: 499174/495173
Telex; 26054
PUERTO RICO
Hewlett-Packard Puerto Rico
101 Munoz Rivera Av
Esu. Calle Ochoa
HATOREY, Puerto Rico 00918
Tel: (809) 754-7800
QATAR
Computer Arabia
P.O. Box 2750
DOHA
Tel: 428555
Telex: 4806 CHPARB
Nasser Trading & Contracting
P.O.Box 1563
DOHA
Tel; 422170
Telex; 4439 NASSER DH
SAUDI ARABIA
Modern Electrontes Establishment
Hewlett-Packard Division
P.O. Box 281
Thuobah
AL-KHOBAR 31952
Tel: 895-1760, 895-1764
Telex; 671 106 HPMEEKSJ
Cable: ELECTA AL-KHOBAR
Modem Electronics Establishment
Hewlett-Packard Division
P.O. Box 1228
Redec Plaza, 6th Roor
JEDDAH
Tel; 644 96 28
Telex: 4027 12 FARNASSJ
Cable: ELECTA JEDDAH
Modern Electronics Establishment
Hewlett-Packard Division
P.0.BOX 22015
RIYADH 11495
Tel: 491-97 15, 491-63 87
Telex; 202049 MEERYDSJ
Q SALES OFFICES
Arranged alphabetically by country (cont'd)
SAUDI ARABIA
(Cont'd)
Abdul Ghani El Ajou Corp.
P.O. Box 78
RIYADH
Tel: 40 41 717
Telex: 200 932 EL AJOU
SCOTLAND
See United Kingdom
SENEGAL
Soclete Hussein Ayad & Cle.
76, Avenue Georges Pompidou
B.P. 305
DAKAR
Tel: 32339
Cable: AYAD-Dakar
Moneger Distribution S.A.
1, Rue Parent
B.P. 148
DAKAR
Tel: 215 671
Telex: 587
Systeme Service Consell (SSC)
14, Avenue du Parachols
DAKAR ETOILE
Tel: 219976
Telex: 577
SINGAPORE
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Sales)
Re. Ltd.
1150 Depot Road
SINGAPORE, 0410
Tel: 273 7388
Telex: 34209 HPSGSORS
Cable: HEWPACK, Singapore
Dynamar International Ltd.
Unit 05-11 Blocks
Kolam Ayer Industrial Estate
SINGAPORE 1334
Tel: 747-6188
Telex: 26283 RS
SOUTH AFRICA
Hewlett-Packard So Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
P.O. Box 120
Howard Place, CAPE PROVINCE
7450 South Africa
Tel: 27 121153-7954
Telex: 57-20006
Hewlett-Packard So Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
2nd Roor Juniper House
92 Overport Drive
DURBAN 4067
Tel: 27-31-28-4178
Telex: 6-22954
Hewlett-Packard So Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
Sliop 6 Linton Arcade
511 Cape Road
Linton Grange
PORT ELIZABETH 6001
Tel: 27141130 1201
Telex: 24-2916
Hewlett-Packard So Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
Fountain Center
Kalkoen Str.
Monument Park Ext 2
PRETORU0105
Tel: (012) 45 5725
Telex: 32163
Hewlett-Packard So Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
Private Bag Wendywood
SANDT0N2144
Tel: 27-11-802-5111, 27-11-802-5125
Telex: 4-20877 SA
Cable: HEWPACK Johannesburg
SPAIN
Hewlett-Packard Espafiola, S.A.
Calle Entenza, 321
E.-BARCELONA29
Tel: 3/322 24 51, 321 73 54
Telex: 52603 hpbee
Hewlett-Packard Espaiiola, S.A.
Calle San Vicente S/N
EdlficloAlbiail-7B
48001 BIL'dAO
Tel: 4/423 83 06
Hewlett-Packard Espafiola, S.A.
Crta. N-VI, Km. 16, 400
Las Rozas
E-MADRID
Tel: (1)637.00.11
Telex: 23515 HPE
Hewlett-Packard EsparSola, S.A.
Avda. S. Francisco Javier, S/N
Planta 10. Edificio Seville 2
E-SEVILLA5,SPAIN
Tel: 54/64 44 54
Telex: 72933
Hewlett-Packard Espailoia, S.A.
Isabel La Catolica, 8
E-46004 VALENCIA
Tel: 34-6-361 1354
Telex: 63435
Hewlett-Packard Espaftola, S.A.
Av. de Zugazarte, 8
Las Arenas-Guecho
E-48930VIZCAYA
VIZCAYA
Tel: 34-423-83 06
Telex: 33032
SWEDEN
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB
dstraTullgatan3
S-20011MALMd
Box 6132
Tel: 46-40-702-70
Telex: (854) 17886 (via Spinga
office)
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB
Elementvagen 16
S-7022 7dREBRO
Tel: 49-019-10-4820
Telex: (854) 17886 (via Spiinga office)
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB
Skalholtsgatan 9, Kista
P.O. Box 19
S-16393SPANGA
Tel: (08) 750-2000
Telex: (854) 17886
Telefax: (08) 7527781
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AS
Box 266
Topasgatan 1A
S-42123 VASTRA-FROLUNDA
(Gothenburg)
Tel: 46-031-89-1000
Telex: (854) 17886 (via Spdnga
office)
SUDAN
Mediterranean Engineering
& Trading Co. Ltd.
P.O. Box 1025
KHARTOUM
Tel: 41184
Telex: 24052
SWITZERLAND
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
Clarastrasse 12
CH-4058 BASEL
Tel: 41-61-33-5920
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
7, rue du Bois-du-Lan
Case postaie 365-1366
CH-1217 MEYRIN 1
Tel: (0041) 22-83-8-11
Teiex:27333 HPAG CH
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
Allmend 2
CH-8967 WIDEN
Tel: 41-57-31-2111
Telex: 53933 hpag ch
Cable: HPAG CH
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
Schwamendlngenstrasse 10
CH-8050 ZURICH
Tel: 41-1-315-8181
Telex: 823 537 HPAG CH
SYRIA
General Electronic Inc.
Nuri Basha Ahnaf Ebn Kays Street
P.O. Box 5781
DAMASCUS
Tel: 33-24-87
Telex: 44-19-88
Cable: ELECTROBOR DAMASCUS
Middle East Electronics
P.O.BOX2308
Abu Rumaneh
DAMASCUS
Tel: 33 45 92
Telex: 411 771 Meesy
TAIWAN
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
THM Office
2, Huan Nan Road
CHUNG LI, Taoyuan
Tel: (034) 929-666
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
Kaohsiung Office
11/F, 456, Chung Hsiao 1st Road
KAOHSIUNG
Tel: (07) 2412318
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
8th Floor, Hewlett-Packard Building
337 Fu Hsing North Road
TAIPEI
Tel: (02) 712-0404
Telex: 24439 HEWPACK
Cable:HEWPACK Taipei
Ing LIh Trading Co.
3rd Floor, No. 7, Sect. 2
Jen Ai Road
TAIPEMOO
Tel: (02)394-8191
Telex: 22894 SANKWANG
THAILAND
Unimesa Co. Ltd.
2540 Sukumwit Avenue
Bangna
BANGKOK 10260
Tel: 662-398-6953
Telex: 84439 Simonco TH
Cable: UNIMESA Bangkok
Bangkok Business Equipment Ltd.
5/5-6 Dejo Road
BANGKOK
Tel: 234-8670, 234-8671
Telex: 87699-BEQUIPTTH
Cable: BUSIQUIPT Bangkok
TOGO
Societe Africaine De Promotion
immeuble Sageb
Rue d'Atakpame
P.O. Box 4150
LOME
Tel: 21-62-88
Telex: 5357
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
Caribbean Telecoms Ltd.
Corner McAllister Street &
Eastern Main Road, Laventiile
P.O. Box 732
PORT-OF-SPAIN
Tel: 624-4213
Telex: 22561 CARTEL WG
Cable: CARTEL, PORT OF SPAIN
Computer and Controls Ltd.
P.O. Box 51
1 Taylor Street
PORT-OF-SPAIN
Tel: (809) 622-7719/622-7985
Telex: 38722798 COMCON WG
LOOGO AGENCY 1264
Feral Assoc.
8 Fitzgerald Lane
PORT-OF-SPAIN
Tel: 62-36864, 62-39255
Telex: 22432 FERALCO
Cable: FERALCO
TUNISIA
Tunlsie Electronique S.A.R.L.
31 Avenue de la Liberie
TUNIS
Tel: 280-144
Tunisia Electronique S.A.R.L.
94, Av. Jugurtha, Mutueiievliie
1002 TUNIS-BELVEDERE
Tel: 280144
Telex: 13238
Corema S.A.
1 ter. Av. de Carthage
TUNIS
Tel: 253-821
Telex: 12319 CABAM TN
TURKEY
E.M.A
Mediha Eldem Sokak No. 41/6
Yenlsehir
ANKARA
Tel: 319175
Telex: 42321 KTXTR
Cable: EMATRADE ANKARA
Teknim Company Ltd.
Iran Caddesi No. 7
Karaklidere
ANKARA
Tel: 275800
Telex: 42155 TKNMTR
Kurt & Kurt A.S.
MIthatpasa Caddesi No. 75
Kat4Klzliay
ANKARA
Tel: 318875/6/7/8
Telex: 42490 MESRTR
Sanlva Bilgisayar SIstemlerl A.S.
Buyukdere Caddesi 103/6
Gayrettepe
ISTANBUL
Tel: 1673180
Telex: 26345 SANITR
Best Inc.
Esentepe, Gazeteciier Sitesi
Keskin Kalem
Sokak 6/3, Gayrettepe
ISTANBUL
Tel: 172 1328, 1733344
Telex: 42490
UNITED ARAB
EMIRATES
Emitac Ltd.
P.O. Box 1641
SHARJAH
Tel: 591181
Telex: 68136 EMITAC EM
Cable: EMITAC SHARJAH
Emitac Ltd.
P.O. Box 2711
ABU DHABI
Tel: 820419-20
Cable: EMITACH ABUDHABI
Emitac Ltd.
P.O. Box 8391
DUBAI,
Tel: 377591
Emitac Ltd.
P.O. Box 473
RASALKHAIMAH
Tel: 28133, 21270
UNITED KINGDOM
Customer Information Centre
Tel: 0734 777828
ENGLAND
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Miller House
The Ring, BRACKNELL
Berks RG12 1XN
Tel: 44/344/424-898
Telex: 848733
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Customer Sales & Support
Building 1
Filton Road
Stoke Gilford
BRISTOL, BS12 6QZ
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Oakfield House, Oakfleid Grove
Clifton BRISTOL, Avon BS8 2BN
Tel: 44-272-736 806
Telex: 444302
Q
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
9 Bridewell Place
LONDON EC4V6BS
Tel: 44-01-583-6565
Telex: 298163
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Pontefract Road
NORMANTON,
West Yorkshire WF61RN
Tel: 44/924/895 566
Telex: 557355
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
The Quadrangle
106-1 18 Station Road
REDHILL, Surrey RH1 IPS
Tel: 44-737-686-56
Telex: 947234
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Avon House
435 Stratford Road
Shirley, SOLIHULL, West Midlands
B90 4BL
Tel: 44-21-745-8800
Telex: 339105
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Heathside Park Road
Cheadle Heath, Stockport
SK3 ORB, United Kingdom
Tel: 44-061-428-0828
Telex.,668068
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Harman House
No. 1 George Street
UXBRIDGE, Middlesex UB8 1YH
Tel: 895 720 20
Telex: 893134/5
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
King Street Lane
Winnersh, WOKINGHAM
Berkshire RG115AR
Tel: 44-734-777-828
Telex: 8471789
NORTHERN IRELAND
Hewlett-Packard (Ireland) Ltd.
Carrickfergus Industrial Centre
75 Belfast Road, Carrickfergus
CO. ANTRIM BT38 8PM
Tel; 09603 67333
Cardiac Services Company
95A Finaghy Road South
BELFAST, BT10 OBY
Tel: 0232-625566
Telex: 747626
SCOTLAND
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
1/3 Springburn Place
College Milton North
EAST KILBRIDE, G74 5NU
Tel; 041-332-6232
Telex: 779615
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
SOUTH QUEENSFERRY
West Lothian, EH309TG
Tel: 031 331 1188
Telex; 72682 HPSQFYG
UNITED STATES
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Customer Information Center
Tel; (800) 752-0900
Hours: 6:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Pacific Time
Alabama
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2100 Riverchase Center
Building 100 -Suite 118
BIRMINGHAM, AL 35244
Tel: (205) 988-0547
Fax; (205) 988-0547X207
Hewlett-Packard Co.
420 Wynn Drive
HUNTSVILLE,AL 35805
Tel; (205) 830-2000
Fax: (205) 830-1427
Alaska
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4000 Old Seward Highway
Suite 101
ANCHORAGE, AK 99503
Tel: (907) 563-8855
Fax:(907)561-7409
Arizona
Hewlett-Packard Co
8080 Pointe Parkway West
PHOENIX, AZ 85044
Tel: (602) 273-8000
Fax; (602) 273-8080
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3400 East Britannia Dr.
BIdg. C, Suite 124
TUCSON, AZ 85706
Tel; (602) 573-7400
Fax:(602)573-7429
Arkansas
Hewlett-Packard Co.
10816 Executive Center Or
Conway BIdg. Suite 116
LITTLE ROCK, AR 72211
Tel: (501) 376-1844
Fax: (501) 221-3614
California
Hewlett-Packard Co.
26701 W. Argoura Rd.
CALABASAS,CA 91302
Tel: (818) 880-3400
Fax:(818)880-3437
Hewlett-Packard Co.
353 Lakeside Dr
FOSTER Cin.CA 94404
Tel: (415) 378-8400
Fax: (415) 378-8405
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1907 North Gateway Blvd.
FRESNO, CA 93727
Tel; (209) 252-9652
Fax; (209) 456-9302
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1421 S. Manhattan Av.
FULLERTON, CA 92631
Tel: (714) 999-6700
Fax; (714) 778-3033
Hewlett-Packard Co.
7408 Hollister Ave. #A
GOLETA,CA 93117
Tel; (805) 685-6100
Fax:(805)685-6163
Hewlett-Packard Co.
9800 Muirlando Ave.
IRVINE, CA 92718
Tel: (714) 472-3000
Fax:(714)581-3607
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2525 Grand Avenue
LONG BEACH, CA 90815
Tel: (213)498-1111
Fax; (213) 494-1986
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5651 West Manchester Ave.
LOS ANGELES, CA 90009
Tel: (213) 337-8000
Fax:(213)337-8338
Hewlett-Packard Co.
321 E. Evelyn Ave.
BIdg. 330
MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA 94039
Tel: (415) 694-2000
Fax:(415)694-0600
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5161 Lankershim Blvd.
NORTH HOLLYWOOD, CA 91601
Tel: (818) 505-5600
Fax; (818) 505-5875
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5725 W. Las Positas Blvd.
PLEASANTON,CA 94566
Tel; (415) 460-0282
Fax; (415) 460-0713
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4244 So. Market Court, Suite A
SACRAMENTO, CA 95852
Tel: (916) 929-7222
Fax:(916)927-7152
Hewlett-Packard Co.
9606 Aero Drive
SAN DIEGO, CA 92123
Tel: (619) 279-3200
Fax; (619) 541-7376
Hewlett-Packard Co.
50 Fremont St. Suite 200
SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105
Tel: (415) 882-6800
Fax:(415)882-6805
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3003 Scott Boulevard
SANTA CLARA, CA 95054
Tel; (408) 988-7000
Fax:(408)988-7103
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5280 Valentine Rd. Suite 205
VENTURA, CA 93003
Tel; (805) 658-6898
Fax:(805)650-0721
Colorado
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2945 Center Green Court South
Suite A
BOULDER, CO 80301
Tel; (303) 499-6655
Fax:(303)938-3025
Hewlett-Packard Co.
24 Inverness Place, East
ENGLEWOOD,CO80112
Tel; (303) 649-5000
Fax:(303)649-5787
Connecticut
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3 Parkland Dr.
DARIEN, CT 06820
Tel: (203) 656-0040
Fax; (203) 656-5563
Hewlett-Packard Co.
lis Glastonbury Blvd
GUSTONBURY.CT 06033
Tel; (203) 633-8100
Fax:(203)659-6087
Florida
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5900 N. Andrews, Suite 1O0
FORT LAUDERDALE, FL 33309
Tel: (305) 938-9800
Fax: (305) 938-2293
Hewlett-Packard Co.
6800 South Point Parkway
Suite 301
JACKSONVILLE, FL 32216
Tel: (904) 636-9955
Fax; (904) 636-9955
Hewlett-Packard Co.
255 East Drive, Suite B
MELBOURNE, FL 32901
Tel: (407) 729-0704
Fax:(407)723-4557
Hewlett-Packard Co.
6177 Lake Ellenor Drive
ORLANDO, FL 32809
Tel: (407) 859-2900
Fax; (407) 826-9309 (2)
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4700 Bayou Blvd.
Building 5
PENSACOLA,FL 32503
Tel: (904) 476-8422
Fax:(904)476-4116
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5550 Idlewild, #150
TAMPA, FL 33634
Tel; (813) 884-3282
Fax:(813)889-4445
Georgia
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2015 South Park Place
ATLANTA, GA 30339
Tel; (404) 955-1500
Fax; (404) 980-7669
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3607 Parkway Lane
Suite 300
NORCROSS,GA 30092
Tel; (404) 448-1894
Fax; (404) 246-5206
Hawaii
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Pacific Tower
1001 Bishop St.
Suite 2400
HONOLULU, HI 96813
Tel: (808) 526-1555
Fax; (808) 536-7873
Idaho
Hewlett-Packard Co.
11309 Chinden Blvd.
BOISE, ID 83707
Tel; (208) 323-2700
Fax:(208)323-25'28
Illinois
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2205 E. Empire SL
BLOOMINGTON,IL 61704
Tel: (309) 662-9411
Fax:(309)662-0351
Hewlett-Packard Co.
525 W.Monroe St., Suite 1308
CHICAGO, IL 60606
Tel: (312)930-0010
Fax:(312)930-0986
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1200 East Diehl Road
NAPERVILLE,IL 60566
Tel: (312) 357-8800
Fax:(312)357-9896
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5201 Tollvlew Drive
ROLLING MEADOWS, IL 60008
Tel: (312) 255-9800
Fax:(312)259-5878
Indiana
Hewlett-Packard Co.
11911 N. Meridian SL
CARMEL, IN 46032
Tel: (317) 844-4100
Fax; (317) 843-1291
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Ill E.Ludwig Road
Suite 108
FT. WAYNE, IN 46825
Tel; (219) 482-4283
Fax; (219) 482-9907
Iowa
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4050 River Courte Dr.
CEDAR RAPIDS, lA 52402
Tel: (319) 393-0606
Fax:(319)378-1024
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4201 Corporate Dr.
WEST DES MOINES, lA 50265
Tel: (515) 224-1435
Fax:(515)224-1870
Kansas
Hewlett-Packard Co.
North Rock Business Park
3450 N. Rock Rd.
Suite 300
WICHITA, KS 67226
Tel: (316) 636-4040
Fax:(316)682-8155
Kentucky
Hewlett-Packard Co.
305 N. Hurstbourne Lane,
Suite 100
LOUISVILLE, KY 40222
Tel: (502)426-0100
Fax:(502)426-0322
Louisiana
Hewlett-Packard Co.
160 James Drive East
ST. ROSE, LA 70087
Tel; (504) 467-4100
Fax: (504) 467-4100x5986
Q
SALES OFFICES
Arranged alphabetically by country (cont'd)
UNITED STATES
(Cont'd)
Maryland
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3701 Koppers Street
BALTIMORE, MD 21227
Tel: (301) 644-5800
Fax:(301)362-7650
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2 Choke Cherry Road
ROCKVILLE,MD 20850
Tel: (301) 948-6370
Fax: (301) 258-5986
Massachusetts
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1775 MInuteman Road
ANDOVER, MA 01810
Tel: (617) 682-1500
Fax: (617) 682-1500x2619
Hewlett-Packard Co.
29 Burlington Mall Rd
BURLINGTON, MA 01803-4514
Tel: (617) 270-7000
Fax:(617)221-5240
Michigan
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3033 Orchard Vista S.E.
GRAND RAPIDS, MM9506
Tel: (616) 957-1970
Fax:(616)956-9022
Hewlett-Packard Co.
39550 Orchard Hill Place Drive
NOVI, Ml 48050
Tel: (313) 349-9200
Fax:(313)349-9240
Hewlett-Packard Co.
560 KIrts Rd.
Suite 101
TROY, Ml 48084
Tel: (313) 362-5180
Fax:(313)362-3028
Minnesota
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2025 W. Larpenteur Ave.
ST. PAUL, MN 55113
Tel: (612) 644-1100
Fax:(612)344-5273
Mississippi
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1675 Lakeland Dr., Suite 102
JACKSON, MS 39216
Tei: (601) 982-9365
Fax:(601)362-8958
Missouri
Hewlett-Packard Co.
6601 Westchester Ave.
KANSAS CITY, MO 64131
Tei: (816) 737-0071
Fax:(816)737-4690
Hewlett-Packard Co.
13001 Holienberg Drive
BRIDGETON, MO 63044
Tel: (314)344-5100
Fax:(314)344-5273
Nebraska
Hewlett-Packard
11626 Nicholas St.
OMAHA, NE 68154
Tel: (402) 493-0300
Fax:(402)493-4334
New Jersey
Hewlett-Packard Co.
120 W. Century Road
PARAMUS,NJ 07652
Tel: (201) 265-5000
Fax:(201)599-5382
Hewlett-Packard Co.
lOSiiynWay
PARSIPPANY,NJ 07054
Tel: (401) 682-4000
Fax:(401)682-4031
Hewlett-Packard Co.
20 New England Av. West
PISCATAWAY,NJ 08854
Tei: (201) 562-6100
Fax:(201)562-6246
New Mexico
Hewlett-Packard Co.
7801Jefferson N.E.
ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87109
Tel: (505) 823-6100
Fax:(505)823-1243
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1362-C Trinity Dr.
LOS AUMOS,NM 87544
Tei: (505) 662-6700
Fax:(505)662-4312
New Yoric
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5 Computer Drive South
ALBANY, NY 12205
Tel: (518) 458-1550
Fax: (518) 458-1550x0393
Hewlett-Packard Co.
130 John Muir Dr.
AMHERST, NY 14228
Tei: (716) 689-3003
Fax:(716)636-7034
Hewlett-Packard Co.
200 Cross Keys Office Park
FAIRPORT, NY 14450
Tel: (716) 223-9950
Fax:(716)223-6331
Hewlett-Packard Co.
7641 Henry Clay Blvd.
LIVERPOOL, NY 13088
Tel: (315) 451-1820
Fax: (315) 451-1820x255
Hewlett-Packard Co.
No. 1 Pennsylvania Plaza
55th Floor
34th Street & 7th Avenue
MANHAnAN NY 10119
Tel: (212) 971-0800
Fax:(212)330-6967
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Executive Square Office BIdg.
66MlddlebushRd.
WAPPINGERS FAUS, NY 12590
Tel: (914) 298-9125
Fax:(914)298-9154
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2975 Westchester Ave
PURCHASE, NY 10577
Tei: (914) 935-6300
Fax:(914)935-6497
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3 Crossways Park West
WOODBURY, NY 11797
Tei: (516) 682-7800
Fax: (516) 682-7806 (2)
North Carolina
Hewlett-Packard Co.
305 Gregson Dr.
CARY.NC 27511
Tel: (919) 467-6600
Fax:(919)469-9441
Hewlett-Packard Co.
9401 Arrow Point Bivd
Suite 100
CHARLOnE,NC 28217
Tei: (704) 527-8780
Fax:(704)523-7857
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5605 Roanne Way
GREENSBORO, NC 27420
Tel: (919) 852-1800
Fax:(919)547-1997
Ohio
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2717 S.Arlington Road
AKRON, OH 44312
Tei: (216) 644-2270
Fax:(216)644-7415
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4501 Ersklne Road
CINCINNATI, OH 45242
Tei: (513) 891-9870
Fax:(513)891-0033
Hevrfett-Packard Co.
15885 Sprague Road
STRONGSVILLE, OH 44136
Tei: (216) 243-7300
Fax:(216)234-7230
Hewlett-Packard Co.
9080 Sprlngboro Pike
MIAMISBURG, OH 45342
Tel: (513) 433-2223
Fax:(513)433-3633
Hewlett-Packard Co.
One Maritime Plaza, 5th Floor
720 Water Street
TOLEDO, OH 43604
Tei: (419) 242-2200
Fax:(419)241-7655
Hewlett-Packard Co.
675 Brooksedge Bivd.
WESTERVILLE, OH 43081
Tel: (614) 891-3344
Fax:(614)891-1476
Oklahoma
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3525 N.W. 56th St.
Suite C-100
OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 731 12
Tel: (405) 946-9499
Fax:(405)942-2127
Hewlett-Packard Co.
6655 South Lewis,
Suite 105
TULSA, OK 74136
Tel: (918) 481-6700
Fax:(918)481-2250
Oregon
Hewlett-Packard Co.
9255 S. W. Pioneer Court
WILSONVILLE, OR 97070
Tei: (503) 682-8000
Fax:(503)682-8155
Pennsylvania
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Heatherwood industrial Park
50 Dorchester Rd.
Route 22
HARRISBURG, PA 17112
Tei: (717) 657-5900
Fax:(717)657-5946
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Ill Zeta Drive
PmSBURGH, PA 15238
Tel: (412) 782-0400
Fax:(412)963-1300
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2750 Monroe Boulevard
VALLEY FORGE, PA 19482
Tel: (215) 666-9000
Fax:(215)666-2034
South Carolina
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Brookside Park, Suite 122
1 Harbison Way
COLUMBIA, SO 29210
Tel: (803) 732-0400
Fax:(803)732-0606
Hewlett-Packard Co.
545 N. Pleasantburg Dr.
Suite 100
GREENVILLE, SC 29607
Tel: (803) 232-8002
Fax:(803)232-8739
Tennessee
Hewlett-Packard Co.
One Energy Centr. Suite 200
Pelllssippi Pkwy.
KNOXVILLE,TN 37932
Tel: (615) 966-4747
Fax: (615) 966-4747x138
Hewlett-Packard Co.
889 Ridge Lake Blvd.,
Suite 100
MEMPHIS, TN 38119
Tel: (901) 763-4747
Fax:(901)762-9723
Hewlett-Packard Co.
44 Vantage Way,
Suite 160
NASHVILLE, TN 37228
Tel: (615) 255-1271
Fax:(615)726-2310
Texas
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1826-P Kramer Lane
AUSTIN, TX 78758
Tel: (512) 835-6771
Fax:(512)835-6739
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5700 Cromo Dr
EL PASO, TX 79912
Tel: (915) 833-4400
Fax:(915)581-8097
Hewlett-Packard Co.
10535 Harwin Drive
HOUSTON, TX 77036
Tel: (713) 776-6400
Fax:(713)776-6495
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3301 West Royal Lane
IRVING, TX 75063
Tel: (214) 869-3377
Fax:(214)830-8951
Hewlett-Packard Co.
109 E. Toronto, Suite 100
McALLEN,TX 78501
Tel: (512) 630-3030
Fax:(512)630-1355
Hewlett-Packard Co.
930 E. Campbell Rd.
RICHARDSON, TX 75081
Tel: (214) 231-6101
Fax:(214)699-4437
Hewlett-Packard Co.
14100 San Pedro Ave., Suite 100
SAN ANTONIO, TX 78233
Tel: (512)494-9336
Fax:(512)491-1299
Utah
Hewlett-Packard Co.
3530 W. 2100 South St.
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84130
Tel: (801) 974-1700
Fax:(801)974-1780
Virginia
Hewlett-Packard Co.
840 Greenbrier Circle
Suite 101
CHESAPEAKE, VA 23320
Tel: (804) 424-7105
Fax:(804)424-1494
Hewlett-Packard Co.
4305 Cox Road
GLEN ALLEN, VA 23060
Tel: (804) 747-7750
Fax:(804)747-6580
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2800 Electric Road Suite 100
ROANOKE, VA 24018
Tel: (703) 774-3444
Fax:(703)989-8049
Washington
Hewlett-Packard Co.
15815 S.E. 37th Street
BELLEVUE,WA 98006
Tel: (206) 643-4000
Fax:(206)643-8748
Hewlett-Packard Co.
N. 1225ArgonneRd
SPOKANE, WA 99212
Tel: (509) 922-7000
Fax:(509)927-4236
West Virginia
Hewlett-Packard Co.
501 56th Street
CHARLESTON, WV 25304
Tel: (304) 925-0492
Fax:(304)925-1910
Wisconsin
Hewlett-Packard Co.
275 N. Corporate Dr.
BROOKFIELD,WI 53005
Tel: (414) 792-8800
Fax:(414)792-0218
URUGUAY
Pablo Ferrando S.A.C. e I.
Avenlda Italia 2877
CasilladeCorreo370
MONTEVIDEO
Tel: 59-82-802-586
Telex: 398802586
Olympla de Uruguay S.A.
Maqulnes de Oflclna
Avda. del Ubertador 1997
Casllla de Correos 6644
MONTEVIDEO
Tel: 91-1809, 98-3807
Telex: 6342 OROUUY
VENEZUELA
Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela C.A.
3A Transversal Los Rulces Norte
Edlfk;loSegre1-2&3
Apartado 50933
CARACAS 1050
Tel: (582) 239-5664
Telex: 251046 HEWPACK
Analytical Supplies, CA
Quinta #103 Impermes
Av El Centre
Los Chorros
Apartado 75472
CARACAS
Tel: 364904, 2394047
Telex: 26274 CABIC
Tecnologica Medica del Carlbe, C.A.
Multicentre Empresarlal del Este
Ave. Ubertador
Edif. Ubertador
Nucleo "C" - Oflclna 51-52
CARACAS
Tel: 339867/333780
Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela C.A.
Residencies TIa Betty Local 1
Avenlda 3 Y con Calle 75
MARACAIBO,EstadoZulla
Apartado 2646
Tel: 586175669
Telex: 62464 HPMAR
Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela C.A.
Urb. Lomas de Este
TorreTrebol — PIsoU
VALENCIA, EstadoCarabobo
Apartado 3347
Tel: (5841) 222992
YUGOSLAVIA
Do Hermes
General Zdanova 4
YU-11000BEOGRAD
Tel: (01 1)342 641
Telex: 11433
Do Hermes
Celovska 73
YU-61000 LIUBUANA
Tel: (061) 553 170
Telex: 31583
Elektrotehna
Tltova51
YU-61000 LIUBUANA
Do Hermes
KraljaTomlslaval
YU-71000 SARAJEVO
Tel: (071) 35 859
Telex: 41634
ZAIRE
Computer & Industrial Engineering
25, Avenue de la Justice
B.P. 12797
KINSHASA, Gombe
Tel: 32063
Telex: 21552
ZAMBIA
R.J. Tilbury (Zambia) Ltd.
P.O. Box 32792
LUSAKA
Tel: 215590
Telex: 40128
ZIMBABWE
Held Technical Sales (Private) Limited
45, Kelvin Road North
P.O. Box 3458
SAUSBURY
Tei:705231
Telex: 4-122 RH
September 1988
^Ei
HEWLETT
PACKARD
04952-90082E1189
Manual Part Number: 04952-90082
Microfiche Part Number: 04952-98818
Printed in the U.S A. November 1989
TVNews
OpenLibrary